How To Create A Facebook Page On Facebook On Facebook.Com

Transcription

1 Adobe Marketing Cloud Social Help

2 Contents Social Help Home...10 Release Notes...12 Pre- and Post-Release Best Practices...14 Customer Resource Hub...16 Getting Started with Social...19 Understanding Adobe Social...19 Understanding the Social/Analytics Integration...21 Enabling Social for Report Suites...21 Logging In to Social...22 Supported Browsers...23 Change Social Report Suite or Company...23 Product Notification System...23 Getting Started with LinkedIn...24 Sensitive Personal Data...25 Glossary: Social Definitions...25 Social Training Videos...29 Overview Dashboards...38 Marketing Overview Dashboard...38 Moderation Overview Dashboard...44 Analytics...48 Social Campaigns...48 Campaign Details...49 Custom Reports...50 Asset Tracking Codes...51 Last updated 5/1/2014 Social Help

3 Contents Authors...52 Social Platforms/Properties...54 Display Name...55 Language...56 Competitor Analytics...58 Social Buzz...60 Tune Sentiment...66 Post Details in Social Buzz Report...67 How to Tell Which Listening Rule Captured a Post...67 Properties...69 Property Details Report...71 Post Analytics...76 Post Analytics List View...76 Post Analytics Roll-Up View...82 Configuring Reports...85 Configuring Graphs...85 Configuring Options for Reports...86 Adjusting the Reporting Date Range...88 Publish...90 Content Calendar...90 Display and Filter the Content Calendar...90 Content Calendar List View...93 Content Calendar Month View...97 Content Calendar Week View Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar View or Create Post Drafts and Templates Suspend and Unsuspend Posts Export Content to Excel Parent and Child Posts Publisher Publisher Page Applications Last updated 5/1/2014 Social Help

4 Display and Filter Applications Using the Application Builder Design Preferences Create a Page Application Contest Workflow Add and Configure Elements Basic Elements Form Elements Contest Form Elements Contest Elements Contest Social Elements Coupon Elements Format Elements Delete Elements Add a Background Image Configure a Different Initial Screen for Non-Fans Configure Error Popup Message Configure Share Story Facebook Share Copy Best Practices Save a Page Application Update a Page Application View an Application's Statistics Manage Applications Edit a Page Application Publish a Page Application Unpublish a Page Application Rename a Page Application Deactivate a Page Application Clone a Page Application Manage Application Results Configure Facebook Applications Configure or Edit Facebook Application Settings Last updated 5/1/2014 Social Help

5 Contents Manage Audiences Integrate Scene7 Rich Media Viewers with Social Implement Template Code Sample Template Using Custom CSS Mobile Device Considerations Create an Application Using Mobile Layout Glossary: Application Builder Moderation Unified Moderation Create a New Moderation Feed Display Moderation Feeds Edit a Moderation Feed Clone a Moderation Feed Delete a Moderation Feed Moderate Individual Posts or Tweets Moderate Multiple Posts using Bulk Actions Connect Social User Profiles and View Klout Scores Troubleshoot Moderation Feeds Unified Moderation Rules Create a Moderation Rule Unified Moderation Workflow Configure Escalation Management Facebook Moderation Enable Moderation and Insights Enable and Configure Watch Words Moderate a Facebook Page Export Moderation History Retrieve and Refresh Posts in Facebook Moderation Queues Troubleshooting Facebook Moderation Facebook Issues Facebook Escalation Workflow CRM Integration Last updated 5/1/2014 Social Help

6 Settings Listening Rules Add Rules to Track Rule Variables Add Rules in Bulk Manage Active Rules Guidelines for Keyword Selection Starter's Guide for Listening Facebook Pages Grant Permissions for Social Add Facebook Pages Display, Search, and Filter Facebook Pages Configure Facebook Page Settings Require Approval for Facebook Pages Remove One or More Facebook Pages Re-Authorize a Facebook Page Twitter Accounts Add Twitter Accounts Require Approval for Twitter Posts Change the Owner or Report Suite for Twitter Accounts Remove a Twitter Account Re-Authorize a Twitter Account Google+ Pages Add Google+ Pages Require Approval for Google+ Posts Manage Circles Remove a Google+ Page Re-Authorize a Google+ Page LinkedIn Companies and Groups Add LinkedIn Company Pages and Groups Configure LinkedIn Companies and Groups Settings Require Approval for LinkedIn Companies and Groups YouTube Channels Last updated 5/1/2014 Social Help

7 Contents Add YouTube Channels Require Approval for YouTube Channels Change the Owner for YouTube Channels Remove a YouTube Channel Re-Authorize a YouTube Channel Sina Weibo Accounts Add Sina Weibo Accounts Require Approval for Sina Weibo Posts Change the Owner for Sina Weibo Accounts Remove a Sina Weibo Account Re-Authorize a Sina Weibo Account Page Groups Create Page Groups Edit Page Groups Clone Page Groups Delete a Page Group Facebook Audiences Create an Audience Manage Audiences Narrow an Audience During Publishing Marketing Cloud Users and Groups Add Users in the Analytics Admin Console Add User Group, Permissions, and Members Publishing Workflows Create a New Publishing Workflow Edit a Publishing Workflow Delete a Publishing Workflow Duplicate a Publishing Workflow Viewing the Audit Trail for Publishing Workflows Register Users Facebook Permissions Campaigns Create a Campaign Campaign Categorization Last updated 5/1/2014 Social Help

8 Circle Manager Create Circle Edit or Remove Circles Preferences Link Shorteners Add a ctx.ly Account Add a bit.ly Account Add an awe.sm Project Add a Po.st Account Add a BudURL Account Generate Short URLs in Posts Competitor Pages Add Competitor Pages Delete Competitor Pages Classifying Terms in SAINT Creating the Conversion Classification Structure Understanding Sentiment Scores How Sentiment Scores Display in Social How Sentiment Scores are Calculated Language Support Changing the UI Language Adobe Consulting Services Apps Form Data API FAQ Documentation Updates If There's a Problem Last updated 5/1/2014 Social Help

9 Contents Historical Release Notes Social Release Notes Social 3.2 Release Notes Social Release Notes Social Release Notes Social 3.1 Release Notes Social Release Notes Social 3.01 Release Notes Social 3 Features and Enhancements Contact and Legal Information Last updated 5/1/2014 Social Help

10 Social Help Home 10 Social Help Home Social provides a hosted, subscription-based solution to help you achieve your social media goals and improve your strategy and performance. Popular Topics Last update: 05/01/2014 Release Notes Learn about what's new in Social, including new features and fixes. Social Training Videos New training videos for Social 3 are available for viewing on Adobe EnterpriseTV. Documentation Updates Marketing Cloud Resources Adobe Social Community Marketing Cloud Release Notes Product Documentation Home Developer Idea Exchange Adobe Training and Tutorials Featured Solutions Center All updates (additions, deletions, and corrections) to the Social User Guide, by date. FAQ List of Frequently Asked Questions and links to where you can find the answers to these questions in Help. Getting Started with Social Understand the basic features and terminology to help you understand Social. Logging In to Social Learn how to log in to Social. Listening Rules Learn how to create and manage rules to track activities on the social web. Starter's Guide for Listening Take the pulse of brand-related conversations across the social web about your company, products, and competitors using the Adobe Social listening capabilities. Guidelines for Keyword Selection Learn how to track meaningful terms using Social. Understanding Sentiment Scores Understand how sentiment scores are calculated in Social. Content Calendar

11 Social Help Home 11 Learn how to use the Content Calendar to create new content and to interact with existing content through a List View or a Calendar View. Publisher Learn how to create content in the Social Publisher and simultaneously publish it to Facebook, Google+, and LinkedIn pages you manage and to your Twitter accounts. Create a Page Application Learn how to create applications to post on Facebook pages that you manage. Moderation Learn how to moderate posts and comments across social properties from within one convenient workflow. Language Support Display a list of languages that Adobe Social supports, by module.

12 Release Notes 12 Release Notes Information about new features and enhancements in Adobe Social. The Adobe Marketing Cloud solutions have been updated with many new features, enhancements, and fixes. For more information, including fixes to Social, see the Adobe Marketing Cloud Release Notes. See Documentation Updates for detailed information about updates to this guide that might not be included in these release notes. See Historical Release Notes for information about new features and enhancements in previous releases of Social. The Social release (04/17/2014) includes the following changes: New Features and Enhancements Feature Default campaign in Publisher Description Specify a default campaign for your report suite. When users create new posts in the Publisher or Content Calendar, the Campaign option is pre-populated with the default campaign. This setting streamlines publishing and governance by ensuring that all of your content is tagged and trackable to conversion events, even if users forget to set a campaign during the publishing process. Users can change the campaign if other campaigns are available. For more information, see Create a Campaign. Auto-shorten URLs Specify a default link shortener. The default link shortener is used to shorten all links in the post, unless users manually override the default shortener. For more information, see Generate Short URLs in Posts. Facebook moderation enhancements Private Messages: Create a moderation feed that displays only private messages that have been posted to an owned Facebook page. Audiences: Create a moderation feed that displays only content that has been posted to an owned Facebook page from users in a specified Facebook audience. This feature helps large organizations moderate Facebook posts more efficiently using a targeted approach. For more information, see Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed. Social Buzz report enhancements New Filters: Filter the Social Buzz report by Followers (Twitter only), Klout Score, Language, and Geography (countries, regions, and cities). Enhanced Posts by Geography Reportlet: A stacked-ranked chart now displays below the map. Click the map or chart to drill down into specific geographic regions. For more information, see Social Buzz. Publisher quick search Begin typing a property, group, or audience in the search box to streamline publishing content using the Publisher. For more information, see Publisher Page.

13 Release Notes 13 Feature Product notification system Description Keep up to date with the product notification system. This feature provides relevant and timely communications from Adobe within the Social product. Notifications can include information about product releases, maintenance windows, service disruptions, platform outages, and more. The product notification system provides more details as necessary. For more information, see Product Notification System. Fixes In addition to the new features and enhancements described above, enhancements and fixes in Social focus on improved performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. More than 260 back-end fixes and enhancements address these areas. The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported issues. Fixed an issue that prevented the search box on the Social Campaigns report from working correctly. Fixed an issue that sometimes caused a campaign to display twice in the Social Campaigns report. Fixed an issue that prevented the Social Buzz report's Authors reportlet populating VK data. Fixed an issue with the Post Performance reportlet (Marketing Overview dashboard and Post Analytics report) that caused the date timestamp on the pop-up for YouTube and LinkedIn posts to not display. In the Post Details report's Comments reportlet, clicking the name of a YouTube video's author now correctly links to that author's YouTube channel. YouTube video comments on the Post Details report now display in reverse chronological order (most recent first) to match YouTube functionality. The number of comments now displays on the Post Details report for LinkedIn posts. When users export a report to an Excel file, calls are made to various services (for example, YouTube and LinkedIn). If one of these services is unavailable, the export cannot process correctly. The following error message now displays: "The export failed to download due to a service for one of the platforms being unavailable. Please try again later." Clicking the property name on the Post Details page now links to that property's Property Overview page. Fixed an issue that caused the Like count for companies with global Facebook pages to be the same, regardless of country. Fixed an issue that prevented all posts from loading when refreshing posts in a moderation feed. Fixed an issue that prevented filtering a Direct Message moderation feed. Enhanced the error messaging in the Publisher and Content Calendar when multiple posts fail to publish. The Post Predictions feature in the Publisher now takes scheduled posts into account when recommending the optimal time to post content. If you have a post scheduled for posting at a certain time, Social will not recommend the same posting time for another post. Fixed an issue that sometimes caused posts to fail with an "undefined method 'parse_v3_params' for #" message. Fixed an issue that caused images in the Publisher preview panel to not format correctly. Fixed an issue in the Publisher that sometimes caused the wrong audience to display in the most-used list. Fixed an issue in Publisher that caused the properties in the most-used list to display in the incorrect order. Properties now display in the order of usage, most-frequently used to less-frequently used. Fixed an issue that caused published images to not be properly rotated on iphones. Fixed an issue that prevented the property list from displaying correctly in the Publisher. Fixed an issue that caused YouTube and Sina Wiebo properties to not display in the Select Social Properties list on the Suspend Posts page. Fixed an issue that prevented users from targeting a tweet to a specific country.

14 Release Notes 14 Due to changes in the Twitter API, you can now target tweets by country only. You cannot target tweets by city and region. Social now displays a warning message if a user enters a link in a post and does not shorten it. Fixed an issue that prevented links in Tweets from referencing a campaign correctly. While creating a listening rule with a geo-related filter, such as Bounding Box, an error message now displays if the user enters invalid criteria. This message displays if users use the Basic or Builder tab to create the rule. Fixed an issue that prevented users from deleting multiple listening rules. Fixed an issue that caused an error when users attempted to create a new listening rule. Fixed an issue that prevented a user from deleting a Facebook account if that user is the only admin linked to that page in Social. When users create a new user group, a green success message displays instead of the yellow warning message that incorrectly displayed in previous releases. While creating a new Facebook audience, double-clicking the Save button no longer creates two audiences. Pre- and Post-Release Best Practices Best practices for a successful experience with a new product release. This section contains the following information: Pre-Release: Schedule Posts Around the Maintenance Period During the Release: Publish Immediately Post-Release: Check for Failed Posts and Reschedule Pre-Release: Schedule Posts Around the Maintenance Period If possible, we suggest that you try not to schedule any posts to publish during the maintenance period, which is announced one week prior to the release and is typically 2 to 6 p.m. PST on the day of the release. This will help minimize any potential issues with posts not going out as scheduled. We understand that this is not always possible, so if you know you have posts that need to go out during the maintenance period, we suggest monitoring that content to ensure it published properly or actively create and publish at the time it needs to go live. During the Release: Publish Immediately While we don't anticipate any periods of significant disruption, we suggest that you try not to schedule any posts to publish during the release maintenance window and instead publish posts instantly to your pages. Use the "Schedule time for post NOW" option where possible.

15 Release Notes 15 Post-Release: Check for Failed Posts and Reschedule In the event that one or more posts fail to publish to the appropriate social property, you can filter the Content Calendar to show only posts that failed. You can then duplicate the post and schedule it to be posted again. Although we do not anticipate post failures on a regular basis, sometimes posts fail due to the targeted social platform experiencing temporary technical issues, a property needing to be reauthorized, or posting content during a scheduled Social maintenance window (for monthly releases, for example). We have improved the error messages users can receive when publishing content using the Publisher or Content Calendar. New error and messages contain detailed information about internal failures and external failures (social platform) and contain information to troubleshoot the problem, if applicable. To find and resend failed posts 1. Click Publish > Content Calendar. 2. Access the filter options by clicking above the left navigation rail. 3. Click Post Status then select Failed (ensure that you deselect all other status boxes). The Content Calendar refreshes to show only failed posts. Notice that a Failed flag displays in each failed post's tile. 4. Click or tap the desired post to open it in editing mode. 5. Click to create a duplicate post. Creating a duplicate post lets you send the post immediately or reschedule for a later time.you can also edit the post, if needed. For more information about working with draft posts, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates. 6. To display all duplicated posts, from the Post Timeline drop-down list, click Drafts. 7. Locate the desired post, then click Schedule to specify the post's schedule (immediately or according to schedule). 8. To delete the original, failed post, repeat Steps 1 through 3 above, then click on the desired post's tile.

16 Release Notes 16 Customer Resource Hub Resources to help you become acquainted with the new features in each release of Adobe Social. Resources include Capability Spotlights, Quick Start Guides, New Feature Guides, quick how-to training videos demonstrating new features, migration guides, and links to webinars. Last updated: 03/24/2014 This section contains the following information: New Resources Capability Spotlights Quick Start Guides Features Guides Training Videos Migration Guides Webinars New Resources Check out the latest resources for this release. Link to Resource Training Video: Social What's New? For more information in Help, see: Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed, Create a Campaign, Generate Short URLs in Posts, Social Buzz, and Product Notification System. Capability Spotlights Learn about specific capabilities and related specs. These guides, in PDF format, spotlight new features to get you up to speed quickly. Link to Capability Spotlight Social Relationship Management Adobe Social Product Overview Listening Rule Builder Multi-Level Publishing Approval Workflows For more information in Help, see Connect Social User Profiles and View Klout Scores Add Rules to Track Publishing Workflows Quick Start Guides Learn about new features. These guides, in PDF format, help get you up to speed with new features and enhancements. Link to Quick Start Guide Social Moderation Quick Start Guide For more information in Help, see Unified Moderation

17 Release Notes 17 Features Guides Access lists of new features per release. These guides, in PDF format, provide highlights of new major functionality and list additional new features for each area of the product. Link to Features Guide Social 3.2 New Features Guide (Revised: 03/06/2014) Social 3.1 New Features Guide Social 3.0 New Features Guide Training Videos Watch short how-to videos about specific features and functionality. Link to Training Video Social What's New Social Moderation Tool Administrator Setup Social Moderation Tool User Orientation Day-to-Day Moderation Part 1 Day-to-Day Moderation Part 2 Day-to-Day Moderation Part 3 Social 3.2 Listening Enhancements Social 3.2 Link Shortening Enhancements Social 3.2 Publisher and Content Calendar Enhancements Social 3.2 Metric Selector Enhancements Social 3.2 Competitive Analytics For more information in Help, see Unified Moderation Unified Moderation Unified Moderation Unified Moderation Listening Rules Configure Link Shortening Preferences Enable or Disable Post Predictions and Publisher Page Properties and Post Analytics Roll-Up View Competitor Analytics Note: In addition to these short how-to videos, see Social Training Videos for more formal, detailed videos about Adobe Social and its features. Migration Guides Learn what you need to know before migrating to new functionality. Link to Migration Guide Moderation Tool Migration Guide For more information in Help, see Unified Moderation Webinars Watch webinars to help you get up to speed with various Social features.

18 Release Notes 18 Link to Webinar Building Customer Relationships with Adobe Social: Moderation Tool Use Cases Adobe Social Campaigns For more information in Help, see Unified Moderation Campaigns

19 Getting Started with Social 19 Getting Started with Social Adobe Social provides a complete view of your social media initiatives across various channels, including Facebook, Twitter, Google+, YouTube, blogs, and more. Social is completely redesigned with new interactive and actionable reports that let you drill down into your social data to help you make data-driven decisions. New tools and workflows streamline day-to-day tasks, facilitate collaboration, and help you share content and data more easily with others in your organization. The new user interface lets you engage audiences and access real-time reports, wherever you are and whenever the need arises. The touch interface is designed for use on desktop and laptop computers and is optimized for use on mobile devices, specifically on ios and Android browsers. Adobe Social helps you better understand how conversations in social media affect brand perception, channel activity, and key business metrics. Social lets you know how often a product or term is mentioned, gauge sentiment, and then see how social metrics correlate with your business KPIs. Social also lets you publish engaging content to Facebook, Twitter, Google+, YouTube, and LinkedIn. You can create and configure moderation feeds to facilitate moderation of escalated issues and content on owned Facebook pages, LinkedIn group or company pages, Twitter accounts, and your own social communities designed with Adobe Experience Manager (AEM) Social Communities. Social uses a permissions-based system to ensure that only authorized users can publish content or moderate posts. Note: This guide documents all Social functionality. Some features (such as Moderation) must be specifically enabled by your Adobe Account Manager. Furthermore, many features are permission-based (such as the Publisher and Applications). If some features have not been provisioned for your company, or if you don't have the appropriate permissions from your company's Social administrator, you won't be able to see those features in the user interface. As a result, the documentation might discuss features and functionality that you cannot access. Understanding Adobe Social Adobe Social helps you create and demonstrate social media Return on Investment (ROI). Social media presents many business challenges for the social marketer, including: The value of social media is difficult to prove. The difficulty involved in measuring the value of social media limits the marketer's ability to demonstrate tangible business impact and prevents teams from justifying increased investments. Social media is an isolated effort with universal impact. Customers don't limit their interactions with businesses to social networks, but social media initiatives are often disconnected from marketing and customer service. It is difficult for social initiatives to keep pace with social customers. Social marketing requires real-time engagement and response. Using disconnected processes makes your social media efforts more difficult. Examining data gathered using multiple tools limits your understanding of who customers are, what they want, and how to engage with them effectively in real time.

20 Getting Started with Social 20 It is difficult to globalize social efforts without losing control of your brand. Social efforts are difficult to scale a consistent brand presence globally while empowering local teams. With these challenges in mind, Adobe Social provides the following benefits to help you manage your social media presence: Deliver and demonstrate social media ROI. Move beyond Likes and Shares by connecting social media to business results. Understand how interactions with your customers using social media channels impact purchase behavior, brand value, and purchases. Obtain an end-to-end view of customers. Connect your social media fan base to your marketing database for a complete view of customers. Use social insights to better understand who your customers are and what they want. Use detailed customer information to shape your marketing efforts. Go from insight to action at the speed of social. Gather real-time insights, engage in real-time response, publish engaging content, and amplify that content with social advertising all within one platform and workflow. Organize for global scale with local impact. Scale social efforts with a single tool built to manage across brands, business units, teams, time zones, and languages. Organize efforts and maintain a consistent brand presence, both global and hyper-local. Adobe Social offers the following capabilities to help you better connect with customers using social media channels to drive ROI: Listening, Measurement, and Analytics Measure the effectiveness of campaigns, content, and engagement without tagging or manual implementation. Understand which marketing tactics work best and see exactly how fans, followers, and advocates affect your bottom line. Take what you learn and optimize marketing efforts quickly and easily. Get a complete view of your customers across all touch points not just on social networks. Understand customer behavior, brand preferences, purchases, loyalty, and advocacy. Use this information to market more effectively. Engagement Create content once and publish it to multiple places in ways that are appropriate for each social platform. Choose when, where, and to whom content is pushed. Easily create and deploy interactive applications with either complete design control or built from quick-to-deploy templates, including contests, coupons, and questionnaires. Listening and Moderation Monitor and respond to conversations within your communities on Facebook and Twitter. Respond to questions and problems quickly by routing issues to the right people. Track issues through resolution. Identify trends and influencers as they emerge. Use real-time insights to go from strategy to execution in a matter of minutes. Governance and Administration Use flexible permissions for users and groups. Review processes that help global teams collaborate while maintaining security and controlling access.

21 Getting Started with Social 21 Understanding the Social/Analytics Integration Adobe Social combines data collected from the social web with Adobe Analytics data. This data is collected from visitors to your website, Facebook pages, Google+ pages, Twitter followers, and users of your Facebook page applications. Brand names, product names, and company names represent your business. Conversations about these terms constantly occur on the social web. In addition to these conversations on the social web, your Analytics implementation provides you with a wealth of information gathered from visitors who access your organization's website or page to consume content. This information includes the number of visitors to your website or page, the number of application users, the number of products purchased, the amount of revenue, and so forth. As a marketer, you need to understand the conversations on the social web in terms of quantity and quality. More importantly, you need to understand how these conversations affect the rest of your business. For example, when an increasing number of people mention your products on Twitter, does your website see a corresponding increase in visitors and purchases? The Social/Analytics integration combines data gathered from the social web with data collected from consumers of your content. Social seamlessly combines social analytics with quantitative analytics gathered by Analytics to help you tie activity on the social web with core Key Performance Indicators (KPIs). Social aggregates all relevant activity from social networks and online communities and identifies how that activity impacts key business metrics and brand perception. This information ultimately helps you guide social activity across channels and drive ROI. Social helps customers monitor and measure the social web to see their valuable social data in context with all of their online initiatives. This helps marketers get quick answers to business questions such as: What is social media's impact on my business? How are our social initiatives and conversations driving conversion of revenue? Who are the social influencers for my business? When positive social sentiment peaks, does our web traffic peak or are our conversion metrics positively impacted? Note: Many of the concepts in this guide are covered in more detail in the Marketing Reports and Analytics Interface Help and the Analytics Admin & Reference Guide. Because Social and Analytics are tightly integrated, a good understanding of Analytics and its features is important to fully understand Social. Enabling Social for Report Suites Contact Adobe Client Care to enable Adobe Social for your desired report suites. For more information, see Contact and Legal Information. After Adobe Client Care enables social reporting for your report suite, you are ready to log in to Social. For more information, see Logging In to Social.

22 Getting Started with Social 22 Logging In to Social Log in to Adobe Social using your web browser. 1. Access the Adobe Marketing Cloud by browsing to the following URL: 2. Depending on your Social configuration, log in to Social using the following methods: Adobe Analytics + Social Users: Specify your Company, Username, and Password, then click Sign In. Context Optional Users: Log in to your Facebook account, then click Sign in with Facebook. Adobe Marketing Cloud + Social Users: Click Sign In with Adobe ID, specify your address and Adobe ID password, then click Sign In. The Adobe Marketing Cloud brings Adobe's marketing solutions together into one virtual, private space. The Marketing Cloud is where your teams can access projects, collaborate, visualize, and socialize across solutions. After you successfully log in to Marketing Cloud for the first time, the Link Your Accounts page displays. Use this page to link your Social account to your Adobe ID. For information about integrating the Marketing Cloud in your implementation, contact your Adobe Account Manager. Note: To sign out of Social, click in the window header, then click Sign Out. Resetting Your Password Adobe Analytics + Social Users: If you use your Company, Username, and Password to sign in to Social, and you need to reset your password, click Forgot Password. Specify your Company and username, then click Reset my Password. You will receive an message instructing you how to reset your password. If you do not know your company and username, contact your organization's Social administrator. Context Optional or Adobe Marketing Cloud + Social Users: If you use your Adobe ID (Adobe's single-sign-on system) to sign in to Social, and you need to reset your password, click Sign in with Adobe ID, then click Trouble Signing in? Specify the account that is associated with your Adobe ID, then click Reset my Password. You will receive an message instructing you how to reset your password.

23 Getting Started with Social 23 Supported Browsers Log in to Adobe Social using a supported browser. An error message displays if you attempt to log in using an unsupported browser. Adobe Social and the Adobe Marketing Cloud support the following browsers: Microsoft Internet Explorer 9 or higher Google Chrome Mozilla Firefox Apple Safari Use the latest available version of your web browser of choice for an optimal experience. Change Social Report Suite or Company When you log in to Social, you log in to a report suite and company. If you have more than one report suite or company, you can change to another report suite or company at any time. To change the report suite From the right side of the Social header, click, then select the desired report suite. A report suite defines the complete, independent reporting on a chosen website, set of websites, or subset of web pages. Usually, a report suite is one website, but it can be a global segment where you have combined several sites' numbers to get totals. When you select another report suite, Social changes to display the information from the selected suite. To change the company 1. From the right side of the Social header, click. 2. From the Company drop-down list, select the desired company. If your organization has many report suites that apply to different portions within your company, Social provides the ability to create a new login company to divide or copy report suites for different individuals within your organization. This is especially useful for large organizations that deal with different business units where many report suites are not applicable to others in their company. Product Notification System The product notification system helps keep you up to date with relevant and timely communications from Adobe within the Social product. Notifications can include information about product releases, maintenance windows, service disruptions, platform outages, and more. The product notification system provides more details as necessary. Notifications display in the upper-right corner of Social in the toolbar. Click the notification icon to display the list of notifications.

24 Getting Started with Social 24 For monthly scheduled maintenance windows, you can review the release notes to get up to speed on new features and read descriptions of resolutions for important customer-reported issues. Be sure to review the Pre- and Post-Release Best Practices section to help avoid publishing problems during the maintenance window. If there are special circumstances to consider for a release, instructions will be included in the Customer Resource Hub. Getting Started with LinkedIn Information to help you begin using Social to publish content to your LinkedIn company pages and groups. This topic includes the following information: Adding LinkedIn Properties to Social Publishing Posts to LinkedIn Company Pages and Groups Adding LinkedIn Properties to Social Before you can publish to LinkedIn company pages and groups, you must add those pages and groups to your Social account. After your properties are added, you can then post status updates to company pages as a company and post status updates to groups as an individual. For more information, see Add LinkedIn Company Pages and Groups. After you have added your LinkedIn properties to Social, you can configure optional settings for the company pages or groups. You can enable or disable approval settings, change property owners, or delete properties. For more information, see Configure LinkedIn Companies and Groups Settings. Publishing Posts to LinkedIn Company Pages and Groups Just as you would publish to Facebook, Twitter, or Google+, your LinkedIn properties will be available in the Social Properties drop-down list in the Social Publisher. There are a few types of posts and settings you can create, depending on whether you are posting to a LinkedIn company page or to a group: LinkedIn Company Pages Publish status updates to company pages as a company

25 Getting Started with Social 25 Create a status update with an inline shortened link Target based on company size, industry, job function, seniority, and geography Attach a photo to your status update (only available when publishing to company pages) Assign a campaign to your status update LinkedIn Groups Publish discussions to groups as an individual (not as a company) Create a discussion with a title Add a description to your discussion with an inline shortened link in the post preview Add a custom link and display link details in your discussion (only available when publishing to groups) Edit the description in the post preview (only available when publishing to groups) Edit the custom link-type post thumbnail and details in the post preview (only available when publishing to groups) Assign a campaign to your discussion For more information about publishing content to your LinkedIn properties, see Publisher. Sensitive Personal Data Adobe Social does not store values that appear to represent credit card numbers or social security numbers. When these values are present, they are replaced with the string ##########. To view the original content you must view it directly on the target social network rather than in Adobe Social (for example, in Social moderation feeds or the Social Buzz report). Glossary: Social Definitions Terms and definitions used in Social and its documentation. Term Definition Audience A measure of the number of people who will be notified of a tweet or will be very likely to see a tweet by an author on Twitter. For example, a Twitter user with 2,000,000 followers would have an audience of 2,000,000. The Audience and Followers metrics (sometimes called reach) apply to Twitter and Tumblr only. These metrics do not apply to other social platforms (Facebook, YouTube, and so forth). The Audience and Followers metrics in the various reports display a zero (0) for non-applicable platforms. Author The creator of the post, picture, or video on the social network. Content Feed A collection of verbatims from one or more social providers. Content Link The link to the original content on the social provider. Customer A company using Social to track terms on the social web.

26 Getting Started with Social 26 Term Definition Customer Intelligence The use of data to understand the composition, needs, and satisfaction of the customer base. Also, the enabling technology used to segment buyers into groupings to leverage in marketing activities. Emotion Analysis The act of applying natural language processing (NLP) to the verbatims of mentions to gauge emotion of a post. Adobe's proprietary algorithm leverages Plutchik's Wheel of Emotion, a scientific model of assessing emotion, to analyze the post for primary and secondary emotions. Visualization is applied to help communicate the analysis to the end user and allow for aggregation of emotions across a selection of posts to understand general emotion trends over time, of a topic, of an audience, and so forth. Engagement The ability to directly respond and engage with social authors one-to-one, with the goal of participating in conversations surfaced through social media monitoring to answer questions, address problems and issues, engage customers, activate influencers and advocates, gather insights, and more. Followers The number of users who could see a post. The Audience and Followers metrics (sometimes called reach) apply to Twitter and Tumblr only. These metrics do not apply to other social platforms (Facebook, YouTube, and so forth). The Audience and Followers metrics in the various reports display a zero (0) for non-applicable platforms. Influencer A social author who has a perceived or tangible impact on brand perception or business results through his or her social graph. Influencers can be identified through different measures of influence, including reach, following, Klout score, share volume, sentiment, web traffic generated, conversion generated, and revenue generated. Insights Actionable business learnings derived from analyzing raw data. Listening Platform Technology that provides social listening, social media monitoring, and social intelligence. Adobe Social is a listening platform. Sophistication of this technology should consider the type of access to social data sources. There is a difference between fire hose versus public APIs, a difference in real-time availability to that data and the depth of data and metadata available, and an ethical difference between sourcing data through official, standardized means versus inconsistent and unreliable methods like site-crawling and screen-scraping. Mention A count of each time Social records a keyword term being mentioned on the social web in a post, picture, or video. Post A verbatim posted to a social site that includes the author, term, and content link.

27 Getting Started with Social 27 Term Definition Sentiment Sentiment is a metric that defines the emotional feeling of a term. A low score indicates that viewers reacted or likely felt unfavorably towards the post, picture, or video. A high score indicates that viewers reacted or likely felt favorably towards the post, picture, or video. For more information, see Understanding Sentiment Scores. Sentiment Analysis The act of applying natural language processing (NLP) to the verbatims of mentions to gauge sentiment of a post. A score or visualization can be applied to help communicate the analysis to the end user and also allow for aggregation of scores across a selection of posts to understand general sentiment trends over time, of a topic, of an audience, etc. Social sentiment analysis includes machine-learning algorithms that are also manually tunable and can adjust to a brand's specificities and preferences over time. Social Intelligence The business insights derived from social listening and social media monitoring. Social intelligence takes the form of dashboards and reports that together help surface customer trends, business opportunities, and brand threats that can be used to improve and optimize social content strategy and campaigns. Trends, business opportunities, and brand threats can be routed and leveraged across marketing channels and other business units to improve marketing and customer experiences. Social Listening The ability to query social network data sources for mentions of keywords and hashtags that have relevance to a business over a specific period of time. Includes abilities to do the following: Create complex Boolean string queries Clean the data, including filtering spam and removing duplicate mentions Enrich the data through metadata, natural language processing (NLP), and other analyses (including language, location, sentiment, emotion, Klout score, and more) Filter the query results (including by platform, language, location, and proximity) Social listening also includes the ability to visualize and display the verbatims of those mentions and associated metadata. Social Media Monitoring Real time social listening, moving beyond historical listening for keywords and hashtags for the purposes of research and insight, to the active monitoring of conversations across the social web and identifying real-time brand buzz with the goal of engagement and participation. This also includes the abilities to tag conversations for further analysis and prioritization and route them to other stakeholders and departments for review, processing, and resolution. Social Platform A source of social data (must be able to provide the following: verbatim, content link, and author). Social platforms include Twitter, Facebook, Google+, YouTube, and so forth. Term A word that the customer wants to track on the social web. For example, "basketball."

28 Getting Started with Social 28 Term Definition Topic A topic that the user is interested in, which is defined by a collection of terms. Verbatim The text (full text or as much text as possible) from a social comment from the social platform.

29 Social Training Videos 29 Social Training Videos Training videos for Social 3 are available for viewing on Adobe EnterpriseTV. These training videos are meant for existing users of Adobe Social. In each video, social practitioners will learn basic concepts, receive step-by-step instructions on how to use the feature, and best practices to get the most of that capability. You can find these videos and more on Adobe EnterpriseTV ( For Social training videos, under Social, click the Adobe Social tab. Click the desired link in the Video Link column to view the video. For your convenience, links to individual videos are also available from within appropriate topics in this guide. Note: New features and functionality are being added to Social with each monthly release. Because of this, as time passes, some information in these videos might become outdated. These training videos will be updated on a regular basis to reflect these changes. However, between video-editing cycles, notes in the table below explain these changes and link to the appropriate section in this guide so that you can always stay up to date. The Social training videos are organized according to the following core capability areas: Setup Listening Moderation Publishing Social Applications Campaigns Analytics Setup Video Link Property Setup and Ownership Description Learn how to add social properties, assign ownership, and configure approval and moderation settings. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Add Facebook Pages Configure Facebook Page Settings Add Twitter Accounts Require Approval for Twitter Posts Change the Owner or Report Suite for Twitter Accounts Add Google+ Pages Require Approval for Google+ Posts Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.

30 Social Training Videos 30 Listening Video Link Social Buzz Description Learn what social data sources we listen to and how to read and interact with the report For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topic: Social Buzz Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Moderation Video Link Moderation Feed Management Description Learn how to create, save, and manage moderation feeds and filters. Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Moderation Basics Learn the basics of how to filter and moderate content, access tweet and user details, and respond to Direct Messages. Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Moderation Escalation Workflows Learn how to customize escalation reasons and suggested actions, route issues, and how to manage escalations. Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Publishing Video Link Publisher Settings Description Learn the basics of how to add new social properties, create page and audience groups, and set up link shorteners. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Configure Facebook Page Settings Add Facebook Pages

31 Social Training Videos 31 Video Link Description Create Page Groups Edit Page Groups Create an Audience Publisher Page Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Post Publishing Learn the basics of how to create a new post, target content, and schedule posts. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Publisher Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar Publisher Page Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Multi-Platform Publishing Learn how to publish content to multiple social platforms and properties simultaneously. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Publisher Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar Publisher Page Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Audience Publishing Learn what audience management is and how to create and save audience targets to streamline the publishing process. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Create an Audience Create Circle Publisher Page Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.

32 Social Training Videos 32 Video Link Predictive Publishing Description Learn how to predict post performance and work with recommendations. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topic: Publisher Page Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Content Calendar Overview Learn the basics of how to navigate the Content Calendar, work with different views, and take action on scheduled posts. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Content Calendar Display and Filter the Content Calendar Content Calendar List View Content Calendar Month View Content Calendar Week View Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar View or Create Post Drafts and Templates Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Content Calendar Working with Posts Learn how to create and edit posts using the Content Calendar. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Content Calendar Display and Filter the Content Calendar Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar Parent and Child Posts Edit Parent or Child Posts in Content Calendar View or Create Post Drafts and Templates Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Content Calendar Multi-Platform Posts Learn how to manage multi-platform posts in the Content Calendar. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Content Calendar Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar

33 Social Training Videos 33 Video Link Description Parent and Child Posts Edit Parent or Child Posts in Content Calendar Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Content Calendar Drafts & Templates Learn what Drafts and Templates are in the Content Calendar and how to create and edit them. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Content Calendar Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar View or Create Post Drafts and Templates Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Social Applications Video Link Apps Overview Description Learn the basics of how to create a new app, edit existing apps, and measure app activity. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Using the Application Builder Create a Page Application Edit a Page Application View an Application's Statistics Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. App Builder Basics Pt. 1 Learn about the different app templates available and some ideas for how to use them. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Create a Page Application Using the Application Builder Add and Configure Elements

34 Social Training Videos 34 Video Link Description Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. App Builder Basics Pt. 2 Learn how to create an app from scratch, work in the app builder environment, and configure app templates, screens, and elements. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Create a Page Application Using the Application Builder Add and Configure Elements Format Elements Button Element Form Elements Form Submit Button Element Configure Error Popup Message Configure Share Story Add a Background Image Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. App Builder Advanced Learn how to enable app audiences, customize app metadata, integrate custom code, and integrate Adobe Analytics code to track traffic and conversions. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: App Audiences App Settings Advanced Settings Analytics Settings Using Custom CSS Code Block Element Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. App Audiences Code Block ElementLearn what app audiences are and how to set up and manage them. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics:

35 Social Training Videos 35 Video Link Description Manage Audiences App Audiences Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. App Publishing Learn how to request and manage Facebook app IDs and how to publish apps to Facebook pages and websites. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Request a New Facebook Application Create a Page Application Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Campaigns Video Link Campaign Set Up Description Learn what social campaigns are, why they're important, and how to set them up. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Campaigns Create a Campaign Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Campaign Overview Report Learn what the Social Campaigns Overview report is and what measurement and analytics are available. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Social Campaigns Campaign Details Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.

36 Social Training Videos 36 Video Link Campaign Details Report Description Learn how to dive into the Social Campaign Details report and what metrics and analytics are available. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Social Campaigns Campaign Details Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Analytics Video Link Overview Dashboard Description Learn about the Overview dashboard, the types of metrics available, and why they are important. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Marketing Overview Dashboard Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Post Analytics Learn what post performance metrics are available and how to filter the report. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Post Analytics Post Details Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Social Property Analytics Learn what property stats are available and how to read the reports. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Properties Property Details Report Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.

37 Social Training Videos 37 Video Link Custom Campaigns Reports Description Learn about the integration between Adobe Social campaign data and Adobe Analytics metrics and how to configure the Asset Tracking Codes report. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Custom Reports Asset Tracking Codes Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases. Custom Listening Reports Learn about the integration between Adobe Social listening data and Adobe Analytics metrics and how to configure the custom listening reports. For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered in this training video, see the following topics: Custom Reports Authors Social Platforms/Properties Display Name Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August Note that some functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.

38 Overview Dashboards 38 Overview Dashboards View the Marketing Overview and Moderation Overview dashboards. Marketing Overview Dashboard Use the Marketing Overview dashboard to get a complete view of your social initiatives. You can also drill down into specific reports from the various reportlets on this dashboard. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Overview Dashboard. 1. In the left navigation menu, click Overview > Marketing Overview. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for all reportlets in the Marketing Overview dashboard. The metric totals on this dashboard reflect the specified time period. If you select Custom Range, a calendar displays. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjusting the Reporting Date Range. 3. (Optional) Filter the dashboard by social platform or by owned properties only. You can display information for one platform, multiple platforms, or all available platforms. The report is dynamic. Individual reportlets display or are hidden, depending on whether they are relevant to the selected platforms. For example, if you deselect Facebook, the Facebook Pages reportlet is hidden. In addition, information on the various reportlets change depending on the selected platforms. a) Access the filter options by clicking above the left navigation rail. b) Select one or more social platforms (for example, Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, and YouTube) to filter the report. c) Select or deselect the Only Owned Properties check box, depending on your needs. If this option is selected (the default), data for only owned properties that the logged-in user owns is displayed, even if that user has permission to view all analytics information. This filter applies to the Posts, Post Performance, and Facebook Pages reportlets only. This setting is persistent, meaning that if you log out of Social and then log back in and view the Marketing Overview Dashboard, the specified setting is retained. If this option is selected, the UI indicates at the top of the dashboard that data for only owned properties is displayed. 4. View the desired reportlet. Social Buzz: Contains a line chart that displays your most popular listening rules and their corresponding number of mentions. If you have not already added listening rules, click Add Rules and follow the directions in Add Rules to Track.

39 Overview Dashboards 39 The individual lines on the chart are color coded. Mouse over any data point to see statistics for specific dates. Click the blue title to display the Social Buzz report. Posts: Displays a ribbon showing your top posts, along with their engagement rates (number of engaged users divided by unique reach), clicks, date and time of post, and a representation of the actual post.

40 Overview Dashboards 40 Use the drop-down list at the top of the ribbon to sort your top posts by the number of engagements or by post time (in ascending or descending order). Click the blue title to display the Post Analytics report. Click to view the post's Post Details report. Post Performance: Contains a bubble chart displaying statistics for post performance across social platforms.

41 Overview Dashboards 41 Note: You can mouse over individual metric titles in Social dashboards and reports to display metric definitions in the user interface. The following metrics are available, depending on which platforms you selected to display in the dashboard: Facebook Engagements: The number of stories and post consumptions for the selected date range. Twitter Engagements: The number of people who replied, retweeted, favorited, or clicked a link. Google+ Engagements: The number of people who clicked +1, commented on, shared, or clicked a link on posts for the selected date range. LinkedIn Engagements: The number of people who liked, commented on, or clicked a link on posts for the company during the selected date range. YouTube Engagements: The number of times people commented on, favorited, liked, or shared videos or subscribed to the channel for the selected date range. Mouse over an individual bubble to display the following information for that post: date and time of post, reach, and engagements. The bubbles are color coded to make it easy to distinguish posts by social platform. Posts that are vertically higher on the chart represent greater reach and the size of the bubbles indicate the relative number of engagements. Click the blue title to display the post's Post Details report. Campaigns: Contains a representation of your top campaigns.

42 Overview Dashboards 42 Each campaign tile displays the name of the campaign and details for the selected metric. Use the drop-down list on the right side of the reportlet to change the displayed metric. For example, you can view revenue, orders, page views, and more. Click the blue title to display the Social Campaigns report. Referring Domains: Displays the top-level domains that referred visitors to your site, along with their number of visits. This reportlet helps you determine which external sites contribute the most traffic to your pages and applications. Mentions by Geography: Displays an interactive map of the world showing mentions of your listening rules on the social web.

43 Overview Dashboards 43 The Mentions by Geography reportlet provides a visual representation of total mentions of your tracked terms per country. Darker-shaded countries have more mentions than lighter-shaded countries. Hover over an area to display its total number of mentions. Facebook Pages: Displays the number of Page Views and Total Likes across all Facebook pages visible to the user in the account. The following metrics are available: Page Views: The number of people who saw your pages during the selected date range. Total Likes: The total number of people (unique users) who have liked your pages as of the last day of the selected date range. Your top five Facebook pages, along with their respective Page Views and Total Likes, display at the bottom of the chart. This bar chart can be sorted based on Page View or Total Likes by clicking the header in the table. Applications: Displays the total number of Engagements and Visits for the top applications in the account.

44 Overview Dashboards 44 The following metrics are available: Engagements: The total number of people who have submitted data to your application (form submit, contest entry, sweepstakes, or poll vote) for the selected date range. Visits: The number of times the first screen of your application has been loaded for the selected date range. Your top five applications, along with their respective Engagement and Visits numbers, display at the bottom of the chart. This bar chart can be sorted based on Engagements or Visits by clicking the header in the table. Moderation Overview Dashboard Use the Moderation Overview dashboard to get a complete view of your organization's moderation efforts. You can view moderation statistics for individual members of your team, see how long it takes your team to resolve escalated issues, determine which time of day most issues are escalated, compare the number of unresolved issues to resolved issues, and more. 1. In the left navigation menu, click Overview > Moderation Overview. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for all reportlets in the Moderation Overview dashboard. The metric totals on this dashboard reflect the specified time period. If you select Custom Range, a calendar displays. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjusting the Reporting Date Range. 3. View the desired reportlet. Issues Overview: Contains a chart that displays escalated, claimed, and resolved issues for the selected date range and also includes historical counts. Unlike other charts that display counts of activity only during that selected date range, this chart displays respective counts "until" that time interval in the selected date range.

45 Overview Dashboards 45 The individual lines on the chart are color coded. Mouse over any data point to see statistics for specific dates. Team: Contains a chart showing each moderator or your team with corresponding statistics showing the number of new, claimed, and resolved issues and the average number of minutes it takes for each moderator to resolve an issue. Assigned Issues: Displays a donut chart that displays the percentage of issues assigned to individual moderation users or groups.

46 Overview Dashboards 46 Mouse over any segment of the donut to view the percentage of issues assigned to an individual moderation user or group. Avg.Time to Resolution: Contains a bar chart indicating how many minutes, on average, it takes your moderation team to resolve issues, by date. Mouse over any bar to view the average amount of time to resolve an issue on each date. Red bars mean that the average time was more than the threshold. Green bars mean that the average time was less than the threshold. The threshold is based on the average amount of time spent to resolve all issues in the current report suite. The threshold is currently not editable. Issue by Hour: Contains the number of issues that were escalated during each hour during the specified time period.

47 Overview Dashboards 47 Mouse over each bar to view the number of issues that were escalated for each hour. Efficiency: Displays a stacked bar chart displaying the number of unresolved and resolved issues, by date. 4. Mouse over each bar for additional details. (Optional) Click to download moderation action statistics to an Excel Spreadsheet. For each moderator, you can see the number of posts marked read, replied to, escalated, claimed, resolved, retweeted, favorited, and direct-messaged.

48 Analytics 48 Analytics The Analytics menu lets you access, configure, and manage Social reports. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. Social Campaigns Use the Social Campaigns report to view data from content that is assigned to various campaigns in your report suite. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Campaign Overview Report and Campaign Details Report. 1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Social Campaigns. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. By default, the report displays data for the last 30 days. Only campaigns that have been active during the last 30-day period display on the Social Campaigns page. Each campaign tile has a click-through title that lets you display its Campaign Details report. Each tile also displays metric statistics for the selected metric, which you can change. If you hover over an individual campaign tile, its metric details display in the Campaign Performance ribbon on the right side. If none of the tiles is selected, the Campaign Performance ribbon displays color-coded information for all campaigns that have been active during the specified time period.

49 Analytics (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for the report. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjusting the Reporting Date Range. 3. To change the displayed metric on each tile, click, then select the desired metric. The metric that you choose displays at the bottom of each campaign tile and in the right side of the Campaign Performance ribbon chart. The Instances metric on the left side of the ribbon chart cannot be changed. Click the metric box to display a Search field and a list of metrics from which you can choose. You can select one metric only. 4. (Optional) Click to create a new campaign. For more information, see Create a Campaign. 5. (Optional) Click the blue title on any card to display its Campaign Details report. Campaign Details While viewing the Social Campaigns report, you can access a post-level report with more information about each tracking code. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Campaign Overview Report and Campaign Details Report. 1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Social Campaigns. 2. In the desired campaign tile, click the link in the tile's header to display its Campaign Details report. 3. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for the report. The default date range displayed in the Campaign Details report is the same as the date range specified when the campaign was created. You can change the date range for this report if you desire. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjusting the Reporting Date Range. 4. (Optional) Filter the dashboard by social platform or by post type. You can display information for one platform, multiple platforms, or all available platforms. The report is dynamic. a) Access the filter options by clicking above the left navigation rail. b) Select one or more social platforms (for example, Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, and YouTube) to filter the report. c) Select one or more post type (for example, Text, Big Image, Image, Album and Link) to filter the report. 5. View the desired reportlet. Performance: Displays a line chart that displays the selected metrics for the specified time period.

50 Analytics 50 Click to add or remove metrics. You can display as many as five metrics at one time. The available metrics depend on your Social implementation and whether you are also using Adobe Analytics. The individual lines on the chart are color coded. Mouse over any data point to see statistics for specific dates. Some reportlets in this report display information for the first metric listed. You can drag and drop metrics into the desired order in the Metrics dialog box. Campaign Timeline: Displays a ribbon showing posts with this campaign tracking code. You can see the date and time that the content was posted, a representation of the content, and metadata about the selected metrics. Click in each post panel to display that post's Post Details report. By Link: Displays the number of instances of the first metric listed in the Performance reportlet by link. For example, if the first metric listed is Visits, this reportlet displays the number of visits by link. By Type: Displays the number of instances of the first metric listed in the Performance reportlet by type (Big Image, Text, Link, Album, and so forth). For example, if the first metric listed is Visits, this reportlet displays the number of visits by type. Custom Reports Use the Custom Reports menu to access individual reports surrounding campaigns, authors, platforms, and terms. Additionally, you can access other reports configured by using SAINT classifications. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Custom Campaigns Reports and Custom Listening Reports.

51 Analytics In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Custom Reports. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. Select the desired report by clicking its title: Asset Tracking Codes (under Campaigns) Authors (under Authors) Social Platforms/Properties (under Platforms) Terms (under Terms) Language (Under Language) Note: These are the default Social reports. Depending on your Social implementation, you might have other reports under the various headings. These reports are based on SAINT classifications. For more information, see Classifying Terms in SAINT. Note: While viewing one of the custom reports, you can switch to another custom report by using the drop-down list located at the top of the chart. Asset Tracking Codes Use the Tracking Codes report to see which tracking codes have been used to click through to your site. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Custom Campaigns Reports. 1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Custom Reports. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. Under the Campaigns heading, click Tracking Codes.

52 Analytics 52 The report displays a chart at the top and a table at the bottom containing a list of the tracking codes that have been assigned to content and has produced a click-through. You can mouse over any data point in the chart to see the specific number of click-throughs for each tracking code on that day. You can also drag your mouse (left+click) across the chart to select different time periods. This capability is sometimes called "date fencing." Date fencing causes the displayed data to refresh, showing only data for the selected time period. 3. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for the report. 4. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjusting the Reporting Date Range. (Conditional) Click to configure the graph and its data: Graph Type: Select the type of graph you want to display in the chart at the top. For more information, see Configuring Graphs. Metrics: Click to change the displayed metric. Items: Click to add items to the graph.you can display as many as five tracking codes. If no items are selected, the top five display. Y Axis: Choose Linear or Normalized. Authors Use the Authors report to see which authors are most frequently mentioning your tracked terms in posts, pictures, and videos on the social web. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Custom Listening Reports. 1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Custom Reports.

53 Analytics 53 Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. Under the Authors heading, click Authors. The report displays a chart at the top and a table at the bottom containing a list of the five users who are mentioning your specified terms most frequently on the social web. You can mouse over any data point in the chart to see the specific number of mentions for each author on that day. You can also drag your mouse (left+click) across the chart to select different time periods. This capability is sometimes called "date fencing." Date fencing causes the displayed data to refresh, showing only data for the selected time period. 3. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for the report. 4. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjusting the Reporting Date Range. (Conditional) Click to configure the graph and its data: Graph Type: Select the type of graph you want to display in the chart at the top. For more information, see Configuring Graphs. Metrics: Click to change the displayed metric. Items: Click to select authors for the graph. You can display as many as five items. If no items are selected, the top five display. Y Axis: Choose Linear or Normalized.

54 Analytics 54 Social Platforms/Properties Use the Social Platforms/Properties report to see which social platforms authors are using to mention your specified terms in posts, pictures, videos, and so forth on the social web. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Custom Listening Reports. Tip: You can use the Social Platforms/Properties report to help direct your organization's marketing dollars. For example, if you determine that your terms are mentioned the most on Twitter, and it has the largest potential audience, your marketing team might consider investing more effort and money on Twitter marketing. Be aware, however, that if you increase internal marketing efforts using social media, you will create "manufactured mentions" within Social. You might want to consider filtering out posts coming from internal marketing sources. 1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Custom Reports. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. Under the Platforms heading, click Social Platforms/Properties. The report displays a chart at the top and a table at the bottom containing a list of the social platforms and providers that people are using to mention your specified terms on the social web. Note: Some report suites display a Facebook entry and a Facebook Page entry. The Facebook entry displays data about public posts on Facebook. The Facebook Page entry displays data about posts made on your owned Facebook page. You can mouse over any data point in the chart to see the specific number of mentions for each author on that day. You can also drag your mouse (left+click) across the chart to select different time periods. This capability is sometimes called "date fencing." Date fencing causes the displayed data to refresh, showing only data for the selected time period.

55 Analytics (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for the report. 4. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjusting the Reporting Date Range. (Conditional) Click to configure the graph and its data: Graph Type: Select the type of graph you want to display in the chart at the top. For more information, see Configuring Graphs. Metrics: Click to change the displayed metric. Items: Click to add platforms and properties to the graph. You can display as many as five items. If no items are selected, the top five display. Y Axis: Choose Linear or Normalized. Display Name Use the Display Name report to see which listening rules are capturing people are most frequently mentioning in posts, pictures, videos, and so forth on the social web. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Custom Listening Reports. 1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Custom Reports. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. Under the Terms heading, click Display Name.

56 Analytics 56 The report displays a chart at the top and a table at the bottom containing a list of the terms that users are mentioning most frequently on the social web. You can mouse over any data point in the chart to see the specific number of mentions for each term on that day. You can also drag your mouse (left+click) across the chart to select different time periods. This capability is sometimes called "date fencing." Date fencing causes the displayed data to refresh, showing only data for the selected time period. 3. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for the report. 4. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjusting the Reporting Date Range. (Conditional) Click to configure the graph and its data: Graph Type: Select the type of graph you want to display in the chart at the top. For more information, see Configuring Graphs. Metrics: Click to change the displayed metric. Items: Click to add terms to the graph. You can display as many as five items. If no items are selected, the top five display. Y Axis: Choose Linear or Normalized. Language Use the Language report to see which languages people are using to mention your terms on the social web. You can also view average sentiment by language. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Custom Listening Reports. 1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Custom Reports. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. Under the Language heading, click Language.

57 Analytics 57 The report displays a chart at the top and a table at the bottom containing a list of the languages that people are using to mention your terms on the social web. You can mouse over any data point in the chart to see the specific number of mentions for each term on that day. You can also drag your mouse (left+click) across the chart to select different time periods. This capability is sometimes called "date fencing." Date fencing causes the displayed data to refresh, showing only data for the selected time period. 3. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for the report. 4. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjusting the Reporting Date Range. (Conditional) Click to configure the graph and its data: Graph Type: Select the type of graph you want to display in the chart at the top. For more information, see Configuring Graphs. Metrics: Click to change the displayed metric. Note: Mentions and Average Sentiment are the only metrics that make sense in the context of this report. Items: Click to add languages to the graph. You can display as many as five items. If no items are selected, the top five display. Select the desired language codes from the drop-down list.

58 Analytics 58 Note: Every post that is collected by Social listening rules automatically has a language assigned. You can use this report to view an overview of language distribution for your mentions. Do not confuse the list of available languages in the Items drop-down list with the list of languages that the Social Listening module supports. Social Listening encompasses more than just determining which language was used to post content. In order for Social to fully support Social Listening for a language, Social needs to be able to determine how words are structured (tokenization), have a corresponding set of blacklisted keywords, be able to identify related terms, and more. For a full list of languages that the Social Listening module supports, see Language Support. Y Axis: Choose Linear or Normalized. Competitor Analytics The Competitor Analytics reports lets you see how the Facebook pages of your designated competitors compare to your owned Facebook pages. You can view metrics for Total Page Likes, New Page Likes, Post Engagements, and New Posts during the specified time period. Social starts collecting data for competitors' pages after you add them to Social. You cannot backfill data. Data is updated from Facebook hourly. For information about adding competitors, see Add Competitor Pages. Note: At this time, competitor data is collected for public Facebook pages and posts only. Competitor analytics is not available for pages that are not publicly accessible. Examples of Facebook pages that might not be publicly accessible include pages promoting gambling, alcoholic beverages, or other adult products. These pages might have age restrictions or user-validation methods that prevent Social from collecting competitor data. Also note that the Facebook API provides data for non-targeted posts only (posts that have not been targeted using geo or demographic data). 1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Competitor Analytics. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for the report. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjusting the Reporting Date Range. 3. Access the filter options by clicking You can filter the report by the following: above the left navigation rail. Page Groups: Select one or more page group from the drop-down list. Pages (Owned): Select one or more owned page from the drop-down list. Pages (Competitor): Select the Only Competitor Pages option to display only pages from all of your designated competitors. Selecting this option removes any owned pages that you might have added to the filter. Or Select one or more designated competitors from the drop-down list.

59 Analytics 59 Note that you can include your own pages in the filter. This feature lets you compare your page directly with your competitor's page. For example, if you want to do a page-to-page comparison of your Facebook page and one of your competitor's pages, you can add those two pages to the filter for display in the graph. 4. View the desired section. Post Engagements (Public): Contains a line chart that displays your top competitors and their corresponding number of engagements (Likes and Comments) for public, non-targeted posts on that page. You can also view the total number of engagements for all of your designated competitors. 5. The individual lines on the chart are color coded. Mouse over any data point to see statistics for specific dates. The table displays the name of all competitors' pages and information about the default metrics, although you can change which metrics display: The available metrics depend on the platform. Click to select different metrics. You can drag and drop the metrics into the desired order in the Metrics dialog box, which dictates the order of the columns in each platform's section. Hover over any column title for a short description of that metric and how it is calculated. Training Video: To view a short video explaining how to use the metric selector, see Social 3.2 Metric Selector Enhancements. (Optional) To download the data in an Excel file, click. Data exports mirror any filters set in the Competitor Analytics report (time period, competitors, etc.) instead of an unfiltered dump of all competitor data.

60 Analytics 60 Social Buzz Use the Social Buzz report to get a complete view of your tracked social rules. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Social Buzz. You can get information about the number of mentions, sentiment scores for individual mentions, and the number of mentions by platform, geography, and author.you can also drill down into specific reports from the various sections on this report. 1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Social Buzz. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click (Optional) Click to specify the time range for all reportlets in the Social Buzz report. The Social Buzz report is a real-time report. Data is refreshed every minute. The metric totals on this report reflect the specified time period. You can change the displayed time period for the reportlets to the Last 30 Minutes, Last 1 Hour, Last 2 Hours, Last 4 Hours, Last 8 Hours, or Last 12 Hours (the default). Access the filter options by clicking You can filter the report by the following: above the left navigation rail. Classification: Select the desired classification from the list: Display Name, Campaign, or a classification specific to your implementation. Provider: Select one or more social providers, such as Blogs, DailyMotion, Facebook, Tumblr, Twitter, YouTube, and so forth. Sentiment: Select one or more sentiment categories: Negative, Neutral, and Positive. For more information, see Understanding Sentiment Scores. Emotion: Select one or more emotions: Joy, Admiration, Fear, Surprise, Sadness, Disgust, Anger, and Anticipation. Followers: (Twitter only) Click the Search box, then select the desired range from the drop-down list. Only mentions from users that fall within the specified range display in the Social Buzz report. You can select more than one range. Klout Score: Drag the pointers to select a score range. Only data from users with Klout scores that fall within the specified range display in the Social Buzz report. Spam: Social uses a proprietary system to determine whether content is spam. By default, the Filter Spam filter is selected (content determined to be spam does not display in the report). To see content that the Social system has marked as spam, deselect this option. Note that currently, spam filtering is available only for the English language. Language: Click the Search box, then select one or more languages from the drop-down list. Only mentions in the specified languages display in the Social Buzz report. Note: Every post that is collected by Social listening rules automatically has a language assigned. You can filter the Social Buzz report to display only mentions in the selected languages. Do not confuse the list of available languages in the drop-down list with the list of languages that the Social Listening module

61 Analytics 61 supports. Social Listening encompasses more than just determining which language was used to post content. In order for Social to fully support Social Listening for a language, Social needs to be able to determine how words are structured (tokenization), have a corresponding set of blacklisted keywords, be able to identify related terms, and more. For a full list of languages that the Social Listening module supports, see Language Support. Geography: Search for and select one or more geographic areas (countries, regions, and cities) by which you want to filter the report. 4. View the desired section. Display Name/Classification: (The title of this section depends on how you filtered the report using the Classification filter described in Step 3.) Contains a line chart that contains the display names of your most popular rules and their corresponding number of mentions. The individual lines on the chart are color coded. Mouse over any term to highlight its line. Mouse over any data point to see statistics for specific dates. Click a display name in the header to reload the report's various sections with data specific only to that rule. This lets you drill down into the data for the selected rule and display only posts containing that rule, its related terms, and its mentions by platform and geography. You can Ctrl+Click terms to select and display data for multiple terms. For example, you might want to isolate a few terms to view and compare data. To view the report with data containing the top-ten terms again, click the x next to the terms at the top of the report that you previously selected to drill down. Click to change the displayed names. All of the rules you are tracking in Social display in a drop-down list. You can also drag your mouse (left+click) across the chart to select different time periods. This capability is sometimes called "date fencing." Date fencing causes the displayed data to refresh, showing only data for the selected time period. Posts: Displays a ribbon showing your top posts. The first column in the ribbon displays each post's sentiment score.you canmanually tune the sentiment for individual posts. The second column displays each author's profile image. The third column contains an icon indicating each post's platform (Facebook, Twitter, and so forth), the post's author, and the verbatim of the actual post. Click to moderate the post. Click to view the post on the appropriate platform (Twitter or Facebook, for example).

62 Analytics 62 Use the Search box to display only posts that contain a specific word (a tracked term or any word). If the author's name is blue, you can click through to the platform. You can display images and play videos directly in the stream (for example, Instagram photos and YouTube videos). Click Details to display addition details about that post and its author. For more information, see Post Details in Social Buzz Report. To see which listening rules captured each post, see How to Tell Which Listening Rule Captured a Post. Also note that for Twitter, the Followers column in the downloaded report contains the number of followers for that author. Because this is a Twitter-specific metric, the Followers column contains zero for all other platforms. Display Name: Contains a bar chart displaying statistics for each of your tracked rules. The bar chart displays each display name, along with the numbers of mentions for that rule on the social web. The first ten names are color coded to correspond with the lines on the Social Buzz line chart at the top of this report. Use the Search box to display statistics for a specific rule. Click a display name to display its related terms that were included in the post's content. You can use these related terms to track additional terms that are often associated with your tracked terms. Average Sentiment: Contains a meter that displays the average sentiment for the selected terms/rules.

63 Analytics 63 For more information about how sentiment and how scores are calculated, see Understanding Sentiment Scores. Emotion: Displays a wheel chart displaying the percentage of posts, comments, and tweets that Social has classified in different emotional categories based on Plutchik's wheel of emotions. Note: The Emotion widget is a feature currently being developed and fine-tuned by the Social team. This widget is included in this Social release as a sneak-peek. The Emotion widget provides more insight into the content of a tweet, post, or comment. Social uses a proprietary algorithm that uses a combination of linguistic analysis and psychology to classify content in the following emotional categories: Joy, Admiration, Fear, Surprise, Sadness, Disgust, Anger, and Anticipation. To filter the report by a single emotion, click the desired emotion. To filter the report by one or more emotions, click, then select the desired emotion check boxes. To clear the emotion filters, click the tiles at the top of the report or deselect the boxes in the filter. Posts by Platform: Contains a line chart displaying the number of posts containing tracked terms/rules, broken down by platform (Twitter, Facebook, Google+, blogs, and more).

64 Analytics 64 Mouse over any segment on the chart to display individual statistics. Authors: Displays a list of authors whose posts have been captured by your listening rules, in descending order by number of mentions captured. Use the Search box to search for a specific author. Posts by Geography: Displays an interactive map of the world showing mentions of your rules on the social web.

65 Analytics 65 The Posts by Geography section provides a visual representation of total tracked posts per country. Darker-shaded countries have more mentions than lighter-shaded countries. Hover over a country to display its total mentions. Click a region on the map or bar chart to drill down into that region. When you drill down into geo regions, the other reportlets on the Social Buzz report reload to display data relevant to that region. Click the plus and minus buttons to enlarge or shrink the map. Be aware of the following information when analyzing posts by geography: The number of mentions by geography will be lower than the total number of mentions. The number discrepancy occurs because users must allow their locations to be visible in order for this data to appear in Social reports. Foursquare mentions always have corresponding geo data. On average, one to two percent of tweets have attached geographic information; however, Social takes advantage of geographical information from users' bios to provide enhanced analysis capabilities. Currently, Social can collect geographical data on about 30 percent of Twitter users (some users don't specify a geographical location in their bios). To reset the Posts by Geography reportlet (which then resets the other reportlets on the Social Buzz report), click the Geography box at the top of the report. For example, if you drilled down by clicking the United States > California > Highland Park, the box would look like the following illustration:

66 Analytics (Optional) To download posts and their data (verbatims, authors, mentions, retweets, etc. ) in a.csv file, click, then select the number of posts to download. You can specify as many as 100,000 verbatims per user in a 24-hour period. Data exports mirror any filters set in Social Buzz interface (time period, terms, etc.) instead of an unfiltered dump of all social listening data. If you select fewer than 2,000 verbatims, you can open or save the.csv file almost immediately. If you select more than 2,000 verbatims, a.zip file containing the.csv file is ed to the specified address after the data has been processed. You can also specify a different address, if necessary. Tune Sentiment Manually override the sentiment of a post from the Social Buzz report. Adjusting sentiment feeds the sentiment algorithm for a specific report suite, making the algorithm more accurate to your needs over time. 1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Social Buzz. 2. In the Posts section, click or touch the sentiment column on the left side of a post to display the Override the Sentiment Value controls. 3. Click the desired sentiment value: negative ( ), neutral, or positive ( + ). After you tune the sentiment for one or more posts, a message displays at the top of the Posts section informing you that sentiment has changed. Click Undo Change to undo your changes or click x to close the message.

67 Analytics 67 Post Details in Social Buzz Report Expand individual posts in the Social Buzz report to display more details about that post and its author. 1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Social Buzz. 2. In the Posts section, click Details to expand the post to display more details. The post expands to display more information about that post and its author. The information varies depending on the platform and author. Information can include the post's language, emotion, post type, date and time, the author's Klout and Kred scores, and more. The display name of the rule that captured the post displays next to Rule. How to Tell Which Listening Rule Captured a Post Information to help you determine which listening rule caused a post (verbatim) to display in the Social Buzz report.

68 Analytics 68 Listening Rules let you create complex rules to track activities on the social web. Any listening rules that you create populate the verbatims in the Posts section of the Social Buzz report. Listening rules can be more complex than the simple keyword tracking in previous versions of Social. As a result, customers sometimes see a post in the Social Buzz report and wonder which listening rule captured the post. Inline functionality is available to display more information about each post, including which rule captured the post. In the Posts section in the Social Buzz report, click Details for the desired post. The post expands to display more information about that post, including the post's language, emotion, post type, date and time, and more. The display name of the rule that captured the post displays next to Rule. The display name of the rule that captured the activity is also included in the downloaded Social Buzz report. The display name of the rule that captured the verbatim is listed in the Display Name column. To download posts and their data (including which listening rule captured the post) in a.csv file, from the Social Buzz report, click, then select the number of posts to download. You can specify as many as 100,000 verbatims, per user in a 24-hour period. Data exports mirror any filters set in Social Buzz interface (time period, terms, etc.) instead of an unfiltered dump of all social listening data. If you select fewer than 2,000 verbatims, you can open or save the.csv file almost immediately. If you select more than 2,000 verbatims, a.zip file containing the.csv file is ed to the specified address after the data has been processed. You can also specify a different address, if necessary.

69 Analytics 69 Properties Use the Properties report as a navigational tool to navigate into your social properties and to see statistics for your social properties.you can view the Properties report in a tile view or in a list view.you can also access the Properties Detail report for individual properties. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Social Properties Analytics. 1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Properties. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. By default, the report displays in a tile view with all of your owned social properties displayed. 2. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for all data in the Properties report. The metric totals on this report reflect the specified time period. If you select Custom Range, a calendar displays. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjusting the Reporting Date Range. 3. (Conditional) Use the drop-down in the upper right corner to sort the property tiles in ascending or descending order by the property name or by the number of subscribers. The header in each property's tile contains the property title and an icon to indicate its platform (Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, and Sina Weibo).

70 Analytics (Optional) Filter the report by social platform. 5. You can display information for one platform, multiple platforms, or all available platforms. a) Access the filter options by clicking above the left navigation rail. b) Select one or more social platforms (Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, and Sina Weibo) to filter the report. c) (Conditional) Select Only Owned Properties to display only those properties that you own. d) (Conditional) Select one or more page group from the drop-down list. (Optional) Click to display the report in the roll-up view. Note that each social platform has its own section. The available metrics depend on the platform. Click to select different metrics.you can drag and drop the metrics into the desired order in the Metrics dialog box, which dictates the order of the columns in each platform's section. Hover over any column title for a short description of that metric and how it is calculated. Training Video: To view a short video explaining how to use the metric selector, see Social 3.2 Metric Selector Enhancements.

71 Analytics You can search for specific properties in each section. View Number and Page Number controls let you view and display properties more efficiently if you have a large number of properties in each section. You can sort each column in ascending or descending order by clicking the title in the heading. The arrow next to each metric displays the percentage increase or decrease for that metric over the selected time frame. For example, if you view the report for the last month, the increase or decrease shown corresponds to the previous month. If you view the report for the last seven days, the increase or decrease corresponds to the seven days prior to the current seven-day period. (Optional) To download data for each property in a.csv file, click. Data includes New Likes, Unlikes, Negative Feedback from Users, People Talking About This, and more. 7. Click the title of any property to access its Property Details report. Property Details Report The Property Details report lets you see statistics for individual properties in your Social account. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Social Properties Analytics. To access the Property Details report for a property, click Analytics > Properties > then click the title for any property. For more information, see Properties. The Property Details report varies depending on the selected property. For example, if you select a Facebook page, the report displays the following tabs: Overview, Reach, and Admin Activity. If you select a Google+ page or a Twitter account, no tabs display. Facebook Property Details Description of the Property Details report for an individual Facebook property. The Property Details report for a Facebook property displays the following tabs: Overview Page Reach Admin Activity Note: All metrics reflect the specified date range. Overview The Overview page displays the following panels. Page Engagement: The following metrics display in the Page Engagement panel: Likes: The total number of people (unique users) who have liked the page on the last day of the selected date range. New Likes: The total number of new people (unique users) who have liked the page for the selected date range. Un-Likes: The total number of unlikes (unique users) of the page for the selected date range. People Talking About This: The total number of people (unique users) sharing stories about the page for the selected date range. Total Stories: The number of stories created about the page for the selected date range. Total Engagement: The number of stories and consumptions for the page for the selected date range.

72 Analytics 72 The line graphs show a visual representation of engagement for each page in the account. Post Performance: The Post Performance section displays the number of Facebook engagements (the number of stories and consumptions for the page for the selected date range) and a bubble chart that displays reach and interaction metrics. Top Posts: Displays a ribbon showing your top posts, along with their engagement and click metrics, date and time of post, and a representation of the actual post. Use the drop-down list to sort the displayed posts by the number of engagements or by post time in ascending or descending order. Click to view the post's Post Details report. Fans by Geography: The Fans by Geography panel provides a visual representation of fan engagement per country. A gradient color legend is provided to indicate the scale of engagement on the map. Darker-shaded countries have more fan engagements than lighter-shaded countries. Hover over a city to display the city name and the total number of Likes for that city. Engagement by Demographic: Displays demographic engagement data. Rows display for males and females in each age group for the top five groups. If users have not specified a gender on their Facebook profiles, they are categorized in the Unknown category. Like Sources: Displays the top five sources that have produced Likes for the page. Like sources include Like widgets, profile, Litebox widgets, requests, search, and stream. Page Reach The Page Reach page displays the following panel. Reach: The following metrics display on the Reach panel: Total Reach: The number of people (unique users) who have seen any content associated with the page. This metric is the sum of organic, viral, and paid reach. Paid Reach: The number of people (unique users) who saw a sponsored story or ad pointing to the page. These people can be fans or non-fans of the page. Organic Reach: The number of people (unique users) who visited the page, or saw the page or one of its posts in the news feed or ticker. Viral Reach: The number of people (unique users) who saw the page or one of its posts from a story shared by a friend. Admin Activity The Admin Activity page contains the following panels: Note: The tables can be sorted by any of the columns.these tables can be set to only be viewable by account administrators. All of the data is exportable and changes per the selected time period. Moderators: Lists the users who have performed moderation actions on the page. The table tracks each action: Views, Replies, Deletes, and Escalations. Publishing: Lists the users who have published to the page using Social. The table tracks posts by type. Escalations: Summarizes the number of resolved and unresolved escalations per reason. This makes it easy to see how effective your organization's workflow is.

73 Analytics 73 Moderation Filters: Lists all of the words that have been scanned during page moderation and highlights by category: Deleted, Bad, Medium, and Good. Use the checkbox controls to change which words are visible. Twitter Property Details Description of the Property Details report for an individual Twitter account. Note: All metrics reflect the specified date range. The Property Details report for a Twitter account displays the following panels: Account Engagement: The following metrics display in the Account Engagement panel: Favorites: The number of times any tweet from the account has been favorited for the selected date range. Followers: The total number of people (unique users) who have followed the account as of the last day of the selected date range. Replies: The number of times any tweet from the account has been replied to for the selected date range. Retweets: The number of times any tweet from the account has been retweeted for the selected date range. Post Performance: The Post Performance section displays a bubble chart that displays engagement metrics (the number of people who replied, retweeted, favorited, or clicked a link). Top Tweets: Displays a ribbon showing your top tweets, along with their engagement rates, date and time of tweet, and a representation of the actual tweet. Google+ Property Details Description of the Property Details report for an individual Google+ page. Note: All metrics reflect the specified date range. The Property Details report for a Google+ property displays the following panels: Page Engagement: The following metrics display in the Page Engagement panel: Total Engagement: The number of people (unique users) who clicked +1, commented, or shared a post for the selected date range. +1s: The number of users (unique users) who clicked +1 on a post for the selected date range. Comments: The number of people (unique users) who commented on a post for the selected date range. Shares: The number of people (unique users) who shared a post for the selected date range. The line graphs show a visual representation of engagement for each page in the account. Engagement is the sum of all +1s, comments, and shares across all pages in the account. Post Performance: Displays a bubble chart that displays engagement metrics (the number of people (unique users) who clicked +1, commented, or shared a post for the selected date range). Circles: Lists the top five circles for the selected page and gives a snapshot of membership, engagement, +1 count/growth, comments, and shares for each circle. The metrics here are similar to the Page Engagement metrics described above but are calculated at the circle level. Top Posts: Displays a ribbon showing your top posts, along with their engagement rates, date and time of post, and a representation of the actual post.

74 Analytics 74 LinkedIn Property Details Description of the Property Details report for an individual LinkedIn property. Note: All metrics reflect the specified date range. The Property Details report for a LinkedIn property displays the following tabs: Overview Followers Overview The Overview page displays the following panels: Page Engagement: The following metrics display in the Page Engagement panel: Followers: The total number of people (unique users) who have followed the company as of the last day of the selected date range. New Followers: The total number of new people (unique users) who have followed the company for the selected date range. Non-Employee Followers: The number of non-employee followers (unique users) of the company as of the last day of the selected date range. Employee Followers: The number of employee followers (unique users) of the company for the selected date range. Total Engagement: The number of people who liked, commented on, or clicked a link on a post for the company for the selected date range. The line graphs show a visual representation of engagement for each page in the account. Post Performance: Displays the number of LinkedIn interactions (the number of people who liked, commented on, or clicked a link on a post for the company for the selected date range) and a bubble chart that displays reach and interaction metrics. Top Posts: Displays a ribbon showing your top posts, along with their engagement and click metrics, date and time of post, and a representation of the actual post. Use the drop-down list to sort the displayed posts by the number of engagements or by post time in ascending or descending order. Followers The Followers page displays the following panels: Followers by Geography: Displays the number of followers by country. Company Size of Followers: Displays the number of followers by size of company (10,000+, 5,000-10,000, and so forth). Top Industries of Followers: Displays the number of followers by type of industry (High Tech - Computer Software, Defense & Space, Marketing and Advertising, and so forth). YouTube Property Details Description of the Property Details report for an individual YouTube channel. Note: All metrics reflect the specified date range.

75 Analytics 75 The Property Details page for a YouTube channel displays the following tabs: Overview Views Overview The Overview page displays the following panels: Channel Engagement: The following metrics display in the Channel Engagement panel and are calculated for the specified time period. Comments: The total number of comments received for the channel's videos. Likes: The total number of likes received for the channel's videos. Dislikes: The total number of dislikes received for the channel's videos. Shares: The total number of shares made for the channel's videos. Subscribers Gained: The number of subscribers gained as a result of the channel's videos. Subscribers Lost: The number of subscribers lost as a result of the channels's videos. Favorites Gained: The number of favorites gained as a result of the channel's videos. Favorites Lost: The number of favorites lost as a result of the channel's videos. The line graphs show a visual representation of engagement for the channel. Video Performance: Displays the number of YouTube interactions and a bubble chart that displays reach and interaction metrics. Interactions include the number of people who commented, clicked favorite, liked, shared videos, or subscribed to the channel during the specified time period. Top Videos: Displays a ribbon showing your top videos in the channel. Use the drop-down list to sort the displayed videos by the number of engagements or by post time in ascending or descending order. You can click the video thumbnail to launch a viewer to watch the video from within Social. Below each video the following icons and metrics display: Metric Views Description The number of times the video was viewed. Likes The number of times that users indicated that they liked a video by giving it a positive rating. Dislikes The number of times that users indicated that they disliked a video by giving it a negative rating. Engagement Rate Engagement Engaged Users / Unique Reach The number of times users interacted with the video. Click to view the video's YouTube Property Details report. Engagement by Country: Displays a bar chart that displays the number of engagements per country.

76 Analytics 76 Views The Views page displays a chart displaying views over time and the following panels: Watchtime Metrics: Metrics are calculated for the channel for the specified time period. The following metrics display: Minutes Watched: The estimated amount of time that a viewer has watched a video. This metric gives you a better sense of what content viewers actually watch, rather those that simply click a video and then abandon it. Average Play Time: The average length, in seconds, of video playbacks. Average Percent Watched: The average percentage of a video watched during video playbacks. Views by Source: Displays the number of views based on referrer type. Referrer type describes the manner in which users reached the video. Possible sources include the following: Advertising: Viewers were referred to the video by an advertisement. Annotation: Viewers reached the video by clicking an annotation in another video. External URL: Viewers were referred from a link on a web page. Google Search: Viewers were referred from Google search results. No Link Embedded: The video was embedded on another website when it was viewed. No Link Other: YouTube did not identify a referrer for the traffic. This category encompasses direct traffic to a video as well as traffic on mobile applications. Promoted: Viewers were referred from an unpaid YouTube promotion, such as the YouTube Spotlight Videos page. Related Video: Viewers were referred from a related video listing on another video watch page. Subscriber: Viewers were referred from feeds on the YouTube homepage or from YouTube subscription features YouTube Channel: Views occurred on a channel page. YouTube Other Page: Viewers were referred from a link other than a search result or related video link that appeared on a YouTube page YouTube Search: Viewers were referred from YouTube search results. Views by Country: Displays the number of video views by country. Views by Gender: Displays the proportion and number of male and female viewers. Social collects data for this metric only from users who are logged in to YouTube. Views by Age Group: Displays the proportion and number of video views by age group. Social collects data for this metric only from users who are logged in to YouTube. Views by Location: Displays the number of video views, by location. Locations include the YouTube page itself, a YouTube channel page, an imbedded player on other websites, mobile devices, and external applications. Post Analytics Use the Post Analytics report to view overall post statistics across all properties in your Social account. You can view the report in list view format or in the property roll-up format. Post Analytics List View Use the Post Analytics report in list view format to view overall post statistics across all properties in your Social account. You can also drill down to view statistics for individual properties (Facebook posts, Google+ posts, tweets, and so forth). 1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Posts.

77 Analytics (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for all sections in the report. The metric totals on this dashboard reflect the specified time period. If you select Custom Range, a calendar displays. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjusting the Reporting Date Range. 3. (Optional) Filter the report. 4. The report is dynamic. The information on the various reportlets change and individual reportlets display or are hidden, depending on your filtering options. a) Access the filter options by clicking above the left navigation rail. b) Select the desired settings: Click Social Platform: Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, and Sina Weibo. Page Groups: Select the page group you want to use for the filter. For more information, see Page Groups. Properties: Select the properties you want to use for this filter. You can also filter by only owned pages. Audiences: Select the audience you want to use for this filter. Tags: When you create a post, you can optionally include tags. Information you type in tags is not viewable outside of the Social product. Facebook fans and Twitter followers, for example, cannot see this information. Other Social users in your organization can see this information. You can use tags to categorize posts. For example, you can tag all posts about your Summer Campaign with the campaign name. You can also filter by tags. Post Type: Filter by post type: Video, Stream Apps, Links, Images, Text, Big Images, Event, and Flash Media. to view the Posts section in list view format. 5. View the desired section. Post Performance: Contains a bubble chart displaying statistics for post interactions across your Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, and Sina Weibo accounts. The following metrics are available:

78 Analytics 78 Facebook Engagements: The total number of likes, comments, shares, link clicks, video plays, and image views on all posts for the selected date range. Twitter Engagements: The number of people who replied to, retweeted, favorited, or clicked a link on all tweets during the selected date range. Google+ Engagements: The number of people who clicked +1, commented on, shared, or clicked a link on posts for the selected date range. LinkedIn Engagements: The number of people who liked, commented on, or clicked a link on posts for the company during the selected date range. YouTube Engagements: The number of times people commented on, favorited, liked, or shared videos or subscribed to the channel for the selected date range. Note: You can mouse over individual metric titles in Social dashboards and reports to display metric definitions in the user interface. Mouse over an individual bubble to display the following information for that post: date and time of post, reach, and interactions. Click a bubble to view the post's Post Details report. The bubbles are color coded to make it easy to distinguish posts by social provider. Posts with corresponding larger bubbles have a greater reach and more interactions. Posts: Displays a list of posts on your various accounts. The first line of each post contains the name of the property to which the content was posted. By default, the list is ordered by date, newest to oldest. You can, however, use the drop-down list at the top of the posts to change the sorting order. You can sort in ascending or descending order by date, engagement, engagement rate, unique reach, or link clicks. Thirty posts display. Click Load More at the bottom of the list to view additional posts. The following metrics are available: Reach: The number of unique people who saw this post on its social platform. Engagement: The number of people who interacted with this post on its social platform. Engagement Rate: The number of Engaged Users divided by Unique Reach. Link Clicks: The number of clicks generated on a link in this post. 6. (Optional) To download posts and their data in a.csv file, click.

79 Analytics (Optional) Click at the bottom of each tile to view the post's Post Details report. Post Details Access the Post Details report from the Post Analytics report to see detailed information about individual posts. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Post Analytics. 1. From the Post Analytics report, click 2. View the post's details. at the bottom of the desired tile. Facebook Post Details The Post Details page for a Facebook page displays detailed information about the post. Information includes the name of the page on which the post was published, the date and time when the post was made, the name of the Social user who posted the content, any tags that were specified when the post was created, and any links contained in the post. In addition, appropriate metrics for the post display. The metric totals reflect the specified time period. The following metrics are available for Facebook posts: Unique Reach: The number of unique people who saw this post on Facebook. Impressions: The number of times people saw this post on Facebook. Engaged Users: The number of people who interacted with this post on Facebook. Engagement Rate: Total Engagement divided by Unique Reach. People Talking About This: The number of people who created a story about this post on Facebook. These stories include liking your page; posting to your page's Wall; liking, commenting on, or sharing one of your page posts; answering a question you posted; RSVP-ing to one of your events; mentioning your page; phototagging your page; liking or sharing a deal; or checking in at your place. Negative Feedback: The number of people who hid or reported this post as spam on Facebook. Comments: Displays any comments that users have made about the post. You can click the page name to go to that page on Facebook. Engagement: Displays engagements, including comments, likes, shares, link clicks, etc. Reach: The Reach section shows the following reach metrics: Paid Reach: The number of unique users who saw a Sponsored Story or Facebook Ad about the page. Organic Reach: The number of unique users who saw the page's post in their News Feeds or visited the page during the specified time period. These people can be fans or non-fans of the page. Viral Reach: The number of unique users who saw the page or one of its posts during the specified time period from a story published by a friend. These stories include liking your page; posting to your page's Wall; liking, commenting on, or sharing one of your page posts; answering a question you posted; RSVP-ing to one of your events; mentioning your page; phototagging your page; liking or sharing a deal; or checking in at your place. Twitter Post Details The Post Details page displays detailed information about a tweet. Information includes the name of the account on which the tweet was published, the date and time when the tweet was made, the name of the Social user who posted the tweet, any tags that were specified when the post was created, and any links contained in the post. In addition, appropriate metrics for the tweet display. The metric totals reflect the specified time period.

80 Analytics 80 The following metrics are available for tweets: Unique Reach: The number of unique people who saw this tweet. Engagement: The number of times people engaged with this tweet. Engagement Rate: Total Engagement divided by Unique Reach. Link Clicks: The number of people who clicked a link in the tweet. Replies: Displays any replies that users have made to the tweet. You can click the account name to go to that account on Twitter. Engagement: Displays engagements, including clicks, retweets, favorites, and replies. Google+ Post Details The Post Details page displays detailed information about a post. Information includes the name of the page on which the post was published, the date and time when the post was made, the name of the Social user who posted the content, any tags that were specified when the post was created, and any links contained in the post. In addition, appropriate metrics for the post display. The metric totals reflect the specified time period. The following metrics are available for Google+ posts: Followers: The number of unique people who potentially saw this post on Google+. +1: The number of people who clicked +1 on this post on Google+. Comments: The number of comments on this post on Google+. Shares: The number of shared stories about this post on Google+. Engagement Rate: The number of Engaged Users divided by Unique Reach. Link Clicks: The number of clicks a link in this post generated on Google+. The following metrics are available for Twitter posts: Followers: The number of unique people who follow this Google+ page. Engagement: The number of engagements for this post on Google+. Engagement Rate: The number of engagements for this post divided by Unique Reach. Link Clicks: The number of clicks on a link in this post generated on the Google+ page. Comments: Displays the comments that users have contributed to the post. Engagement: Displays engagements, including +1s, comments, shares, image views, link clicks, etc. LinkedIn Post Details The Post Details page for a LinkedIn post displays detailed information about the post. Information includes the name of the page on which the post was published, the date and time when the post was made, the name of the Social user who posted the content, any tags that were specified when the post was created, and any links contained in the post. In addition, appropriate metrics for the post display. The metric totals reflect the specified time period. The following metrics are available for LinkedIn posts: Unique Reach: The number of followers at the time the post was made. Engagement: The number of times unique users liked, commented, or clicked a link on the post. Comments: The number unique users who commented on the post. Liked: The number unique users who liked the post. Comments: Displays any comments that users have made about the post. You can click the page name to go to that page on LinkedIn.

81 Analytics 81 Link Clicks: Displays the number of times users have clicked a link in the post. Engagement: Displays engagements, including comments, shares, link clicks, etc. YouTube Post Details The Post Details page for a YouTube video displays detailed information about the video. For YouTube videos, information includes the channel to which the video was posted, the date and time when the video was posted, the name of the Social user who posted the video, the video's duration, category, publisher tags (if any), and YouTube tags (if any). You can click the video to watch the video inline. The YouTube Post Details page contains the following tabs: Overview Views Overview The Overview page displays the following panels: Performance: The Performance section displays the number of YouTube interactions and a bubble chart that displays reach and interaction metrics. Interactions include the number of people who viewed, liked, disliked, clicked Favorite, or made comments about the video during the specified time period. Video Engagement: The following metrics display in the Video Engagement panel and are calculated for the specified time period. Comments: The total number of comments received for the videos. Likes: The total number of likes received for the videos. Dislikes: The total number of dislikes received for the videos. Shares: The total number of shares made for the videos. Subscribers Gained: The number of subscribers gained as a result of the videos. Subscribers Lost: The number of subscribers lost as a result of the videos. Favorites Gained: The number of favorites gained as a result of the videos. Favorites Lost: The number of favorites lost as a result of the videos. The line graphs show a visual representation of engagement for the channel. Comments: Displays any comments that users have made about the video. Engagement Breakdown: Displays a chart showing engagements, including comments, likes, shares, and so forth. Views The Views page displays a chart displaying views over time and the following panels: Note: YouTube calculates views when a user watches a video for an undisclosed amount of time. If a user abandons watching the video before this time, the view is not counted. Watchtime Metrics: Metrics are calculated for the channel for the specified time period. The following metrics display: Minutes Watched: The estimated amount of time that a viewer has watched a video. This metric gives you a better sense of what content viewers actually watch, over those that simply click a video and then abandon it. Average Play Time: The average length, in seconds, of video playbacks.

82 Analytics 82 Average Percent Watched: The average percentage of a video watched during a video playback. Views by Source: Displays the number of views based on referrer type, which describes the manner in which users reached the video. Possible sources include the following: Advertising: Viewers were referred to the video by an advertisement. Annotation: Viewers reached the video by clicking an annotation in another video. External URL: Viewers were referred from a link on a web page. Google Search: Viewers were referred from Google search results. No Link Embedded: The video was embedded on another website when it was viewed. No Link Other: YouTube did not identify a referrer for the traffic. This category encompasses direct traffic to a video as well as traffic on mobile applications. Promoted: Viewers were referred from an unpaid YouTube promotion, such as the YouTube Spotlight Videos page. Related Video: Viewers were referred from a related video listing on another video watch page. Subscriber: Viewers were referred from feeds on the YouTube homepage or from YouTube subscription features YouTube Channel: Views occurred on a channel page. YouTube Other Page: Viewers were referred from a link other than a search result or related video link that appeared on a YouTube page YouTube Search: Viewers were referred from YouTube search results. Views by Country: Displays the number of video views by country. Views by Gender: Displays the proportion and number of male and female viewers. Social collects data for this metric only from users who are logged in to YouTube. Views by Age Group: Displays the proportion and number of video views by age group. Social collects data for this metric only from users who are logged in to YouTube. Note: YouTube requires an unspecified number of video views before it provides Gender and Age breakdowns. Views by Location: Displays the number of video views, by location. Locations include the YouTube page itself, a YouTube channel page, an imbedded player on other websites, mobile devices, and external applications. Post Analytics Roll-Up View Use the Post Analytics report in roll-up view format to view post data in a table format with sortable columns, growth metrics, and metric totals for each platform. 1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Posts. 2. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for all sections in the report. The metric totals on this dashboard reflect the specified time period. If you select Custom Range, a calendar displays. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjusting the Reporting Date Range. 3. (Optional) Filter the report. The report is dynamic. The information on the various reportlets change and individual reportlets display or are hidden, depending on your filtering options. a) Access the filter options by clicking above the left navigation rail. b) Select the desired settings: Social Platform: Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, and Sina Weibo. Page Groups: Select the page group you want to use for the filter. For more information, see Page Groups.

83 Analytics Click Properties: Select the properties you want to use for this filter. You can also filter by only owned pages. Audiences: Select the audience you want to use for this filter. Tags: When you create a post, you can optionally include tags. Information you type in tags is not viewable outside of the Social product. Facebook fans and Twitter followers, for example, cannot see this information. Other Social users in your organization can see this information. You can use tags to categorize posts. For example, you can tag all posts about your Summer Campaign with the campaign name. You can also filter by tags. Post Type: Filter by post type: Video, Stream Apps, Links, Images, Text, Big Images, Event, and Flash Media. to view the report in roll-up view format. 5. View the desired section. Post Performance: Contains a bubble chart displaying statistics for post interactions across your Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, and Sina Weibo accounts. The following default metrics are available: Facebook Engagements: The total number of likes, comments, shares, link clicks, video plays, and image views on all posts for the selected date range. Twitter Engagements: The number of people who replied to, retweeted, favorited, or clicked a link on all tweets during the selected date range. Google+ Engagements: The number of people who clicked +1, commented on, shared, or clicked a link on posts for the selected date range. LinkedIn Engagements: The number of people who liked, commented on, or clicked a link on posts for the company during the selected date range. YouTube Engagements: The number of times people commented on, favorited, liked, or shared videos or subscribed to the channel for the selected date range. Note: You can mouse over individual metric titles in Social dashboards and reports to display metric definitions in the user interface.

84 Analytics 84 Mouse over an individual bubble to display the following information for that post: date and time of post, reach, and interactions. Click a bubble to view the post's Post Details report. The bubbles are color coded to make it easy to distinguish posts by social provider. Posts with corresponding larger bubbles have a greater reach and more interactions. Posts: Displays a list of posts on your various accounts, separated by platform with additional metrics. Sections display for each platform: Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, and Google+. Default metrics display for each platform. Click to select different metrics. You can drag and drop the metrics into the desired order in the Metrics dialog box, which dictates the order of the columns in each platform's section. Hover over any column title for a short description of that metric and how it is calculated. Training Video: To view a short video explaining how to use the metric selector, see Social 3.2 Metric Selector Enhancements. The following default metrics are available for Facebook: Date & Time Reach Likes Comments Shares Link Clicks Negative Feedback Click to select different metrics. The following default metrics are available for Twitter: Date & Time Potential Audience Retweets

85 Analytics 85 Favorites Replies Link Clicks The following default metrics are available for Google+ Date & Time Followers +1s Shares Comments Link Clicks The following default metrics are available for LinkedIn: Date & Time Followers Likes Comments Link Clicks The following default metrics are available for YouTube: Date & Time Views Likes Dislikes Favorites Comments Link Clicks 6. Click each column header to change the sorting order for that column's data. By default, the various columns (Date & Time, Reach, Likes, Comments, etc.) is ordered by date, newest to oldest. 7. (Optional) To download posts and their data in a.csv file, click. Configuring Reports Configure reports, including viewing trended or ranked reports, configuring graphs, adding metrics to your reports, and adjusting the reporting date range. Configuring Graphs Configure the graphs that display in reports so that they are most useful for the intended audience. 1. While viewing a report that has configurable options, click. 2. Select the type of graph you want to display in the chart at the top of the report: Icon Description Trended Line: Trend lines show daily trends for the report metrics and are useful for trending one metric over time per line.

86 Analytics 86 Icon Description Selecting the line chart option produces a trended report. A trended report displays statistics for a single metric over time.you use this graph type when you want to see authors' mentions from one time period to the next. Using a line chart limits you to displaying one metric and you cannot perform breakdowns. Horizontal Bar Chart:The Horizontal Bar chart shows relative percentages for the report metrics. Selecting a horizontal bar chart produces a ranked report. A ranked report displays statistics for as many as five metrics and you can perform breakdowns. Horizontal Stacked Bar Chart: By stacking similar metrics you can get a quick view of the total influence of a metric. Selecting a stacked bar chart produces a ranked report. A ranked report displays statistics for as many as five metrics and you can perform breakdowns. Donut Chart: By displaying more than one metric you can get a quick view of the total influence of those metrics. Selecting a donut chart produces a ranked report. A ranked report displays statistics for as many as five metrics and you can perform breakdowns. Configuring Options for Reports Configure report options, including changing the displayed metrics, filtering the data, and breaking down the report by another metric. 1. While viewing a report that has configurable options, click. 2. Configure the report as desired. Note: Not all options are available for all graph types. Option Graph Type Selected Metrics Description Change the type of graph that displays at the top of the report. For more information, see Configuring Graphs. To add or remove metrics, next to Metrics, click box. to display the Add Metrics dialog You can display one metric only when viewing a Trended line chart. The other chart types let you view up to five metrics. For more information, see Adding or Removing Metrics.

87 Analytics 87 Option Items Y Axis Break down reports Description Next to Items, click to add items (terms, authors, etc., depending on the report) to the graph. You can display as many as five items. If no items are selected, the top five display. Choose Linear or Normalized. Click between the chart and the table to break down the entire report by using different categories. For example, in the Author report, you can break down the report by the content provider. You can also click the Break Down icon ( ) in a ranked report's table to break down each item by another metric. For example, if you are viewing the Authors report, you can click the Break Down icon next to each author to break the report down by the social platform. Adding or Removing Metrics By default, Social contains default metrics in each report. You can, however, add or remove metrics from reports to suit your needs. Note: You can add metrics to or remove metrics from ranked reports only. Tip: For example, to examine the correlation that mentions of your terms by certain authors and their average sentiment scores have on orders of your products, you can create an Authors report that contains the following metrics: Mentions, Average Sentiment, and Orders. The first two metrics are Social metrics and the last metric is a Analytics metric. The integration of Social with $1 is a powerful tool to help you drive your brand's revenue and exposure. 1. While viewing the ranked report, click, then click next to Metrics to display the Add Metrics dialog box.

88 Analytics From the Metric Type drop-down list, select the desired metric. You can add as many as five metrics to ranked reports. 3. To delete a metric, click next to the desired metric. 4. Click Save when you are finished. Adjusting the Reporting Date Range Adjust the date range so that reports show the desired amount of data. Click the Calendar icon ( ) in the upper-right corner, then select an option: Today Yesterday This Week Last Week This Month Last Month Custom Range If you chose Custom Range, a calendar displays.

89 Analytics 89 Select the reporting date range. Click Submit.

90 Publish 90 Publish The Publish features lets you simultaneously post content to Facebook, Google+, and LinkedIn pages you manage and to your Twitter accounts. Content Calendar Use the Content Calendar to create new content and to interact with existing content created by the Social Publisher (both past and scheduled) through a List View or a Calendar View (Month or Week). Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Content Calendar Overview, Content Calendar Working with Posts, Content Calendar Multi-Platform Posts, and Content Calendar Drafts & Templates. Content created with the Publisher is automatically added to the Content Calendar. You can think of the Content Calendar as the inbox for all of your published content. You can use the Content Calendar as a starting point to initiate all of your content-management workflows. For example, you can create new posts, perform actions on existing content (edit the post, change the schedule or targets, and so forth), and plan your overall content strategy all from within the Content Calendar. Display and Filter the Content Calendar Display posts in the Content Calendar and filter or sort the content by different criteria for easier access. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Content Calendar Overview and Content Calendar Working with Posts. 1. Click Publish > Content Calendar. Note: If the rail is not displayed, click.

91 Publish Access the search, filter, and sort options by clicking above the left navigation rail. 3. To search for content by name, in the Search field, type all or part of the content's name. 4. To filter the list by selected criteria, select one or more of the following options from the Filter options.

92 Publish 92 Note: By default, no filtering is applied (all options are selected). If you select multiple filtering options, only those posts that meet all selected criteria display in the list. Social Platform: Select the desired social platforms: Facebook, Twitter, Google+, and LinkedIn. Only posts applicable to the selected platforms display. Social Properties: Select one or more social properties. Only posts applicable to the selected properties display. Campaigns: Select one or more campaigns. Only posts applicable to the selected campaigns display. Post Status: Select the desired statuses: Scheduled, Rejected, Failed, Pending Approval, Posted, and Suspended. Only posts with the selected statuses display. Post Type: Select the desired post types: None (Text Only), Image, Attached Link, Video, Photo Album, SWF Link, Stream App Link, Cover Photo, and Event. Only posts applicable to the selected types display. Tags: Select one or more tags. Only posts applicable to the selected tags display. Pending Approvals: Select a user or user group, or you can select Show Posts with My Approval Pending. Only posts that are awaiting approval from that individual or group display. You can then approve or reject the applicable posts. Any approval actions are automatically logged in the Notes section. Created By: Select one or more Social users. Only content created by the selected users display. Suspended Posts: Select an option: Include Suspended Posts, Exclude Suspended Posts, or Show Only Suspended Posts. Note that this filter is not available if you do not have any currently suspended posts in your account. Sort Order: Sort the content in ascending or descending order by date. Click Reset Filters to return to no filtering (all options selected). 5. (Conditional) Click a Date box above a group of posts to collapse that date's content. 6. (Conditional) Click next to a post to display its child posts.

93 Publish 93 The image on the left side of each post displays an icon indicating the social platform that is applicable for that post: Facebook, Twitter, Google+, or LinkedIn. If, during the post's creation, it was assigned multiple properties, a number displays indicating how many different properties are applicable for that post. If the post is targeted for more than one property, a icon displays that you can click to expand the post to see a representation of that post for each property (child posts). You can then manage each post individually. For conceptual information about parent posts and child posts, see Parent and Child Posts. Content Calendar List View Access the Content Calendar in List View mode. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Content Calendar Overview. 1. Click Publish > Content Calendar to display the List View. Content that you create and publish using the Publisher is automatically added to the Content Calendar. You might need to refresh the content by clicking to display recently added posts. The Content Calendar displays only content for the selected date range.

94 Publish (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the desired date range. If you select Custom Range, a calendar displays. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjusting the Reporting Date Range. 3. Display and filter the content as desired. For more information, see Display and Filter the Content Calendar. 4. View the content. By default, each post displays in a collapsed form. The page thumbnail and social platform (Facebook, Twitter, Google+, or LinkedIn) displays on the left side of each post. If a number displays in the page thumbnail, that post targets more than one social platform or property. Posts that target more than one platform or property can be expanded by clicking next to the post to display its child posts. For conceptual information about parent posts and child posts, see Parent and Child Posts. The post's status displays at the top right of the post. Post statuses include posted, pending approval, scheduled, failed, or rejected. Some statuses are actionable, such as pending approval. Text along the bottom of each post displays the date and time when the content is scheduled for posting, its campaign, target information, and associated tags (if included). 5. Perform the desired actions: Action Description Refresh Content Calendar Click to refresh the calender's content. Create a new post Click to create a new post from inside the Content Calendar. For more information, see Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar.

95 Publish 95 Action Approve a post Description Click Approve in the top right corner of the desired post's tile. You can also perform bulk actions on posts, including approving multiple posts simultaneously. Perform bulk actions Click, then click the desired posts to multi-select more than one post. After you click, new icons display to the left of the button that let you perform actions on multiple posts simultaneously. You can perform the following bulk actions: Approve: Click to approve the selected posts. Users can turn approval on or off so that all posts must be approved before posting or allowed to be posted without approval. Posting approval is an optional feature in Social. If you have the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure posts that need approval. Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has user group permissions to create posts, but not to approve his or her own posts for publishing, creates a post. For more information about Approval settings, see Configure Facebook Page Settings, Require Approval for Twitter Posts, and Require Approval for Google+ Posts. Reject: Click Delete: Click to reject the selected posts. to delete the selected posts. Duplicate: Click to duplicate the selected posts.you can then edit the duplicate to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view content for that property access to the post. Move to Draft: Click to save the selected posts in an intermediate state as drafts.the posts are then placed in the Draft View rather than the List View, Month View, or Week View. One useful aspect of draft posts is that if you assign a social property to a post, all Social users who have access to that property can view and use the draft. If you do not assign a social property to a draft, it remains private. Only you can view and edit the draft. For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates. Suspend Posts: Click, then click Suspend Posts to temporarily suspend scheduled posts from being published. For more information, see Suspend All Scheduled Posts for One or More Properties.

96 Publish 96 Action Description Unsuspend Posts: Click, then click Unsuspend Posts to unsuspend all posts that are currently in a suspended state so that they are posted to their assigned social properties according to schedule. This option displays only if you have previously suspended posts. For more information, see Unsuspend All Suspended Posts in Bulk. Exit Multi-Select Mode: Click select mode. to exit multi-select mode and return to regular Change the report suite Click to change the report suite to display its posts. For more information, see Change Social Report Suite or Company. View scheduled posts Click Post Timeline > Post Timeline to display your posts that have been scheduled. This is the default view. View or create post drafts Click Post Timeline > Drafts to display your posts that are in draft form.you can also create new drafts from the Drafts page. For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates. View or create post templates Click Post Timeline > Templates to display your posts that are in template form. For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates. Edit an individual post Click or tap the desired post to open it in editing mode. For more information, see Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar. In addition to editing a post's text and configuration options, such as social properties, targets, schedule, and so forth, you can perform the following actions: Add Note: Add information that only internal Social users can see. For example, you can add notes about changes that have been made to the post or changes that need to be made. Or, you can add information about scheduling or targeting changes. Click to add additional notes. You can use the notes feature as an audit trail because each note has a timestamp. Preview: Click to preview the selected post. If the post is applicable to more than one social property, a preview of the post on each property displays. For tweets, you can click links to view the photo and reply to, retweet, or favorite the tweet. Duplicate: Click to duplicate the selected post.you can then edit the duplicate to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view content for that property access to the post.

97 Publish 97 Action Description Move to Draft: Click to remove the post from your Content Calendar (List View, Month View, or Week View) and place it on the Draft View. Moving a post to draft lets you create a draft of that post that you can further edit, share with other users, or use to create a sticky draft. For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates. Delete: Click to delete the selected post. View or edit parent (master) and child posts Click next to a post to display its child posts, if applicable. The image on the left side of each post displays an icon indicating the social platform that is applicable for that post: Facebook, Google+, Twitter, or LinkedIn. If, during the post's creation, it was assigned multiple properties, a parent post and child posts are automatically created. A number displays to indicate how many different properties are applicable for that post. If the post is targeted for more than one property, a icon displays that you can click to expand the post to see a representation of that post for each property. Using parent and child posts helps you become more productive.you can perform bulk editing operations by editing the text or settings on the parent post. These changes flow down to the child posts. You can also edit each post individually, giving you the flexibility to tailor each post for its audience. For example, you can change the text or the image for one child post while leaving the other child posts unchanged. Or, for a tweet, you can add a hashtag to one child post while leaving child posts for Facebook or Google+ unchanged. For more information, see Parent and Child Posts. Content Calendar Month View Access the Content Calendar in Month View mode. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Content Calendar Overview. The Month View mode is strategic because it gives you a broad view of your campaigns and posts over a calendar month. 1. Click Publish > Content Calendar to display the List View (the default view). 2. Click Month to display the current month's view. Content that you create and publish using the Publisher is automatically added to the Content Calendar. You might need to refresh the content by clicking to display recently added posts.

98 Publish (Optional) Click the right and left arrows in the calendar header to display the previous or next month's calendar. 4. Display and filter the content as desired. For more information, see Display and Filter the Content Calendar. 5. View the content. The top active campaigns display at the top of the calendar, between the month and day names. This gives you a quick view of where your social activity is occurring. Icons and numbers below the campaign name indicate how many posts are scheduled for each social platform. Each campaign is color coded with individual posts in the calendar. Click a campaign to display only posts that are assigned to that campaign.

99 Publish 99 By default, campaigns with scheduled posts display in a collapsed form on the appropriate date. Icons and numbers for each campaign indicate how many posts are scheduled for each social platform. Click a campaign on the desired date to see expanded details. Click View Posts to display a List View of all posts in the campaign scheduled for that day. 6. To view a post, click it on the calendar, then click View Post. To edit it, click the post. 7. Perform the desired actions: Action Description Refresh Content Calendar Click to refresh the calender's content. Create a new post Click to create a new post from inside the Content Calendar. For more information, see Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar. Approve a post Click Approve in the top right corner of the desired post's tile. You can also perform bulk actions on posts, including approving multiple posts simultaneously. Perform bulk actions Click, then click the desired posts to multi-select more than one post. After you click, new icons display to the left of the button that let you perform actions on multiple posts simultaneously. You can perform the following bulk actions: Approve: Click to approve the selected posts. Users can turn approval on or off so that all posts must be approved before posting or allowed to be posted without approval. Posting approval is an optional feature in Social. If you have the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure posts that need approval. Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has

100 Publish 100 Action Description user group permissions to create posts, but not to approve his or her own posts for publishing, creates a post. For more information about Approval settings, see Configure Facebook Page Settings, Require Approval for Twitter Posts, and Require Approval for Google+ Posts. Reject: Click Delete: Click to reject the selected posts. to delete the selected posts. Duplicate: Click to duplicate the selected posts.you can then edit the duplicate to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view content for that property access to the post. Move to Draft: Click to save the selected posts in an intermediate state as drafts.the posts are then placed in the Draft View rather than the List View, Month View, or Week View. One useful aspect of draft posts is that if you assign a social property to a post, all Social users who have access to that property can view and use the draft. If you do not assign a social property to a draft, it remains private. Only you can view and edit the draft. For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates. Suspend Posts: Click, then click Suspend Posts to temporarily suspend scheduled posts from being published. For more information, see Suspend All Scheduled Posts for One or More Properties. Unsuspend Posts: Click, then click Unsuspend Posts to unsuspend all posts that are currently in a suspended state so that they are posted to their assigned social properties according to schedule. This option displays only if you have previously suspended posts. For more information, see Unsuspend All Suspended Posts in Bulk. Exit Multi-Select Mode: Click select mode. to exit multi-select mode and return to regular Change the report suite Click to change the report suite to display its posts. For more information, see Change Social Report Suite or Company. View scheduled posts Click Post Timeline > Post Timeline to display your posts that have been scheduled. View or create post drafts Click Post Timeline > Drafts to display your posts that are in draft form.you can also create new drafts from the Drafts page. For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates.

101 Publish 101 Action View or create post templates Description Click Post Timeline > Templates to display your posts that are in template form. Edit an individual post Click or tap the desired post to open it in editing mode. For more information, see Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar. In addition to editing a post's text and configuration options, such as social properties, targets, schedule, and so forth, you can perform the following actions: Add Note: Add information that only internal Social users can see. For example, you can add notes about changes that have been made to the post or changes that need to be made. Or, you can add information about scheduling or targeting changes. Click to add additional notes. You can use the notes feature as an audit trail because each note has a timestamp. Preview: Click to preview the selected post. If the post is applicable to more than one social property, a preview of the post on each property displays. For tweets, you can click links to view the photo and reply to, retweet, or favorite the tweet. Duplicate: Click to duplicate the selected post.you can then edit the duplicate to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view content for that page access to the post. Move to Draft: Click to remove the post from your Content Calendar (List View, Month View, or Week View) and place it on the Draft View. Moving a post to draft lets you create a draft of that post that you can further edit, share with other users, or use to create a sticky draft. For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates. Delete: Click to delete the selected post. View or edit master and child posts Click next to a post to display its child posts, if applicable. The image on the left side of each post displays an icon indicating the social platform that is applicable for that post: Facebook, Google+, Twitter, or LinkedIn. If, during the post's creation, it was assigned multiple properties, a master post and child posts are automatically created. A number displays to indicate how many different properties are applicable for that post. If the post is targeted for more than one property, a icon displays that you can click to expand the post to see a representation of that post for each property. Using master and child posts helps you become more productive.you can perform bulk editing operations by editing the text or settings on the master post. These changes flow down to the child posts. You can also edit each post individually,

102 Publish 102 Action Description giving you the flexibility to tailor each post for its audience. For example, you can change the text or the image for one child post while leaving the other child posts unchanged. Or, for a tweet, you can add a hashtag to one child post while leaving child posts for Facebook or Google+ unchanged. Content Calendar Week View Access the Content Calendar in Week View mode. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Content Calendar Overview. 1. Click Publish > Content Calendar to display the List View (the default view). 2. Click Week to display the current week's view. Content that you create and publish using the Publisher is automatically added to the Content Calendar. You might need to refresh the content by clicking to display recently added posts.

103 Publish (Optional) Click the right and left arrows in the calendar header to display the previous or next week's calendar. 4. Display and filter the content as desired. For more information, see Display and Filter the Content Calendar. 5. View the content. Each campaign is color coded with individual posts in the calendar. Each post has on icon of the right side of its tile to indicate its status, approved or needing approval, for example. Click a post to display its content along with its associated campaign, scheduled date and time, and associated tags. 6. (Conditional) Perform the desired actions: Action Description Refresh Content Calendar Click to refresh the calender's content. Create a new post Click to create a new post from inside the Content Calendar. For more information, see Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar.

104 Publish 104 Action Approve a post Description Click Approve in the top right corner of the desired post's tile. You can also perform bulk actions on posts, including approving multiple posts simultaneously. Perform bulk actions Click, then click the desired posts to multi-select more than one post. After you click, new icons display to the left of the button that let you perform actions on multiple posts simultaneously. You can perform the following bulk actions: Approve: Click to approve the selected posts. Users can turn approval on or off so that all posts must be approved before posting or allowed to be posted without approval. Posting approval is an optional feature in Social. If you have the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure posts that need approval. Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has user group permissions to create posts, but not to approve his or her own posts for publishing, creates a post. For more information about Approval settings, see Configure Facebook Page Settings, Require Approval for Twitter Posts, and Require Approval for Google+ Posts. Reject: Click Delete: Click to reject the selected posts. to delete the selected posts. Duplicate: Click to duplicate the selected posts.you can then edit the duplicate to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view content for that property access to the post. Move to Draft: Click to save the selected posts in an intermediate state as drafts.the posts are then placed in the Draft View rather than the List View, Month View, or Week View. One useful aspect of draft posts is that if you assign a social property to a post, all Social users who have access to that property can view and use the draft. If you do not assign a social property to a draft, it remains private. Only you can view and edit the draft. For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates. Suspend Posts: Click, then click Suspend Posts to temporarily suspend scheduled posts from being published. For more information, see Suspend All Scheduled Posts for One or More Properties.

105 Publish 105 Action Description Unsuspend Posts: Click, then click Unsuspend Posts to unsuspend all posts that are currently in a suspended state so that they are posted to their assigned social properties according to schedule. This option displays only if you have previously suspended posts. For more information, see Unsuspend All Suspended Posts in Bulk. Exit Multi-Select Mode: Click select mode. to exit multi-select mode and return to regular Change the report suite Click to change the report suite to display its posts. For more information, see Change Social Report Suite or Company. View scheduled posts Click Post Timeline > Post Timeline to display your posts that have been scheduled. View or create post drafts Click Post Timeline > Drafts to display your posts that are in draft form.you can also create new drafts from the Drafts page. For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates. View or create post templates Click Post Timeline > Templates to display your posts that are in template form. Edit an individual post Click or tap the desired post to open it in editing mode. For more information, see Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar. In addition to editing a post's text and configuration options, such as social properties, targets, schedule, and so forth, you can perform the following actions: Add Note: Add information that only internal Social users can see. For example, you can add notes about changes that have been made to the post or changes that need to be made. Or, you can add information about scheduling or targeting changes. Click to add additional notes. You can use the notes feature as an audit trail because each note has a timestamp. Preview: Click to preview the selected post. If the post is applicable to more than one social property, a preview of the post on each property displays. For tweets, you can click links to view the photo and reply to, retweet, or favorite the tweet. Duplicate: Click to duplicate the selected post.you can then edit the duplicate to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view content for that page access to the post.

106 Publish 106 Action Description Move to Draft: Click to remove the post from your Content Calendar (List View, Month View, or Week View) and place it on the Draft View. Moving a post to draft lets you create a draft of that post that you can further edit, share with other users, or use to create a sticky draft. For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates. Delete: Click to delete the selected post. View or edit master and child posts Click next to a post to display its child posts, if applicable. The image on the left side of each post displays an icon indicating the social platform that is applicable for that post: Facebook, Google+, Twitter, or LinkedIn. If, during the post's creation, it was assigned multiple properties, a master post and child posts are automatically created. A number displays to indicate how many different properties are applicable for that post. If the post is targeted for more than one property, a icon displays that you can click to expand the post to see a representation of that post for each property. Using master and child posts helps you become more productive.you can perform bulk editing operations by editing the text or settings on the master post. These changes flow down to the child posts. You can also edit each post individually, giving you the flexibility to tailor each post for its audience. For example, you can change the text or the image for one child post while leaving the other child posts unchanged. Or, for a tweet, you can add a hashtag to one child post while leaving child posts for Facebook or Google+ unchanged. Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar Create a new post from with the Content Calendar or edit an existing post. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Post Publishing, Multi-Platform Publishing, Publisher Settings, Audience Publishing, Content Calendar Overview, Content Calendar Working with Posts, Content Calendar Multi-Platform Posts, and Content Calendar Drafts & Templates. 1. To create a new post from within the Content Calendar (Publish > Content Calendar), click. Or To edit an existing post from with the Content Calendar (Publish > Content Calendar), click or tap the desired post to open it in editing mode. While editing a post, you can edit the parent post or a child post.you can also edit all tweets at the platform level. For more information, see Edit Parent or Child Posts in Content Calendar. 2. Complete the desired tasks: Specify the Post Text Assign Social Properties

107 Publish 107 Assign a Campaign Specify Targets Schedule a Post Insert an Image Create and Share a Photo Album Upload a Video Attach a Custom Link Attach a Facebook App Link Upload a Facebook Cover Photo (Facebook Only) Share an Event (Facebook Only) Share a SWF Attach Tags Add Notes Preview a Post Duplicate a Post Move a Post to Draft Delete a Post Specify the Post Text Steps 1. Type the text in the text box, including URLs (if desired). Details The Social Publisher lets you simultaneously specify text for multiple social properties (Facebook pages, Twitter accounts, Google+ pages, LinkedIn company pages and groups, YouTube channels, and Sina Weibo accounts). Note: After you assign social platforms and properties (as explained in the row below), two icons display below the text box: 1. : Lets you create or edit text that applies to all assigned platforms and properties. 2. : Lets you create or edit text that applies only to assigned Twitter accounts. 2. (Conditional) To create or edit text that applies to all platforms and properties assigned to the post, ensure that the Parent As you type text for your post, you can see how the Social UI accommodates posting from different device types. If you are working on a desktop device, notice that the preview panes in the third column update to show you what the published post will look like on each property. If you are working on a tablet or other mobile device, notice that a Preview button displays that lets you view the preview panes. For Facebook, Google+, LinkedIn company pages and groups, and YouTube videos, you can type as many as 5,000 characters. For Twitter, you can type as many as 140 characters. For Sina Wiebo, you can type as many as 140 double-byte characters or 280 single-byte characters. As you type text, the number of available characters remaining displays below the text box. Note that this number reflects the most restrictive character limit, depending on which social properties you selected. For example, if you selected only Facebook and Google+ properties, the character limit displays 5,000. If you selected one or more Twitter accounts, the character limit displays 140. If your text exceeds the character limit for Twitter, you can edit the text in the Twitter preview panel while allowing more text in the Facebook and Google+ preview panels. This functionality lets you create and publish content appropriate to each property. Note that for Twitter posts, there is an auto-complete functionality that automatically fills in users' Twitter handles and hashtags as you begin typing sign and a Twitter handle or the # sign. You can continue typing the handle or hashtag or you can select it from the list that displays. Social uses all of the Twitter handles that you

108 Publish 108 Steps Details button is selected ( ), then type or edit the text as desired. have mentioned or followed during the last 60 days and the hashtags you have mentioned in the last 60 days as a basis for the auto-complete functionality. You can click the Text Direction icon to change the text direction. Clicking this icon toggles between left-to-right text and right-to-left text. 3. (Conditional) To create or edit text (add a hastag, for example) that applies only If you include one or more inline links in a post, you can shorten them using your to tweets, click the Twitter configured link shorteners. You must shorten all links if you want to track the post button ( ), then type or by campaigns. For detailed information about shortening links, see Generate Short edit the text as desired. URLs in Posts. The default link shortener is ctx.ly. If you add additional link shorteners, they displays as well. Assign Social Properties Steps Details 1. Click Social Properties. 2. Select one or more social properties from the drop-down list: Audience Groups Page Groups Facebook Pages Twitter Accounts Google+ Pages LinkedIn Companies LinkedIn Groups YouTube Sina Weibo You can also use the Search box to locate and select the desired social properties. Select the desired targets to which you want to publish content. Audience Groups: Lets you post content to a specific audience. An audience is a collection of people or fans. For more information, see Facebook Audiences. Page Groups: Lets you post content simultaneously to a group of Facebook pages or to a collection of Like nodes on the Facebook Open Graph. This option lets you post to every page or node in that group or collection. A Like node is a virtual collection of anyone who has clicked a Facebook Like button outside of Facebook (for example, on a web page or display advertisement). Using this option, you can further communicate with every Facebook user who has clicked one of your Like buttons. For more information, see Page Groups. Facebook Pages: Lets you post content to the Wall of one or more Facebook pages that you manage. Twitter Accounts: Lets you post content to one or more Twitter accounts that you manage. Google+ Pages: Lets you post content to one or more Google+ pages that you manage. LinkedIn Companies: Lets you post content to one or more LinkedIn company pages that you manage. For more information, see Publishing Posts to LinkedIn Company Pages and Groups. LinkedIn Page Groups: Lets you post content to one or more LinkedIn groups. For more information, see Publishing Posts to LinkedIn Company Pages and Groups. YouTube: Lets you post video assets to YouTube channels that you manage and add videos to playlists. Unlike posts for other social properties (Facebook status updates, and Twitter tweets, for example) YouTube videos exist longer and are relevant for a longer period of time.

109 Publish 109 Steps Details Sina Weibo: Lets you post content (text and image posts) to one or more Sina Weibo accounts that you manage. Sina Weibo, used primarily in China, is similar to Twitter. Note that at this time, no analytics APIs are available from Sina Weibo. As a result, Social does not offer analytic capabilities for Sina Weibo. As you add social properties, they are listed at the top of the list (below the search filter). To remove a property, click the x on the property's tile. If you create content and assign it to multiple social platforms and properties simultaneously, Social automatically displays a parent (master) post and child posts in the Content Calendar. For conceptual information about parent posts and child posts, see Parent and Child Posts. Note: Depending on the social properties you select, some of the other options might not be available. For example, if you select a Twitter account, the Post Predictions and Target option are not available. Other times, you will receive a notice if an element is not available for a certain property type. For example, if you create a post and select a LinkedIn group and then try to attach an image, a notice displays on the LinkedIn group preview panel informing you that image attachments are not supported for LinkedIn groups. Assign a Campaign Steps 1. Click Campaign. 2. Select the desired campaign from the drop-down list. You can also use the Search box to locate and select the desired campaign. Details A campaign is a marketing effort used to bring visitors to a specific website. For example, if a campaign advertises a specific credit card, the campaign could be a series of creative elements (links, Flash Multimedia posts, tweets, and so forth) advertising the card's interest rate and benefits. The campaign's tracking code on each creative element lets you track the effectiveness of the campaign by letting you know which link a user clicked to come to your website. You can specify a default campaign to streamline publishing and governance. For more information, see Campaigns. Specify Targets Steps Details 1. Click Targets. 2. Click the desired social property, then specify the desired targeting options. Facebook The following options are available for Facebook: Estimated Reach: (Facebook Only. No user interaction required.) Social estimates the number of Facebook users who will be reached by this post's targeting settings. As you configure the various targeting settings, such as geo, gender, or age, the reach estimate automatically updates.

110 Publish 110 Steps Details Geo: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target countries. You can then choose to post the content to everywhere in that country or to a specific state or city. Languages: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target languages. The content is posted only to fans in the selected geographic location who speak the specified language. Language is based on what fans specify as their language on their Facebook profiles.you can target by language without using location targeting. The post displays in users' News Feeds based on Facebook's location algorithm, which takes into account their IP address, network, and current city. Languages spoken are also taken into account. If a location is not listed in Adobe Social, but it exists in Facebook, contact your Account Manager and we can add it to the list. Age: Use the age pointers to specify the target age range. Be aware that Facebook does not permit certain types of advertising to minors. For example, you cannot advertise alcoholic beverages to people in the year-old range. Gender: Select All, Male, or Female. Education Level: Select All, In High School, In College, or College Alumni. If you choose In College, or College Alumni, the following options are available: College: Specify one or more target colleges. College Major: Specify one or more college majors. Relationship Status: Select one or more relationship statuses: Single, In Relationship, Married, Engaged, or Not Specified. Interested In: Select All, Male, or Female. Workplace: Select one or more target workplaces. When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target. Note: If you apply demographic targeting to a Facebook post, that post displays in the Newsfeeds only of users meeting the selected demographic criteria. However, it is normal Facebook behavior for that same posts to appear on your brand's Facebook page. This behavior is true for demographic-targets posts, but not for geo-targeted posts. If you do not want demographic-targeted posts to appear on your brand's Facebook page, you can hide them. For more information, see How Do I Control Who See's my Page's Posts in the Facebook Help Center. Twitter The following options are available for Twitter: Country: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target countries. The content is posted only to users in the selected countries. When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target.

111 Publish 111 Steps Details Note: For location-based targeting, a user's location is generated from a variety of signals, including mobile location. If a user moves from one geo location to another, it might take several days and several actions for that user's location to change. For example, suppose a user travels from the United States to Germany. Based solely on IP-location information, it might take several days for the location to change. However, if that user performs several actions, such as tweeting with his or her current location (Germany) from a mobile device, the location changes quicker. Google+ The following options are available for Google+: Following, Customers, VIPs, Team Members, Your Circles, Extended Circles, and Public. Select the desired circle. Circles let you share posts with different groups of people. For example, you can create a group for family members, a group for co-workers, a group for college friends, and so forth.when you post in a specific circle, the post shows in the stream only for those people in that circle. Google includes four default circles for each page: Following Customers VIPs Team Members These default circles can be edited or removed by the page administrator. Social includes three default circles for each page: Your Circles (followers you have added to your circles) Extended Circles (followers or followers in your circles) Public (anyone can see the post) You can target multiple circles in one post. Each circle has a maximum number or 5,000 followers at this time due to Google limitations. When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target. LinkedIn Include: From the drop-down list, select Employees and Non-Employees or Non-Employees Only. Company Size: From the drop-down list, choose Self Employed or the desired company size number ranges.you must target at least 100 employees and you can select a maximum of ten size ranges.

112 Publish 112 Steps Details Industry: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target industries. The content is posted only to users in the selected industries.you can select up to ten industries. Job Function: From the drop-down list, choose one or more job functions. The content is posted only to users in the selected functions. You can select up to ten functions. Seniority: From the drop-down list, choose one or more seniority levels. The content is posted only to users with the selected level. You can select up to ten levels. Geography: From the drop-down list, choose one or more geographic locations. The content is posted only to users in the selected locations. You can select up to ten locations. When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target. Schedule a Post Steps 1. Click Schedule. 2. Click Now to post the content immediately. Or Details You can schedule an unlimited number of posts. You can edit or cancel scheduled posts, as desired. Posts can be scheduled at one-minute intervals. Click Later to post the content according to schedule, then use the Date, Time, and Time Zone options to specify when you want to post the content. The date and time cannot be in the past. You can schedule a post up to one year in advance. Insert an Image Steps Details 1. Click, click Upload a Photo, then specify the image's URL to upload the image from the web. Or Click Browse Local Drive, then browse to and Photos: Photos and images get a much higher click-through rate than regular status updates. The Social Publisher makes it easy to publish images. For Facebook, these posts will appear on your Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds. For Google+, these posts will appear on your Google+ pages and on your fans' individual Streams. For Twitter, these posts will appear in your fans' Twitter feeds. For LinkedIn company pages, these posts will appear on your page and in users' individual feeds. Image attachments are not supported for LinkedIn groups.

113 Publish 113 Steps select the image from your computer. Details Image formats should be.jpg,.gif, or.png. The image size should be no larger than 2 MB. Create and Share a Photo Album Steps 1. Click Attach Content, click Media. 2. Click Create/Share Photo Album, then specify the album's name. 3. Click Add Photos, then browse to and select multiple images. 4. Specify the caption for each image. 5. To specify the album's cover image, click the image, then select Set as Album Cover. Details Photo Albums apply to Facebook only. To remove an image from the album, click the desired image, then select Remove Image. Note: There are important differences with photo album posts whether or not you use the Post Audience feature (described below) to target your audience. Non-Targeted Album Posts: If you do not target your albums using the Target feature, post analytics are not available. Non-targeted photo album posts do not display in the Post Analytics report. Non-targeted photo album posts display with images in users' Newsfeeds, with the image you specified as its cover at the top, as shown below: Targeted Album Posts: If you target your albums using the Target feature, post analytics are available. Photo album posts display in the Post Analytics report. Because of Facebook limitations, targeted photo album posts do not display with the images in users' Newsfeed as with non-targeted posts. After you select targeting options, a message displays informing you that the appearance of the post on users' Newsfeeds changes when shared with a targeted audience. The photo album displays as a Small Image post on users' Newsfeeds, as shown below. Users can click the image to display all photos in the album.

114 Publish 114 Upload a Video Steps 1. Click Attach Content, click Media. 2. Click Upload Video, then specify the video's title. 3. Click Upload Video to browse to and select the video file. Details The Social Publisher makes it easy to publish videos. For Facebook, these posts appear on your Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds. For Google+, these posts appear on your Google+ pages and on your fans' individual Streams. For Twitter, these posts appear in your fans' Twitter feeds. For YouTube, these posts appear in your YouTube channels. You cannot use audience groups and targeting with videos. YouTube Notes: For more information, see Publish a YouTube Video. Facebook Notes: The Social Publisher posts videos with native Facebook playback. Users' must enable Video in order for the video story to display. To do this, users must add video permission inside Facebook (Account Settings > Apps > Video > Edit Settings > Publish Content to My Wall). Facebook limits the functionality available with video posts: You cannot geo-target a post with a video attachment. You cannot customize an action link name for the video. Because of a Facebook limitation, Facebook video titles with non-ascii characters are truncated and garbled after being published. Social supports a few methods of video publishing. You can choose to use the Publisher and upload a video as described here or you can publish videos as stream apps: embedded or just add a YouTube URL. Attach a Custom Link Steps 1. Click Attach Content, click Link. 2. From the Select Link Type drop-down list, select Custom Link. 3. Specify the link's URL (ensure that your include then click. Notice that Social automatically pulls thumbnail images from the link. 4. Use the left and right arrows to change the image. Or Details Post a link on Facebook and Google+ pages that you manage and to Twitter accounts and LinkedIn groups to direct fans to a specific URL or web page. For Facebook, these posts will appear on your Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds. For Google+, these posts will appear on your Google+ pages and on your fans' individual Streams. For Twitter, these posts will appear in your fans' Twitter feeds. For LinkedIn groups, these posts will appear in your members' individual feeds. A link is the best way to share content. Social makes link tracking and analytics easy by automatically shortening URLs using our custom cxt.ly short URL service and by tracking the Click-Throughs. Twitter does not support actionable links. If you selected one or more Twitter accounts for the post, select Attach as an Inline Link for Twitter, if desired.

115 Publish 115 Steps Details Select Upload, then specify an image's URL or click Browse to locate and select an image from your computer. Attach a Facebook App Link Steps Details 1. Click Attach Content, click Link. 2. From the Select Link Type drop-down list, select Facebook App Links. 3. From the Select Application drop-down list, select the desired application. 4. From the Select Facebook Page for App drop-down list, the location where the application currently resides. This could be another Facebook page or a website where you previously published the application. 5. Under Link Thumbnail, select From URL or Upload. If you select From URL, the image you chose when publishing the application is used. Or, you can select Upload, then specify an image's URL or click Browse to locate and select an image from your computer. 6. In the Link Title box, specify the action link name that appears to the Post a link on Facebook and Google+ pages, LinkedIn groups, and to Twitter accounts to direct fans to a specific application created in Social. For Facebook, these posts will appear on your Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds. For Google+, these posts will appear on your Google+ pages and on your fans' individual Streams. For Twitter, these posts will appear in your fans' Twitter feeds. For LinkedIn groups, these posts will appear in your members' individual feeds. A link is the best way to share content. Social makes link tracking and analytics easy by automatically shortening URLs using our custom cxt.ly short URL service and by tracking the Click-Throughs. Twitter does not support actionable links. If you selected one or more Twitter accounts for the post, select Attach as an Inline Link for Twitter, if desired.

116 Publish 116 Steps right of the image on the post. 7. In the Link Description box, specify the description that appears to the right of the image on the post. Details Upload a Facebook Cover Photo (Facebook Only) Steps 1. Click Attach Content, then click More. 2. Click Upload Facebook Cover Photo. 3. Specify the image's URL to upload the image from the web. Or Details Post or update a cover photo on Facebook pages that you manage. You can post the cover photo immediately or according to schedule. Image formats should be.jpg,.gif, or.png. For best results, the image should be 851 x 315 pixels. Facebook cover photos cannot be posted to audiences using pre-defined targeting. No analytic information is available for Facebook cover photos. Click Browse, then browse to and select the image from your computer. Share an Event (Facebook Only) Steps 1. Click Attach Content, then click More. 2. Click Share an Event. 3. Select the desired page from which to share the event. 4. Select to not display an event image by clicking None. Details Post an event on Facebook pages that you manage. These posts appear on your Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds to inform fans about upcoming events or to organize social gatherings. Or Click Upload to browse to and select the image file. Or Specify the image's URL to upload it from the web.

117 Publish 117 Share a SWF Steps 1. Click Attach Content, then click More. 2. Click Share a SWF. 3. Specify the SWF media's URL (ensure that you include 4. Specify the SWF media's thumbnail URL. Or Details The Action Link Name disguises the SWF element in the post. This is the name of the link that people or fans will click in the post to access the content. Specify the text that will display. The text can contain as many as 10,000 characters. Notice the character counter at the bottom of the text box. Click Browse to browse to and select the image's file. 5. Specify the Action Link URL. 6. Specify the Action Link name/description. 7. Specify the Action Link description. Attach Tags Steps 1. Click Tags. 2. Type the text for the tag. Or Select the desired tag from the drop-down list. Details Information you type in the Tags box is not viewable outside of the Social product. Facebook fans and Twitter followers, for example, cannot see this information. Other Social users in your organization can see this information when they view pending posts. You can use tags to categorize this post. Tags are not sent to SAINT or to Adobe Analytics. Add Notes Steps 1. Type the desired text in the Add a New Note text box. 2. Click notes. to add additional Details Add information that only internal Social users can see. For example, you can add notes about changes that have been made to the post or changes that need to be made. Or, you can add information about scheduling or targeting changes. You can use the notes feature as an audit trail because each note has a timestamp.

118 Publish 118 Preview a Post Steps 1. Click. Details If the post is applicable to more than one social property, a preview of the post on each property displays. For tweets, you can click links to view the photo and reply to, retweet, or favorite the tweet. Duplicate a Post Steps Details 1. Click. Duplicate a post and you can then edit the duplicate to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view content for that page access to the post. Move a Post to Draft Steps Details 1. Click. Moving a post to draft removes the post from your Content Calendar (List View, Month View, or Week View) and places it on the Draft View. Moving a post to draft lets you create a draft of that post that you can further edit, share with other users, or use to create a sticky draft. For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates. Delete a Post Steps Details 1. Click. Delete the selected post. Click Save to save the post without publishing it. This option creates a sticky draft that you can use as a template for future posts. For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates. Or Click Publish to publish the post immediately. View or Create Post Drafts and Templates While creating posts from the Publisher or the Content Calendar, you can save the posts in an intermediate state as drafts. You can also create a template to use as a starting point for future posts. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Content Calendar Overview, Content Calendar Working with Posts, and Content Calendar Drafts & Templates. To create a draft, while creating the post in Publisher or Content Calendar, click Save instead of clicking Publish. This action saves the post in draft form. The post is then placed in the Draft View rather than the List View, Month

119 Publish 119 View, or Week View. One useful aspect of draft posts is that if you assign a social property to a post, all Social users who have access to that property can view and use the draft. If you do not assign a social property to a draft, it remains private. Only you can view and edit the draft. You can also save multiple posts in draft form using the bulk actions in Content Calendar. For more information, see Content Calendar List View, Content Calendar Month View, and Content Calendar Week View. You can edit drafts at any future time and complete the posts. The Drafts view is similar to the List View of the Content Calendar and lets you create, edit, and manage draft posts. A post in a draft state is analogous to an draft, something that is Work In Progress and will not be published to the social platform unless explicitly published. Drafts can be used as a great collaboration tool for content creation. Multiple authors can work on the same post before it is pushed to social properties. Note: The view and edit permissions of a draft derive from the social properties attached to it. If no social property is associated to a draft, it is private to the author and is not visible to anyone else. If the author adds one or more social property to the draft, it is visible to those who have access to those social properties. To display the Draft View 1. Click Publish > Content Calendar. By default, the Content Calendar opens in the List View. 2. (Conditional) Click Week to view the Content Calendar in Week View. 3. From the Post Timeline drop-down list, click Drafts. 4. View the content. By default, each post displays in a collapsed form.

120 Publish 120 The page thumbnail and social platform (Facebook, Google+, or Twitter) displays on the left side of each post. If a number displays in the page thumbnail, that post targets more than one social platform. Posts that target more than one platform can be expanded by clicking next to the post to display its child posts. The post's status displays at the top right of the post: Drafts. Text along the bottom of each post displays the date and time when the content was created, its campaign, target information, and associated tags (if included). 5. Perform the desired actions: Action Description Refresh Content Calendar Click to refresh the calenders content. Create a new post Click to create a new draft post from inside the Content Calendar. The process of creating a new post here is similar to the process of creating a post in the Publisher. For more information about the various options, see Publisher Page. Perform bulk actions Click, then click the desired posts to multi-select more than one post. After you click, new icons display that let you perform actions on multiple posts simultaneously. You can perform the following bulk actions: Approve: Click to approve the selected posts. Users can turn Approval on or off so that all posts must be approved before posting or allowed to be posted without approval. Posting approval is an optional feature in Social. If you have the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure posts that need approval. Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has user group permissions to create posts, but not to approve his or her own posts for publishing, creates a post. For more information about Approval settings, see Configure Facebook Page Settings, Require Approval for Twitter Posts, and Require Approval for Google+ Posts. Reject: Click Delete: Click to reject the selected posts. to delete the selected posts. Duplicate: Click to duplicate the selected post.you can then edit the duplicate to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view content for that page access to the post.

121 Publish 121 Action Change the report suite Edit an individual draft post or create a Template draft Description Click to change the report suite to display its posts. For more information, see Change Social Report Suite or Company. Click or tap the desired post to open it in editing mode. The process of editing an existing post is similar to the process of creating a post in the Publisher. For more information about the various options, see Publisher Page. In addition to editing a post's configuration options, such as social properties, targets, schedule, and so forth, you can perform the following actions: Add Note: Add information that only internal Social users can see. For example, you can add notes about changes that have been made to the post or changes that need to be made. Or, you can add information about scheduling or targeting changes. Click to add additional notes. You can use the notes feature as an audit trail because each note has a timestamp. Preview: Click to preview the selected post. If the post is applicable to more than one social property, a preview of the post on each property displays. For tweets, you can click links to view the photo and reply to, retweet, or favorite the tweet. Duplicate: Click to duplicate the selected post. You can then edit it to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view content for that page access to the post. Delete: Click to delete the selected posts. Create Template: Click to create a Template post. Templates are posts that can be used as starting points to create other posts in the future. Templates are re-usable posts as opposed to drafts that are meant for one-time use. Templates can be shared with multiple users or user groups. Note that special permissions are needed to create and edit templates. If you have already associated social properties to the post, they are removed. Select the groups and users you want to be able to view and edit the template. The process of editing a template is similar to the process of creating a post in the Publisher. For more information about the various options, see Publisher Page. You display templates by clicking Drafts >Templates. One useful aspect of Templates is that you assign users to a template rather than social properties. In fact, when you create a template from a post, all social properties that were previously assigned are removed. After you assign users to the template, they can then view and use the template draft. If you do not assign users to a template, it remains private. Only you can view and use the template.

122 Publish 122 Action Description While viewing or editing a template, the following options are available: Preview: Click to preview the selected post. If the post is applicable to more than one social property, a preview of the post on each property displays. For tweets, you can click links to view the photo and reply to, retweet, or favorite the tweet. Ignore: Click to remove the template from your view. This option is helpful to remove draft posts that do not interest you. Delete: Click to delete the selected posts. Update Share Settings: Click to update the groups and users who are able to view and edit the template. Create Post: Click Create Post to publish the template as a regular post to the selected social properties. View or edit child posts Click next to a post to display its child posts, if applicable. The image on the left side of each post displays an icon indicating the social platform that is applicable for that post: Facebook, Google+, Twitter, or LinkedIn. If, during the post's creation, it was assigned multiple properties, a master post and child posts are automatically created. A number displays to indicate how many different properties are applicable for that post. If the post is targeted for more than one property, a icon displays that you can click to expand the post to see a representation of that post for each property. Using master and child posts helps you become more productive.you can perform bulk editing operations by editing the text or settings on the master post. These changes flow down to the child posts. You can also edit each post individually, giving you the flexibility to tailor each post for its audience. For example, you can change the text or the image for one child post while leaving the other child posts unchanged. Or, for a tweet, you can add a hashtag to one child post while leaving child posts for Facebook or Google+ unchanged. Publish the draft Click Publish to move the post to the Content Calendar and post the edited draft post on the selected social properties. If the post needs approval before posting, the post is moved to the Content Calendar. Someone in your organization with approval permissions can then approve or reject the post, if applicable. Suspend and Unsuspend Posts Suspend all posts that are scheduled to be posted to one or more social properties for a specified time range. You can then unsuspend individual posts or unsuspend all posts using bulk actions. You might want to suspend posts in the event of a public-relations crisis, natural disaster, or similar business impact. For example, an airline company might want to temporarily suspend all posts to one or more social properties immediately following a well-publicized airplane crash. The Suspend Posts option is applicable to currently scheduled posts only. You can continue to create and publish new posts to those social properties while other posts are in a suspended state.

123 Publish 123 To understand what happens to posts that are scheduled for posting to a specific social property during the suspended time period, suppose a social property has 15 posts scheduled to be posted between October 1 at 10 a.m. and October 15 at 10 a.m. If you suspend posts for that property for that same time period, all 15 posts will fail, unless you unsuspend individual posts or unsuspend all posts using bulk actions at some point during that time period. However, suppose that you unsuspend all posts on October 5 at 2 p.m. Those posts that were scheduled to be posted between October 1 at 10 a.m. and October 5 at 2 p.m. will fail. All posts that were originally scheduled to be posted between October 5 at 2 p.m. and October 15 will post according to schedule. Note: Only Administrative users (those who can manage users and groups within Social) can suspend individual posts or unsuspend multiple posts using bulk actions. Any user who has permission to publish content to the social property can unsuspend individual posts. Suspend All Scheduled Posts for One or More Properties Suspend all posts that are scheduled to be posted to one or more social properties for a specified time range. Only Administrative users (those who can manage users and groups within Social) can suspend posts. You cannot suspend individual posts. The Suspend Posts option is applicable to currently scheduled posts only.you can create and publish new content while other posts are in a suspended state. 1. Click Publish > Content Calendar. 2. Click, then click Suspend Posts to display the Suspend Posts page.

124 Publish Select the start date and time when you want to start suspending posts, then select the end date and time when you want to resume publishing. You can also select a specific time zone from the drop-down list. 4. Select the audience groups, page groups, and social properties for which you want to suspend posts. 5. Click Suspend. Suspended posts display in the Content Calendar with a Suspended Post icon in its title bar. To quickly filter suspended posts in the Content Calendar, access the search, filter, and sort options by clicking above the left navigation rail, then click Suspended Posts and choose an option. For more information, see Display and Filter the Content Calendar.

125 Publish 125 Unsuspend an Individual Post Unsuspend a single post that is currently in a suspended state so that it is posted to its assigned social properties according to schedule. Any user who has permission to publish content to the social property can unsuspend an individual post. You can also unsuspend multiple posts in bulk. Only Administrative users (those who can manage users and groups within Social) can unsuspend multiple posts using bulk actions. For more information, see Unsuspend All Suspended Posts in Bulk. 1. Click Publish > Content Calendar. Suspended posts display in the Content Calendar with a Suspended Post icon in its title bar. 2. Locate and click or tap the desired post to open it in editing mode. To quickly filter suspended posts in the Content Calendar, access the search, filter, and sort options by clicking above the left navigation rail, then click Suspended Posts and choose an option. For more information, see Display and Filter the Content Calendar. 3. Click Unsuspend Post. Unsuspend All Suspended Posts in Bulk Unsuspend all posts that are currently in a suspended state so that they are posted to their assigned social properties according to schedule. Any user who has permission to publish content to the social property can unsuspend an individual post. However, only Administrative users (those who can manage users and groups within Social) can unsuspend multiple posts using bulk actions.

126 Publish Click Publish > Content Calendar. 2. Click, then click Unsuspend Posts. 3. Click Unsuspend to confirm the action. Export Content to Excel Export content from the Content Calendar to an Excel file. The Export to Excel option let you share content with people in your organization that might not have access to Social. This option lets you export all content for the currently selected date range and filters. 1. Click Publish > Content Calendar. 2. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the desired date range. If you select Custom Range, a calendar displays. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjusting the Reporting Date Range. Note that you can upload tweets for only six months at a time. 3. Display and filter the content as desired. For more information, see Display and Filter the Content Calendar. 4. Click, then click Export to Excel. Social runs a task in the background to create the Excel file. When the file is ready, you will receive an message that contains a link to the Excel file. Parent and Child Posts Social lets you create and publish content to multiple social platforms and properties simultaneously. Social uses the concept of parent (master) and child posts in the Content Calendar to accomplish this. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Content Calendar Overview, Content Calendar Working with Posts, and Content Calendar Multi-Platform Posts. Parent and child posts are automatically created whenever you create a post in the Publisher or Content Calendar that is assigned to multiple social platforms or properties. For example, if you created a post in the Publisher that includes one Facebook page, one Twitter account, and one Google+ page, this post displays in Content Calendar as a parent post with three child posts. That is, each social platform has a child post associated with it. As another example, if you create a post in Content Calendar and assign it to three different Facebook pages, one parent post is created with three child posts. Each social property has a child post associated with it. You can identify parent-child posts by the arrow icon ( ) in the timeline in the List View.

127 Publish 127 The image on the left side of each post displays a number indicating how many different platforms or properties are applicable for that post. You can click the icon to expand the post to see a representation of that post for each platform or property (child posts). You can then manage each post individually.

128 Publish 128 The concept of parent-child posts lets you focus on the content first and then distribute that content to multiple platforms. This functionality also provides flexibility for editing multi-platform posts. Note that although all child posts inherit content and settings from the parent post, the parent post itself does not correspond to any social property. The parent post is never published to any social platform. The child posts will be posted on their respective social platforms and properties. Before child posts are published, each post needs to follow an approval process. Each child post follows its own approval process. Each posts needs to be reviewed and approved by an approving manager who owns the corresponding social property or audience before it is published on the social network. If a child post is not approved, it will not publish even if other child posts of the same parent post have been approved and have been published.

129 Publish 129 Edit Parent or Child Posts in Content Calendar While editing a post in Content Calendar that is assigned to multiple social properties, you can edit the parent (master) post, edit the post at the platform level for Twitter, or edit individual child posts. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Content Calendar Overview, Content Calendar Working with Posts, and Content Calendar Multi-Platform Posts. This functionality provides flexibility for editing multi-platform posts.you can edit and customize posts in the following ways: You can edit the parent post and apply changes to all child posts irrespective of the social platform. You can edit posts at the Twitter platform level and apply changes to all child posts for all assigned Twitter accounts. You can edit each child post individually to customize the content for each social property. To edit parent or child posts in Content Calendar 1. Click Publish > Content Calendar. Note: If the rail is not displayed, click. 2. Click next to a parent post to display its child posts.

130 Publish (Conditional) To edit the parent post, click or tap the parent post to open it in editing mode. Editing the parent post helps you quickly make sweeping changes to content and post parameters whenever you have major changes and don't want to edit each post in separately. A parent post can be edited only by users who have permissions for all social properties assigned to the parent post. That is, you need editing permissions for all social properties assigned to the parent post in order to make changes to it. Edit the parent post as desired.

131 Publish 131 To edit post text that applies to all child posts irrespective of the social platform, ensure that the Parent button is selected ( ), then edit the text as desired. For more information, see Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar. For specific information about editing post text, pay particular attention to the Specify the Post Text table row. When you click Save, you are prompted to confirm the action because your changes will override settings in all child posts. 4. (Conditional) To edit post text at the Twitter platform level, click the post text box, then click the Twitter button ( ). This option lets you edit the post text for all assigned Twitter accounts, while not editing the text for other platforms (Facebook, Google+, and so forth). For example, you can add a hashtag to the tweets. For more information, see Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar. For specific information about editing post text, pay particular attention to the Specify the Post Text table row. 5. (Conditional) To edit a child post, click or tap the child post to open it in editing mode. Edit the child post as explained in Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar. When editing child posts, note that you are limited to three editable settings: content, targets, and schedule (including time zone). These settings let you to manage posts being published across time zones to different social properties. Or, you can change the text or the image to reflect local audiences or regional sensitivities without affecting the overall content in the parent post.

132 Publish 132 Publisher Create content and publish it to Facebook, Google+, and LinkedIn pages you manage and to your Twitter accounts. You can publish the content simultaneously to m social platforms. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Post Publishing and Multi-Platform Publishing. Although you can create content and simultaneously publish that content to multiple providers, you can edit the content for Twitter accounts independently to meet specific requirements for that provider. For example, if you create content to publish on Facebook and Twitter, the Facebook post has a limit of 5,000 characters. The tweet has a limit of 140 characters. You can type a long status update for Facebook and then edit the tweet content independently so that it complies with Twitter length regulations or add a hashtag. The Social user interface has been designed to work on desktops, tablets, and mobile devices. Depending on the device you are currently using, the user interface automatically adjusts to provide the optimal user experience. 1. In the left navigation menu, click Publish > Publisher. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. Fill in the fields. For more information, see Publisher Page. 3. Click Save to save the post without publishing it. This option creates a sticky draft that you can use as a template for future posts. For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates. Or Click Schedule to specify a schedule for posting.

133 Publish 133 Publisher Page Configure posts using the options on the Publisher page. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Post Publishing, Multi-Platform Publishing, Publisher Settings, Audience Publishing, and Predictive Publishing. This section contains the following information: Assign Social Properties Assign a Campaign Specify the Post Text Insert an Image Create and Share a Photo Album (Facebook Only) Upload a Video Attach a Custom Link Attach a Facebook App Link (Facebook Only) Upload a Facebook Cover Photo (Facebook Only) Share an Event (Facebook Only) Share a SWF Use Post Predictions (Facebook Only) Attach Tags Specify Targets Schedule Post Assign Social Properties Steps Details 1. Start typing the desired Select the desired targets to which you want to publish content. property, group, or You can quickly select one or more social properties from the small property tiles audience in the Search that display below the Social Properties option. Tiles display for the properties that Properties & Audiences you have most frequently used in the last 30 days. This feature lets you quickly find box, then select one or more items. and publish content to those properties that are most important to you. You can also select one or more targets from the following lists: Or Click to display the Audience Groups: Lets you post content to a specific audience. An audience is a collection of people or fans. For more information, see Facebook Audiences. Social Properties selector. 2. Click one or more social property tiles to select recently used properties. Or Select one or more social properties from the drop-down list: Page Groups: Lets you post content simultaneously to a group of Facebook pages or to a collection of Like nodes on the Facebook Open Graph. This option lets you post to every page or node in that group or collection. A Like node is a virtual collection of anyone who has clicked a Facebook Like button outside of Facebook (for example, on a web page or display advertisement). Using this option, you can further communicate with every Facebook user who has clicked one of your Like buttons. For more information, see Page Groups. Facebook Pages: Lets you post content to the Wall of one or more Facebook pages that you manage.

134 Publish 134 Steps Audience Groups Page Groups Facebook Pages Twitter Accounts Google+ Pages LinkedIn Companies LinkedIn Groups YouTube Sina Weibo You can also use the Search box to locate and select the desired social properties. Details Twitter Accounts: Lets you post content to one or more Twitter accounts that you manage. Google+ Pages: Lets you post content to one or more Google+ pages that you manage. LinkedIn Companies: Lets you post content to one or more LinkedIn company pages that you manage. For more information, see Publishing Posts to LinkedIn Company Pages and Groups. LinkedIn Page Groups: Lets you post content to one or more LinkedIn groups. For more information, see Publishing Posts to LinkedIn Company Pages and Groups. YouTube: Lets you post video assets to YouTube channels that you manage and add videos to playlists. Unlike posts for other social properties (Facebook status updates, and Twitter tweets, for example) YouTube videos exist longer and are relevant for a longer period of time. Sina Weibo: Lets you post content (text and image posts) to one or more Sina Weibo accounts that you manage. Sina Weibo, used primarily in China, is similar to Twitter. Note that at this time, no analytics APIs are available from Sina Weibo. As a result, Social does not offer analytic capabilities for Sina Weibo. As you add social properties, they are listed at the top of the list (below the search filter). To remove a property, click the x on the property's tile. If you create content and assign it to multiple social platforms and properties simultaneously, Social automatically displays a parent (master) post and child posts in the Content Calendar. For conceptual information about parent posts and child posts, see Parent and Child Posts. Note: Depending on the social properties you select, some of the other options might not be available. For example, if you select a Twitter account, the Post Predictions and Target option are not available. Other times, you will receive a notice if an element is not available for a certain property type. For example, if you create a post and select a LinkedIn group and then try to attach an image, a notice displays on the LinkedIn group preview panel informing you that image attachments are not supported for LinkedIn groups. Assign a Campaign Steps 1. Click Campaigns. 2. Select the desired campaign from the drop-down list. Details A campaign is a marketing effort used to bring visitors to a specific website. For example, if a campaign advertises a specific credit card, the campaign could be a series of creative elements (links, Flash Multimedia posts, tweets, and so forth) advertising the card's interest rate and benefits. The campaign's tracking code on each creative element lets you track the effectiveness of the campaign by letting you know which link a user clicked to come to your website.

135 Publish 135 Steps You can also use the Search box to locate and select the desired campaign. Details You can specify a default campaign to streamline publishing and governance. For more information, see Campaigns. Specify the Post Text Steps 1. Type the text in the text box, including URLs (if desired). Details The Social Publisher lets you simultaneously specify text for multiple social properties (Facebook pages, Twitter accounts, Google+ pages, LinkedIn company pages and groups, YouTube channels, and Sina Weibo accounts). As you type text for your post, you can see how the Social UI accommodates posting from different device types. If you are working on a desktop device, notice that the preview panes in the third column update to show you what the published post will look like on each property. If you are working on a tablet or other mobile device, notice that a Preview button displays that lets you view the preview panes. For Facebook, Google+, LinkedIn company pages and groups, and YouTube videos, you can type as many as 5,000 characters. For Twitter, you can type as many as 140 characters. For Sina Wiebo, you can type as many as 140 double-byte characters or 280 single-byte characters. As you type text, the number of available characters remaining displays below the text box. Note that this number reflects the most restrictive character limit, depending on which social properties you selected. For example, if you selected only Facebook and Google+ properties, the character limit displays 5,000. If you selected one or more Twitter accounts, the character limit displays 140. If your text exceeds the character limit for Twitter, you can edit the text in the Twitter preview panel while allowing more text in the Facebook and Google+ preview panels. This functionality lets you create and publish content appropriate to each property. Note that for Twitter posts, there is an auto-complete functionality that automatically fills in users' Twitter handles and hashtags as you begin typing sign and a Twitter handle or the # sign. You can continue typing the handle or hashtag or you can select it from the list that displays. Social uses all of the Twitter handles that you have mentioned or followed during the last 60 days and the hashtags you have mentioned in the last 60 days as a basis for the auto-complete functionality. You can click the Text Direction icon to change the text direction. Clicking this icon toggles between left-to-right text and right-to-left text. If you include one or more inline links in a post, you can shorten them using your configured link shorteners. You must shorten all links if you want to track the post by campaigns. For detailed information about shortening links, see Generate Short URLs in Posts. The default link shortener is ctx.ly. If you add additional link shorteners, they displays as well.

136 Publish 136 Insert an Image Steps 1. Click, click Upload a Photo, then specify the image's URL to upload the image from the web. Click Browse Local Drive, then browse to and select the image from your computer. Details Photos and images get a much higher click-through rate than regular status updates. The Social Publisher makes it easy to publish images. For Facebook, these posts will appear on your Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds. For Google+, these posts will appear on your Google+ pages and on your fans' individual Streams. For Twitter, these posts will appear in your fans' Twitter feeds. For LinkedIn company pages, these posts will appear on your page and in users' individual feeds. Image attachments are not supported for LinkedIn groups. Image formats should be.jpg,.gif, or.png. The image size should be no larger than 2 MB. Create and Share a Photo Album (Facebook Only) Steps 1. Click, click Create/Share Photo Album, then specify the album's name. 2. Click Add Photos, then browse to and select multiple images. 3. Specify the caption for each image. 4. To specify the album's cover image, click the image, then select Set as Album Cover. Details Photo Albums apply to Facebook only. To remove an image from the album, click the desired image, then select Remove Image. Note: There are important differences with photo album posts whether or not you use the Post Audience feature (described below) to target your audience. Non-Targeted Album Posts: If you do not target your albums using the Target feature, post analytics are not available. Non-targeted photo album posts do not display in the Post Analytics report. Non-targeted photo album posts display with images in users' Newsfeeds, with the image you specified as its cover at the top, as shown below: Targeted Album Posts: If you target your albums using the Target feature, post analytics are available. Photo album posts display in the Post Analytics report. Because of Facebook limitations, targeted photo album posts do not display with the images in users' Newsfeed as with non-targeted posts. After you select targeting options, a message displays informing you that the appearance of the post on users'

137 Publish 137 Steps Details Newsfeeds changes when shared with a targeted audience. The photo album displays as a Small Image post on users' Newsfeeds, as shown below. Users can click the image to display all photos in the album. Upload a Video Steps 1. Click, click Upload Video. 2. Specify the video's title. 3. Click Upload Video to browse to and select the video file. Details The Social Publisher makes it easy to publish videos. For Facebook, these posts appear on your Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds. For Google+, these posts appear on your Google+ pages and on your fans' individual Streams. For Twitter, these posts appear in your fans' Twitter feeds. For YouTube, these videos appear in your YouTube channels. You cannot use audience groups and targeting with videos. YouTube Notes: For more information, see Publish a YouTube Video. Facebook Notes: The Social Publisher posts videos with native Facebook playback. Users' must enable Video in order for the video story to display. To do this, users must add video permission inside Facebook (Account Settings > Apps > Video > Edit Settings > Publish Content to My Wall). Facebook limits the functionality available with video posts: You cannot geo-target a post with a video attachment. You cannot customize an action link name for the video. Because of a Facebook limitation, Facebook video titles with non-ascii characters are truncated and garbled after being published. Social supports a few methods of video publishing. You can choose to use the Publisher and upload a video as described here or you can publish videos as stream apps: embedded or just add a YouTube URL. Attach a Custom Link Steps 1. Click. 2. From the Select Link Type drop-down list, select Custom Link. Details Post a link on Facebook and Google+ pages that you manage and to Twitter accounts and LinkedIn groups to direct fans to a specific URL or web page. For Facebook, these posts will appear on your Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds. For Google+, these posts will appear on your Google+ pages and on your fans' individual

138 Publish 138 Steps 3. Specify the link's URL (ensure that your include then click. Notice that Social automatically pulls thumbnail images from the link. 4. Use the left and right arrows to change the image. Or Details Streams. For Twitter, these posts will appear in your fans' Twitter feeds. For LinkedIn groups, these posts will appear in your members' individual feeds. A link is the best way to share content. Social makes link tracking and analytics easy by automatically shortening URLs using our custom cxt.ly short URL service and by tracking the Click-Throughs. Twitter does not support actionable links. If you selected one or more Twitter accounts for the post, select Attach as an Inline Link for Twitter, if desired. Select Upload, then specify an image's URL or click Browse to locate and select an image from your computer. Attach a Facebook App Link (Facebook Only) Steps 1. Click. 2. From the Select Link Type drop-down list, select Facebook App Links. 3. From the Select Application drop-down list, select the desired application. 4. From the Select Facebook Page for App drop-down list, the location where the application currently resides. This could be another Facebook page or a website where you previously published the application. 5. Under Link Thumbnail, select From URL or Upload. Details Post a link on Facebook and Google+ pages, LinkedIn groups, and to Twitter accounts to direct fans to a specific application created in Social. For Facebook, these posts will appear on your Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds. For Google+, these posts will appear on your Google+ pages and on your fans' individual Streams. For Twitter, these posts will appear in your fans' Twitter feeds. For LinkedIn groups, these posts will appear in your members' individual feeds. A link is the best way to share content. Social makes link tracking and analytics easy by automatically shortening URLs using our custom cxt.ly short URL service and by tracking the Click-Throughs. Twitter does not support actionable links. If you selected one or more Twitter accounts for the post, select Attach as an Inline Link for Twitter, if desired.

139 Publish 139 Steps Details If you select From URL, the image you chose when publishing the application is used. Or, you can select Upload, then specify an image's URL or click Browse to locate and select an image from your computer. 6. In the Link Title box, specify the action link name that appears to the right of the image on the post. 7. In the Link Description box, specify the description that appears to the right of the image on the post. To see where the Link Title and Link Description display in posts, see the post preview panel for each property. Upload a Facebook Cover Photo (Facebook Only) Steps Details 1. Click, then click Upload Facebook Cover Photo. 2. Specify the image's URL to upload the image from the web. Or Click Browse, then browse to and select the image from your computer. Post or update a cover photo on Facebook pages that you manage. You can post the cover photo immediately or according to schedule. Image formats should be.jpg,.gif, or.png. For best results, the image should be 851 x 315 pixels. Facebook cover photos cannot be posted to audiences using pre-defined targeting. No analytic information is available for Facebook cover photos.

140 Publish 140 Share an Event (Facebook Only) Steps 1. Click, then click Share an Event. 2. Select the desired page from which to share the event. 3. Select to not display an event image by clicking None. Details Post an event on Facebook pages that you manage. These posts appear on your Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds to inform fans about upcoming events or to organize social gatherings. Or Click Upload to browse to and select the image file. Or Specify the image's URL to upload it from the web. Share a SWF Steps 1. Click, then click Share a SWF. 2. Specify the SWF media's URL (ensure that you include 3. Specify the SWF media's thumbnail URL. Or Details The Action Link Name disguises the SWF element in the post. This is the name of the link that people or fans will click in the post to access the content. Specify the text that will display. The text can contain as many as 10,000 characters. Notice the character counter at the bottom of the text box. Click Browse to browse to and select the image's file. 4. Specify the Action Link URL. 5. Specify the Action Link name/description. 6. Specify the Action Link description.

141 Publish 141 Use Post Predictions (Facebook Only) Steps No user interaction required. Click the header in the Post Predictions panel to display bar charts that contain more detailed information about the estimated number of Likes, Comments, and Shares. Details The Post Predictions feature dynamically predicts the performance of your Facebook posts before they are posted. This feature does not apply to Google+, Twitter, or LinkedIn posts. As you adjust Facebook post text, content, or the schedule, the Post Predictions section updates automatically to display predictions of the number of Likes, Comments, and Shares the post will likely obtain after posting. This information helps you improve the post's content and to schedule the post at the optimal time to get maximum engagement. Adobe Social builds a predictive model based on past posts for each Facebook page. The predictive model uses advanced Natural Language Processing and Machine Learning algorithms to study the historical data on your Facebook pages (even if the content was not published using Social). Your Facebook page must have a sufficient number of posts in order for Social to build the model. If the page does not have enough posts, Social builds the model at the account level and includes posts in all pages in the account. Social uses a proprietary method to examine historical posts that are similar, both in terms of content and engagement. The accuracy of the predictive model improves as more content is posted to the page. If your page (or pages in your account) do not have enough posts for Social to create the model, the predictions do not display. Note: You can enable or disable post predictions at the user level for all available Facebook pages in the current report suite. You can also enable or disable this feature on the Facebook-page level for all users in your Social implementation. For more information, see Enable or Disable Post Predictions. Post Predictions is available initially for Facebook posts in English only. Attach Tags Steps 1. Click Tags. 2. Type the text for the tag. Or Select the desired tag from the drop-down list. Details Information you type in the Tags box is not viewable outside of the Social product. Facebook fans and Twitter followers, for example, cannot see this information. Other Social users in your organization can see this information when they view pending posts. You can use tags to categorize this post. Tags are not sent to SAINT or to Adobe Analytics.

142 Publish 142 Specify Targets Steps Details 1. Click Targets. 2. Click the desired social property, then specify the desired targeting options. Facebook The following options are available for Facebook: Estimated Reach: (Facebook Only. No user interaction required.) Social estimates the number of Facebook users who will be reached by this post's targeting settings. As you configure the various targeting settings, such as geo, gender, or age, the reach estimate automatically updates. Geo: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target countries. You can then choose to post the content to everywhere in that country or to a specific state or city. Languages: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target languages. The content is posted only to fans in the selected geographic location who speak the specified language. Language is based on what fans specify as their language on their Facebook profiles.you can target by language without using location targeting. The post displays in users' News Feeds based on Facebook's location algorithm, which takes into account their IP address, network, and current city. Languages spoken are also taken into account. If a location is not listed in Adobe Social, but it exists in Facebook, contact your Account Manager and we can add it to the list. Age: Use the age pointers to specify the target age range. Be aware that Facebook does not permit certain types of advertising to minors. For example, you cannot advertise alcoholic beverages to people in the year-old range. Gender: Select All, Male, or Female. Education Level: Select All, In High School, In College, or College Alumni. If you choose In College, or College Alumni, the following options are available: College: Specify one or more target colleges. College Major: Specify one or more college majors. Relationship Status: Select one or more relationship statuses: Single, In Relationship, Married, Engaged, or Not Specified. Interested In: Select All, Male, or Female. Workplace: Select one or more target workplaces. When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target. Note: If you apply demographic targeting to a Facebook post, that post displays in the Newsfeeds only of users meeting the selected demographic criteria. However, it is normal Facebook behavior for that same posts to appear on your brand's Facebook page. This behavior is true for demographic-targets posts, but not for geo-targeted posts. If you do not want demographic-targeted posts to appear on your brand's Facebook page, you can hide them. For more

143 Publish 143 Steps Details information, see How Do I Control Who See's my Page's Posts in the Facebook Help Center. Twitter The following options are available for Twitter: Country: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target countries. The content is posted only to users in the selected countries. When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target. Note: For location-based targeting, a user's location is generated from a variety of signals, including mobile location. If a user moves from one geo location to another, it might take several days and several actions for that user's location to change. For example, suppose a user travels from the United States to Germany. Based solely on IP-location information, it might take several days for the location to change. However, if that user performs several actions, such as tweeting with his or her current location (Germany) from a mobile device, the location changes quicker. Google+ The following options are available for Google+: Following, Customers, VIPs, Team Members, Your Circles, Extended Circles, and Public. Select the desired circle. Circles let you share posts with different groups of people. For example, you can create a group for family members, a group for co-workers, a group for college friends, and so forth.when you post in a specific circle, the post shows in the stream only for those people in that circle. Google includes four default circles for each page: Following Customers VIPs Team Members These default circles can be edited or removed by the page administrator. Social includes three default circles for each page: Your Circles (followers you have added to your circles) Extended Circles (followers or followers in your circles) Public (anyone can see the post) You can target multiple circles in one post. Each circle has a maximum number or 5,000 followers at this time due to Google limitations.

144 Publish 144 Steps Details When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target. LinkedIn Include: From the drop-down list, select Employees and Non-Employees or Non-Employees Only. Company Size: From the drop-down list, choose Self Employed or the desired company size number ranges.you must target at least 100 employees and you can select a maximum of ten size ranges. Industry: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target industries. The content is posted only to users in the selected industries.you can select up to ten industries. Job Function: From the drop-down list, choose one or more job functions. The content is posted only to users in the selected functions. You can select up to ten functions. Seniority: From the drop-down list, choose one or more seniority levels. The content is posted only to users with the selected level. You can select up to ten levels. Geography: From the drop-down list, choose one or more geographic locations. The content is posted only to users in the selected locations. You can select up to ten locations. When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target. Schedule Post Steps Details 1. Specify the desired date, time, and time zone when you want to post the content, then click Schedule. Or Click > Set Recommended Time to use the recommended date and time for optimal performance. Or Select Post Immediately to post the content now. The default behavior of the scheduler is to post the content later according to schedule rather than immediately. Posts can be scheduled at one-minute intervals. The date and time cannot be in the past. You can schedule a post up to one year in advance. You can schedule an unlimited number of posts. You can edit or cancel scheduled posts, as desired. For more information about the predictive capabilities of Social, see the Post Predictions row above.

145 Publish 145 Publish a YouTube Video Publish a YouTube video using the Content Calendar or Publisher. You can configure its settings and then post the video immediately or according to schedule. 1. To post the video using the Publisher, click Publish > Publisher. Or To post the video using the Content Calendar, click Publish > Content Calendar >. The screens in this topic were captured from the Publisher, but the steps for publishing a video on YouTube using the Content Calendar are the same. 2. From the Social Properties drop-down list, select one or more YouTube channels. 3. From the Campaigns drop-down list, select the desired campaigns for the video. For more information, see Campaigns. 4. Specify the description that displays with the video on YouTube after publishing. 5. Click, then click Upload Video. 6. Specify the video file's URL, then press Enter. Or Click Browse to browse to and select the video file. 7. On the Basic Info tab, fill in the fields:

146 Publish 146 Title: Specify the title that displays with the video on YouTube after publishing. Description: The text you specified in Step 4 is the description that displays with the video on YouTube after publishing. Edit the text if necessary. Tags: Specify the desired YouTube search tags. Note that there are two different Tags fields. One field is for tags internal to Social. The second field is for tags internal to YouTube and used when users search for your video. Privacy Settings: Select the desired level of privacy: Public: Any YouTube user can search for and view the video on YouTube. Unlisted: Any YouTube user who has the video's URL can view the video on YouTube. Private: Only you can view the video on YouTube. Video Thumbnail: Select From Video to use a thumbnail using the video or select Upload to browse to and select another thumbnail. Category: Select the YouTube category for the video. Categories include, People & Blogs, Comedy, Music, Sports, Travel, and more. 8. On the Advanced Settings tab, fill in the fields:

147 Publish 147 Allow Comments: Select the check box if you want to allow YouTube users to comment on your video. You can allow all comments (without your approval) or you can allow only comments that you have approved. User Can Vote on Comments: Select the check box if you want to allow users to vote on comments. Allow Embedding: Select this option if you want users to be able to embed your video on other websites. If this option is enabled, users can copy and paste a provided URL into the other website to embed the video. If you do not select this option, users must watch the video on YouTube. Licence and Ownership: Select the desired option: Standard: The YouTube Terms of Service specify your legal rights and ownership of the video. For more information, see Terms of Service on the YouTube website. Creative Commons: Creative Commons licenses provide a standard way for content creators to grant someone else permission to use their work. If you select this option, this video is accessible to YouTube users for use, even commercially, in their own videos via the YouTube video editor. 9. Specify tags internal to social, if desired. Information you type in the Tags box is not viewable outside of the Social product. YouTube visitors cannot see this information. Other Social users in your organization can see this information when they view pending posts. You can use tags to categorize this post. Tags are not sent to SAINT or to Adobe Analytics. 10. Click Schedule, then click Now to post the video immediately or click Later to post the video according to schedule. If you select Later, use the Date, Time, and Time Zone options to specify when you want to post the content. The date and time cannot be in the past. You can schedule a post up to one year in advance.

148 Publish 148 Note that if you schedule a YouTube video to be posted at a later scheduled time, the video is uploaded to YouTube in private mode a few hours before the scheduled time so that it is ready to be publicly published. Enable or Disable Post Predictions Individual Social users can enable or disable post predictions for all Facebook pages to which he or she can post. Or, a user listed as an owner of a Facebook page can enable or disable post predictions at the individual Facebook-page level for all Social users. The Post Predictions feature dynamically predicts the performance of your Facebook posts before they are posted. This feature does not apply to Google+, Twitter, or LinkedIn posts. For more information, see Post Predictions in Publisher Page. Training Video: To view a short video explaining how to enable or disable post predictions, see Social 3.2 Publisher and Content Calendar Enhancements. To enable or disable the Post Predictions feature at the user level Note: Before a user can disable this feature, an admin user must have already enabled Post Predictions for that Facebook page. Furthermore, if a user disables Post Predictions at the user level, other Social users who can post to that page are not affected by this user's action. Each user can enable or disable Post Predictions, as desired. 1. Access the Publisher by clicking Publish > Publisher. 2. Click to display the Post Predictions settings. 3. Enable or disable post predictions by sliding the Enable Post Predictions toggle on or off. To enable or disable the Post Predictions feature at the individual Facebook-page level or all Social users 1. Click Settings > Facebook Pages. 2. Toggle the Prediction toggle on or off, as desired. For more information, see Configure Facebook Page Settings.

149 Publish 149 Configure Link Shortening Preferences Configure link-shortening preferences, including enabling or disabling automatic link shortening in the Publisher and selecting a default shortener to use for all links. Note: Training Video: To view a short video explaining how to configure link shortening preferences, see Social 3.2 Link Shortening Enhancements. Before a user can configure link shortening preferences, an admin user must have already added link shorteners to Social. Furthermore, the settings explained in this section are configured at the user level, other Social users are not affected by this user's action. Each user can enable or disable automatic link shortening and select a default shortener, as desired. 1. Access the Publisher by clicking Publish > Publisher. 2. Click Publisher Settings at the top right corner of the Publisher. 3. Enable or disable automatic link shortening by sliding the Auto-Shortening toggle on or off. 4. Select the link shortener that you want to set as the default shortener. All inline links will be automatically shortened using the default shortener.

150 Applications 150 Applications Create and manage applications that you can post on Facebook pages that you manage. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Apps Overview, App Builder Basics Pt. 1, App Builder Basics Pt. 2, App Builder Advanced, App Audiences, and App Publishing. Note: We recommend that you request a new Facebook application early in the application-building process. When you create a new page application in Adobe Social, that application exists only in Social, not in Facebook. Before you can publish an application to Facebook, your Adobe Account Manager must manually create an application in Facebook. After the application is created in Facebook, you can then associate the application created in Social with the application in Facebook. For more information, see Request a New Facebook Application. Display and Filter Applications Display your Facebook page applications and filter or sort them by different criteria for easier access. 1. Click Applications > Apps Overview to display the Applications page. Note: If the rail is not displayed, click.

151 Applications 151 If you create and manage many applications, your application list can extend to multiple pages. Each application is represented by a tile on the Applications page. Each tile lets you view statistics for that application and manage its setting and status. Eight application tiles display on each page. If you have more than eight applications, a page control displays in the upper-right side that lets you click each page, click Next, or click Last. 2. Access the search, filter, and sort options by clicking above the left navigation rail. 3. To search for an application by name, in the Search by Name field, type all or part of the application's name. 4. To filter the list by selected criteria, select one or more of the following options from the Filter options.

152 Applications 152 Note: You can select multiple filtering options. If you select multiple options, only those applications that meet all selected criteria display in the list. Only Show Deactivated Apps: Select to display applications that are no longer active on Facebook pages and no longer display on the Applications page unless you select this option. See Deactivate a Page Application. Only Show Published Apps: Select to display active applications that have been published on at least one Facebook page. See Publish a Page Application. All Edited Dates: From the drop-down list, select the time range to filter applications. For example, if you select Last Month, all applications that were edited during the last month display. See Edit a Page Application. All Owners: From the drop-down list, select the application owner. You can select All Owners, a user group, or an individual user. For example, if you select Administrators (Group), all applications that are owned by users in the Administrators group display. You can see only user groups to which you belong. You specify the owner when you create the application. See Create a Page Application. All Creators: From the drop-down list, select the user who originally created the application. All Publish Dates: From the drop-down list, select the time range to filter applications. For example, if you select Last Week, all applications that were published during the last week display. 5. To sort the displayed results, from the Sort By drop-down list, select App Name (from a to z), Publish Date (oldest to newest), or Edit Date (oldest to newest). 6. To display another page of applications, click a specific page number, Next, or Last. If the application has been previously published to a Facebook page, a page icon displays at the bottom of its tile. Click the icon to open the Facebook page to which the application has been published. If you are using a mobile device, the URL redirects to a mobile-friendly URL.

153 Applications 153 By clicking on each application tile, you can perform actions on that specific application. For example, you can edit, publish, unpublish, deactivate, clone, or rename the application. Using the Application Builder Understand the various pages and tabs used in the Application Builder. These tabs let you create page applications and specify application preferences. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Apps Overview, App Publishing, and App Builder Basics Pt. 2. Note: The Application Builder is not available for use on mobile devices. Please use a desktop or laptop computer to build applications. For instructions on accessing the Application Builder, see Create a Page Application. The Application Builder header contains two tabs: Design and Preferences (unless you are viewing a Contest application). When you click a tab, several subtabs display. Design Understand the various tabs used in the Application Builder to create page applications. The following illustration shows the Design view of the Application Builder: The Design view of the Application Builder contains pages that you access by clicking the subtabs along the top of the window: Template View, Screen View, and Artboard View.

154 Applications 154 To begin building an application, drag-and-drop the desired template from the App Templates pane into the drop box. For more information, see Create a Page Application. Template View The Template View page lets you select an available template and specify template-level settings. Open the Template View by clicking the Template View subtab. The Template View has three subtabs: Elements, Format, and Settings. Elements Subtab: Click the Elements subtab to drag-and-drop an application template into the box to the right, as described in the interface and in Create a Page Application. Format Subtab: Click the Format tab to change the name of the selected template. This tab is more useful when accessed from the Artboard View. Settings Subtab: Click the Settings subtab to specify template-level settings. These settings include specifying a different initial screen for non-fans, specifying submission restrictions (maximum number of entries during a given period), and requiring users to like your Facebook page before using the application. The options on the Settings subtab vary depending on the selected template.

155 Applications 155 Screen View The Screen View page lets you see each screen in your application and add new (blank) screens to your application. Open the Screen View by clicking the Screen View subtab or by double-clicking the application template on the right side. The Screen View has three subtabs: Elements, Format, and Settings. However, from the Screen View, you will use the Elements subtab most frequently. Elements Subtab: Use the Elements subtab to drag-and-drop a new, blank screen onto the Screen view. Note that you cannot drag-and-drop the blank page into a new position. The order in which the screens display in the published application is dictated by the settings you specify in the Navigation Target settings for a button on the screen (Next or Submit, for example).

156 Applications 156 Artboard View The Artboard View page lets you drag-and-drop elements onto the individual screens in your application, format individual elements, and configure each element's settings.you can also use the Artboard View as a built-in preview to see how your finished application will look. Open the Artboard View by selecting an individual screen and then clicking the Artboard View subtab or you can double-click the desired screen. The Artboard View has three subtabs: Elements, Format, and Settings. Note: It is important to note that the options available on the Format and Settings subtabs vary depending on your active selection. For example, if you select a Text Field element, the settings on both tabs are different than if you selected a Radio Button Group element. Additionally, the options available on both tabs vary depending on whether your active selection is the Radio Button Group element's title or one of the individual button options. Elements Subtab: Use the Elements subtab to drag-and-drop elements onto the Artboard. The available element groupings vary depending on the template. For example, you can click Basic Elements or Form Elements to see the available elements. For more information, see Add and Configure Elements.

157 Applications 157 Format Subtab: Use the Format subtab to format individual elements. To format each element, select it on the Artboard. See Format Elements. Settings Subtab: Use the Settings subtab to specify settings for individual elements.

158 Applications 158 Preferences The Preferences tab at the top of the Application Builder lets you configure application settings. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Builder Advanced. App Audiences Enable the use of App Audiences on an application. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Audiences and App Builder Advanced. Note: Before you can use the App Audiences feature, Adobe must enable this functionality for your account. For more information, see Manage Audiences. After you enable this feature, you can create one application with multiple audience combinations using the App Audiences feature in the Application Builder. App Audiences can be assigned to each element within the application to target different versions of the same application to different viewers. For example, if you have a logo specific to the United Kingdom, you can add the logo to a screen in your application, then assign an App Audience to that image element so that only users in the United Kingdom see the logo. Application users in other locations will see everything on the application screen except for that logo. Or, you could configure a text element to display "Bienvenue!" to viewers who have French set as their Facebook language setting. All other users will see "Welcome!" instead. To enable App Audiences on an application 1. While creating an application, click Preferences at the top of the Application Builder window.

159 Applications Click the App Audiences tab. 3. Click Yes under Use App Audiences. 4. From the Locale drop-down list, select the desired locale. 5. In the Add Audience field, start typing the desired audience name, then click the name to select it. Add additional audiences, if desired. 6. Select the default audience by selecting the radio button in the Select Default column. The default audience targets users who don't match any audience. 7. Specify the priority order of audiences by dragging and dropping the audiences into the desired order. The matching priority goes from top to bottom. 8. Click Save. For more detailed information about App Audiences, see Manage Audiences. This topic includes the following information: Contacting Adobe to enable the App Audiences permission Creating and configuring App Audiences Assigning App Audiences to elements within an application App Settings Specify the canvas width of your application. You can also specify the application's site title, site name, icon, ad description. This information displays on users' timelines when Facebook users like or comment on your application. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Builder Advanced. Note: The settings you configure on this page correspond to the settings for the Set Custom URL option in Comments Element and Like Button Element. 1. While creating an application, click Preferences at the top of the Application Builder window. 2. Click the App Settings tab. Fill in the fields: Canvas Width: From the drop-down list, select the desired width for your application: (the default) Use Mobile Layout: Enable this setting to create two versions of the same application. One version displays appropriately on devices with larger screens, such as desktop or tablets. The second version displays appropriately on devices with smaller screens, such as smart phones. The two versions of the same application use different assets (buttons and images, for example) for display on different devices. For more information, see Mobile Device Considerations. Title: Specify the title you want to display when Facebook users like or comment on your application. Icon: Drop the image into the box that you want to display when Facebook users like or comment on your application. Site Name: Specify the name you want to display when Facebook users like or comment on your application. Description: Specify the description you want to display when Facebook users like or comment on your application. The following example shows where this information displays in posts on users' timelines:

160 Applications Click Save to periodically save your work in the Application Builder while creating a page application. Or, while editing an active application, save changes without propagating them to an active application that has been published to one or more Facebook pages. Or Click Update to propagate editing changes you have made to a page application since it was last published to one or more Facebook pages. Or Click Publish to publish a page application to one or more Facebook pages or websites. Advanced Settings Include external JavaScript or CSS style sheets in your page applications. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Builder Advanced. Note: This functionality is intended for advanced users who want to call external JavaScript functions within an application or apply CSS style sheets to an entire application. Please use at your own risk. Be aware that modifying advanced settings can negatively impact your application. Any Javascript or CSS functionality included in page applications is not supported by our platform and cannot be troubleshot by our platform team. We recommend rigorously testing your applications when using JavaScript or CSS functionality. 1. While creating an application, click Preferences at the top of the Application Builder window. 2. Click the Advanced Settings tab. 3. Click to display the External Resources options.

161 Applications In the URL field, specify the URL for the external resource. 5. From the Type drop-down list, select Javascript or Stylesheet. 6. (Optional) Click Add to include additional resources. 7. Click Save to periodically save your work in the Application Builder while creating a page application. Or, while editing an active application, save changes without propagating them to an active application that has been published to one or more Facebook pages. Or Click Update to propagate editing changes you have made to a page application since it was last published to one or more Facebook pages. Or Click Publish to publish a page application to one or more Facebook pages or websites. Analytics Settings Use the Analytics Settings page to enable collection of application data by Adobe Analytics. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Builder Advanced. Only Analytics administrators can configure Analytics Settings in the Social Application Builder. The Analytics administrator must first obtain the necessary information from Adobe Analytics. The administrator then enters this information on the Analytics Settings page in Social. 1. While creating an application, click Preferences at the top of the Application Builder window. 2. Click the Analytics Settings tab. Fill in the fields using information obtained from your Adobe Account Manager or your Adobe Analytics administrator. This information can be found in your company's s_code.js file. Login Company: Specify the desired Analytics login company. Report Suite ID: Specify the desired report suite ID. A report suite is a data store that many Adobe products in the Marketing Cloud use to aggregate and report data. Server ID: Specify the appropriate server.

162 Applications 162 Page views display in Adobe Analytics as App Name:App Template Name:Screen Name. Make sure all screens are uniquely named. App Scheduling Automatically swap an application's templates according to a predefined schedule. For example, suppose you want to create an application that contains three templates: a mashup template to announce an upcoming sweepstakes, the actual sweepstakes template, and another mashup template to announce the completion of the sweepstakes. After you publish the application, the App Scheduling feature lets you schedule the date and time when the second template's screen displays to users and when it will be replaced by the third template's screen. This feature automates the process so you don't need to create three separate applications and then manually publish and unpublish them at the appropriate times. In this scenario, complete the following steps: 1. Create and configure an application that contains three templates: Mashup1, Sweepstakes, and Mashup2. The Mashup1 template's screen contains text and creative elements to announce the sweepstakes and help build excitement. The Sweepstakes template's various screens contain the actual sweepstakes text and creative elements. The Mashup2 template's screen announces the closing of the sweepstakes and thanks users for participating. For more information, see Create a Page Application. 2. Click the Preferences tab, then click App Scheduling.

163 Applications Click Add, select the Sweepstakes template from the Next Flow drop-down list, then specify the date and time when the Mashup template's screen will be replaced with the Sweepstakes template's screen. Note that the time settings reflect the time zone specified on the computer used to configure the application. The Mashup1 template is the "index" template and is the first template to be displayed when you publish the application. 4. Click Add, select the Mashup2 template from the Next Flow drop-down list, then specify the date and time when the Sweepstakes template's screen will be replaced with the Mashup2 template's screen. 5. Publish the application. For more information, see Publish a Page Application. After the application is published and the first template has been switched to the second template, the first template is greyed out to let you know that the switch was made. Create a Page Application Create page applications to engage with fans and Facebook users. You can use templates to create contests, coupons, forms, mashups, polls, sweepstakes, Twitter applications, and more. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Apps Overview, App Publishing, App Builder Basics Pt. 1, and App Builder Basics Pt. 2. Note: The Application Builder is not available for use on mobile devices. Please use a desktop or laptop computer to build applications. 1. Click Applications > Apps Overview. 2. Click Create New App to display the Build a New App window.

164 Applications Specify a name for the application. A descriptive name becomes very useful if you create numerous applications. The name will help you locate applications faster for editing, publishing, and so forth. 4. From the Owner drop-down list, select the desired owner of the application. You can select an individual user or a user group. If you select a user group, any member of that user group can edit, publish, unpublish, or deactivate the application. User groups let you share responsibility for the application with others in your organization. For example, a member of your creative team can create the application and a member of your social media team can then review and publish the application. 5. Review the information in the two Facebook links, then select the check box to indicate that you agree with the terms imposed by Facebook. 6. Click Create to open the Application Builder.

165 Applications 165 For detailed information, see Using the Application Builder. 7. From the Template View > Elements subtab, drag-and-drop the desired template into the drop box: Contest: Create a contest application to drive fan growth and engagement. You can use a contest application, for example, to conduct a photo contest where people submit a favorite picture and vote to determine a winner. The contest application is a scrollable feed that can easily be filtered and sorted based on the settings the app designer implements. Each individual entry can be accessed with more detail by clicking the magnifying glass of the entry and opening up the entry pop-up screen that has a consistent design across all entries. This gallery is mobile friendly and responsive with regards to the number of columns it adds to the screen, based on screen width. The Contest template has seven default screens: Start, Submit Entry, Confirm Submit Entry, Gallery Screen, Error Message Popup, Rules Popup, and Entry Popup Screen. The Start screen lets you welcome users to the contest. The Submit Entry screen lets users provide information about their photo and upload the photo. The Confirm Submit Entry screen displays after users submit the entry. The Gallery screen is a scrollable feed that lets users view entry submissions and vote on their favorites, like individual entries, and share individual entries. You can restrict the number of votes each user can submit (see Vote Button). The Error Message Popup screen displays as a pop-up window if users do not specify required information. The Rules Popup screen lets users display a pop-up window that contains the rules for the contest. The Entry Popup Screen lets you design the screen that displays after users vote for an entry. You can edit the size of the popup screen. Deselect any element, click the Format subtab, then adjust the height and width (in pixels). The width should never be wider than 810 pixels and the height should never to more than the average monitor size. Unless you have a specific design rationale, you should keep the screen size at the default settings. You can add or remove screens, as necessary. Note: Your Adobe account representative must enable the contest functionality in Adobe Social. In addition, you must grant Social users permissions to create and manage contest applications. For more

166 Applications 166 information about these tasks, as well as the general workflow of creating and managing a contest, see Contest Workflow. Coupon: Create a coupon application that makes it easy for you to give away a specified number of coupons to members of your Facebook community. The Coupon template has six default screens: Start, Form, Success, Fail Coupon, Error Message Popup, and Rules Popup. The Start screen is the first screen users will see when they access the application from Facebook. The Form screen lets users submit information, such as name and address. The Success screen displays the actual coupon and lets users print the coupon. The Fail Coupon screen informs users that there are no more coupons available if you chose to limit the number of coupons that you want to distribute. The Error Message screen displays as a pop-up window if users do not specify required information. The Rules Popup screen lets users display a pop-up window that contains the rules for using the coupon. You can add or remove screens, as necessary. Form: Create a form application to collect user information. You can use a form application, for example, to sign people up for a mailing list or to receive a newsletter. The Form template has three default screens: Form, Confirmation Screen, and Error Message Popup. The Form screen lets users submit information, such as name and address. The Confirmation screen displays after users submit the form. The Error Message Popup screen displays as a pop-up window if users do not specify required information. You can add or remove screens, as necessary. Gallery: Create a gallery to showcase images or videos. The Gallery template has one default screen. You can link a Gallery template to other application templates for additional functionality. You can also add screens, as necessary. Mashup: Create a mashup application to conduct a poll or to collect addresses for a newsletter or to receive special offers. A mashup is a generic, single-screen application, although you can add additional screens. The Mashup template has two default screens: the mashup screen anderror Message Popup. The default screen is completely empty. The Error Message Popup screen displays as a pop-up window if users do not specify required information. You can add and format elements as desired. Poll: Create a poll to collect users' answers to questions. The Poll template has one default screen. The default screen is pre-populated with a Like Button element, a Text element for header text, and a Poll element. While configuring the Poll element, you can configure the Prompt Share Story option to obtain viral results for the poll. You can add screens, as necessary. Sweepstakes: Create a sweepstakes application to drive fan growth and engagement. The Sweepstakes template has five default screens: Start, Form, Confirmation, Rules Popup, and Error Message Popup. The confirmation screen displays after users submit the form. The error message screen displays as a pop-up window if users do not specify required information. You can add or remove screens, as necessary. All five default screens are pre-populated with commonly used elements, such as buttons and text fields. You can add, delete, and format elements as desired. Twitter: Create a Twitter application to display a Twitter feed from within your application. The Twitter template has two default screens: Twitter anderror Message Popup. The Error Message Popup screen displays as a pop-up window if something goes wrong with the feed or if users can't reply, retweet,

167 Applications 167 favorite, or follow the Twitter user for any reason (Twitter is down, for example).you can add or remove screens, as necessary. 8. Create the page application by completing the instructions in the following topics, as appropriate: Add and Configure Elements Add a Background Image Format Elements Configure a Different Initial Screen for Non-Fans Configure Error Popup Message Configure Share Story Delete Elements Contest Workflow Suggested step-by-step workflow to follow when creating and managing a contest using a Contest application. 1. Contact your Adobe account consultant.your Adobe account consultant must enable a "Manage contest entries" permission on your account. 2. Ensure that the desired users in your account have User Group permissions to use the Contest application and manage contest entries. 3. Build a Contest application using the Social Application Builder. For more information, see Create a Page Application. 4. Publish the Contest application on your Facebook Page(s). For more information, see Publish a Page Application. 5. Toggle Manager Approval for entries to display on Facebook. 6. Let users submit entries for the contest. 7. Manage the submitted entries. 8. Configure Entry Display Settings. 9. Manually end the contest and announce winners. Manage Contest Entries Manage contests by filtering entries; approving, rejecting, or removing entries; and declaring winning entries. 1. In the Application Builder, open the desired contest application. 2. Click Contests in the Application Builder header to display the contest options.

168 Applications 168 Note: The Contest tab displays only if you are viewing a contest application. 3. Filter the list of entries as desired: Show Approved: Displays only entries that have been approved. To enable the approval functionality, while creating or editing a contest application, on the Template View subtab, click Yes under Approval Required. Show Rejected: Displays only entries that have been rejected by someone in your organization, as explained below. Only Show Flagged: Displays only entries that Facebook users have flagged as being inappropriate. For more information, see Entry Flag Link. You can then reject or remove the inappropriate entries as explained below. From: Specify a beginning and ending date to filter entries, then click Go. Search by Name: Search for a specific entry by name. Winners: Display only entries that have been declared winners, as explained below. Both: Displays both winning and losing entries. Losers: Display only entries that have not been declared winners, as explained below. Removed: Display only entries that have been removed from the contest, as explained below. Both: Displays entries that have been removed and not removed. Not Removed: Display only entries that have not been removed from the contest, as explained below. 4. To display individual entries, click an entry in the list on the left side.

169 Applications 169 Click Next, to display additional entries, if necessary. 5. Manage the selected entry: Approve: Approve the entry. When you approve an entry, it is visible to other users who view the application on Facebook. Reject: Reject the entry. When you reject an entry, it is not visible to other users who view the application on Facebook. Remove: Remove an entry that has already been approved or is visible if you did not enable Approval Required, as explained above. When you remove an entry, it is not visible to other users who view the application on Facebook. Declare Winner: Declare an entry as a winner. You can then announce winners and award prizes, if necessary. Add and Configure Elements Add and configurebasic, Form, and Contest elements for your page application screens. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Apps Overview, App Builder Basics Pt. 1, and App Builder Basics Pt While creating or editing a page application in the Report Builder, click the Artboard View tab. 2. From the Elements subtab, click Basic Elements, Form Elements, Contest Form Elements, Contest Elements, or Contest Social Elements to expand the list and to display available elements. Depending on your configuration, all options might not display. The following illustration shows the Basic Elements list:

170 Applications Drag-and-drop an element onto the Artboard in the desired position. 4. From the Artboard View page, select the element that you want to configure. A dark blue box surrounds the element after you click the element. 5. Configure the element as desired. For more information about each element and its settings, see Basic Elements, Form Elements, Contest Form Elements, Contest Elements, or Contest Social Elements. 6. Format the element as desired. Basic Elements Add basic elements to your application screen, including Facebook Name, Image, Button, Twitter Feed, Video Player, Text, Facebook Profile Pic, Code Block, and more. To access the Basic Elements list, from the Application Builder, click the Artboard View tab, click the Elements sub-tab, then click Basic Elements to display the list of available elements. Note: The available elements depend on the selected template. Not all elements are available for some templates. Button Element Add a basic Button to your application screen.

171 Applications 171 Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Builder Basics Pt. 2. Note: If you are designing a form to collect data, you must include a Form Submit Button element instead of a basic button. For more information, see Form Submit Button Element. Settings Subtab Element Button Persistence Description Specify the desired label for the element. Make this element persistent across all screens in the application. A persistent element displays on each screen in the application. The persistent element displays in the same position and with the same formatting on each screen. Persistence can be applied to any basic element.you can use a persistent element to place a rules button or link on every screen of an application.you can also use a persistent element to place a consistent header or footer on each screen in the application. If you select this option, the Persistence options expand. Click Add or Remove Screens to select one or more screens on which the element will persist.you can also choose whether this element should display above or below other elements on each screen. Be aware of the following conditions: If you change any instance of a persistent element, it affects all other instances of the persistent element. For example, if you nudge a persistent element to the left five pixels, it affects that element on all screens. If you add new screens to the application after creating a persistent element, the persistent element does not apply to the new screens. Audience (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Button Label Tooltip Navigation Target Specify the label text. To change the text, double-click the default button label, "Submit," then type the desired text.you can also select the button, then on the Settings subtab, type the desired text in the Button Label field. Specify the tooltip text that displays when users hover the pointer over the button. To change the tooltip text, on the Settings subtab, type the desired text in the Tooltip field. Specify the Navigation Target options to specify additional settings for the button. Depending on which navigation target you select, additional options applicable to that option display. You can choose the following options: Screen: Select this option to specify a link to another screen in the same page application. Select the desired screen from the Navigation Target drop-down list.

172 Applications 172 Element Description Website: Select this option to specify a URL to a website. Specify the website's address in the URL field. App Template: Select this option to specify a link to another application template. Select the desired template from the Navigation Target drop-down list. Next App Template: Select this option link to the next application template. Like Gate Navigation: Select this option to require the application user to Like your Facebook Page, if they are not already a fan, before proceeding with participation in the application. If users have already Liked your Facebook page or are fans, the pop-up message requiring them to Like your page does not display. Format Subtab Element Button Vertical Alignment Use Google Fonts Description Specify the desired label for the element. Select where you want to place the Submit button text: Top, Middle, or Bottom. Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Note: If you use the Format bar at the top of the page, all text within the same text field will have the same formatting. Background Color Use Images for the Button Transparent Background Color Specify the color that you want to use for the button background. You can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Upload a custom button if you prefer to use your own, brand-specific button on a screen. For more information, see Upload a Custom Button. Specify that the button's background is transparent. Upload a Custom Button You can upload a custom button if you prefer to use your own, brand-specific button on a screen. You can add a standard button that you can style and edit. However, uploading your own image lets you leverage creative assets developed outside the application builder. 1. While configuring a Button element, click the Format subtab. 2. Click Yes next to Use Images for the Button. If you select this option, three boxes display that let you drag-and-drop images from your computer. 3. Drag-and-drop the desired images from your computer into the following boxes: Button Image: The image that displays in the application in normal conditions (not being hovered over or clicked).

173 Applications 173 Button Hover Image: The image that displays when the user hovers the mouse over the button on a desktop or laptop computer. Button Click Image: The image that displays when the user clicks the button. Note that the button image dimensions match the size of the button. You can position the pointer over the lower-right corner of the button until the pointer changes into a horizontal double-headed arrow. You can then drag the border to the right or left to resize the button. Carousel Component Element Add an element to any application screen to include a carousel that displays a mix of images or YouTube links. Settings Subtab Element Carousel Persistence Description Specify the desired label for the element. Make this element persistent across all screens in the application. A persistent element displays on each screen in the application. The persistent element displays in the same position and with the same formatting on each screen. Persistence can be applied to any basic element.you can use a persistent element to place a rules button or link on every screen of an application.you can also use a persistent element to place a consistent header or footer on each screen in the application. If you select this option, the Persistence options expand. Click Add or Remove Screens to select one or more screens on which the element will persist.you can also choose whether this element should display above or below other elements on each screen. Be aware of the following conditions: If you change any instance of a persistent element, it affects all other instances of the persistent element. For example, if you nudge a persistent element to the left five pixels, it affects that element on all screens. If you add new screens to the application after creating a persistent element, the persistent element does not apply to the new screens. Audience (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Frame Size Items Specify the desired number of images or YouTube videos that you want the carousel to display: 1, 3, 4, or 5. Click Add Setting to add images or YouTube videos to the carousel. When you select this option, the settings listed below display.

174 Applications 174 Element Add Items Description Click to insert images or YouTube videos to the carousel. When you click, an additional Type option and Image drop box displays below. Note: You can add as many as 20 images or videos. To reorder the images or videos, click to the right of the Delete button above the image or video that you want to reorder, then drag it up or down into the desired order. Delete Type Image Video URL Click Delete to remove the image or video from the carousel. Select an option: Image or YouTube Video. (Conditional) If you selected Image from the Type drop-down list, drag-and-drop the image from your computer onto the Image box. (Conditional) If you selected YouTube Video from the Type drop-down list, specify the video's URL. Format Subtab Element Transparent Background Color Background Color Border Color Border Width in Pixels Border Radius in Pixels Description Specify whether you want the carousel's background to be transparent or have a color of your choosing. If you choose No, the Background Color picker displays. Specify the color that you want to use for the button background.you can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Specify the color that you want to use for the carousel's border. You can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Specify the width of each image's border. Specify the radius of each image's border. Carousel Item View Add an element to any application screen to display a larger version of the selected image or YouTube video from the carousel. At runtime, the Facebook users will see the first image or YouTube video in the carousel displayed in this area on the application screen. If users select a different image or video, it displays. For information about adding a carousel to application screen, see Carousel Component Element.

175 Applications 175 Settings Subtab Element Carousel Item View Persistence Description Specify the desired label for the element. Make this element persistent across all screens in the application. A persistent element displays on each screen in the application. The persistent element displays in the same position and with the same formatting on each screen. Persistence can be applied to any basic element.you can use a persistent element to place a rules button or link on every screen of an application.you can also use a persistent element to place a consistent header or footer on each screen in the application. If you select this option, the Persistence options expand. Click Add or Remove Screens to select one or more screens on which the element will persist.you can also choose whether this element should display above or below other elements on each screen. Be aware of the following conditions: If you change any instance of a persistent element, it affects all other instances of the persistent element. For example, if you nudge a persistent element to the left five pixels, it affects that element on all screens. If you add new screens to the application after creating a persistent element, the persistent element does not apply to the new screens. Audience (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Format Subtab Element Resize Image or Video Description Drag the lower-left corner of the element on the artboard to resize it. To maintain the aspect ratio while moving and resizing the element, press Shift while dragging the lower-left corner of the element. Code Block Element Add a field that contains JavaScript or embed code to add advanced functionality to that area of the screen. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Builder Advanced. Note: The Code Block element is advanced functionality. Please use at your own risk. Any code used though the code block is not supported by our platform and cannot be troubleshot by our platform team.we recommend rigorously testing your applications when using any custom code via the Code Block element.

176 Applications 176 For example, you can use a Code Block element to embed a video in an application. Other possible uses for the Code Block element include embedding a countdown timer or a live video feed. You can also integrate Adobe Scene7 viewers with Social using a code block element. For more information, see Integrate Scene7 Rich Media Viewers with Social. Note: You must use the Video Player element to play a YouTube video from within your application. The Code Block element lets you embed a video hosted on another site, such as Ustream or Vimeo. You cannot embed a YouTube video in a Code Block element. For more information, see Video Player Element. Settings Subtab Setting Code Block Persistence Description Specify the desired label for the element. Make this element persistent across all screens in the application. A persistent element displays on each screen in the application. The persistent element displays in the same position and with the same formatting on each screen. Persistence can be applied to any basic element. You can use a persistent element to place a rules button or link on every screen of an application. You can also use a persistent element to place a consistent header or footer on each screen in the application. If you select this option, the Persistence options expand. Click Add or Remove Screens to select one or more screens on which the element will persist. You can also choose whether this element should display above or below other elements on each screen. Be aware of the following conditions: If you change any instance of a persistent element, it affects all other instances of the persistent element. For example, if you nudge a persistent element to the left five pixels, it affects that element on all screens. If you add new screens to the application after creating a persistent element, the persistent element does not apply to the new screens.

177 Applications 177 Setting Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. HTML/CSS Copy and paste the desired HTML or CSS code. To embed a video, obtain the code from the video site. For example, using Ustream, click the Share button at the bottom of the video, click Embed, then click Copy to Clipboard. This field cannot contain JavaScript. If a <script> tag is detected, you receive an error message and the Save and Publish functions are disabled. You must specify JavaScript in the JavaScript box. Note that any existing applications created before the HTML/CSS and JavaScript boxes were separated will continue functioning correctly. Update Preview JavaScript Turn on JS Update the element in the Artboard. Copy and paste the desired JavaScript. Enable or disable JavaScript from running in the Application Builder. Note that this setting reverts to No whenever you open the application in the Application Builder. This setting does not affect the application at runtime. JavaScript always runs when the application is accessed by the user in Facebook. Color Swatch Element Add a Color Swatch element to set the background color for the entire application screen or for just a portion of the screen.

178 Applications 178 Settings Subtab Element Color Swatch Persistence Description Specify the desired label for the element. Make this element persistent across all screens in the application. A persistent element displays on each screen in the application. The persistent element displays in the same position and with the same formatting on each screen. Persistence can be applied to any basic element. You can use a persistent element to place a rules button or link on every screen of an application.you can also use a persistent element to place a consistent header or footer on each screen in the application. If you select this option, the Persistence options expand. Click Add or Remove Screens to select one or more screens on which the element will persist. You can also choose whether this element should display above or below other elements on each screen. Be aware of the following conditions: If you change any instance of a persistent element, it affects all other instances of the persistent element. For example, if you nudge a persistent element to the left five pixels, it affects that element on all screens. If you add new screens to the application after creating a persistent element, the persistent element does not apply to the new screens. Audience (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Format Subtab Element Transparent Background Color Background Color Show Border Border Color Border Width Description Specify whether you want the element's background to be transparent or have a color of your choosing. If you choose No, the Background Color picker displays. Specify the color that you want to use for the button background.you can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Specify whether you want to display a border around the color swatch. If you select Yes, the options below become available. Specify the color that you want to use for the border.you can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Specify the width of each image's border.

179 Applications 179 Element Border Style Description Specify a border option: Solid Dotted Dashed Double Groove Ridge Inset Outset To see how each option displays, select an option and view the element in the artboard. Comments Element Add a Comments element to allow users to post comments for your application. Settings Subtab Element Comments Persistence Description Specify the desired label for the element. Make this element persistent across all screens in the application. A persistent element displays on each screen in the application. The persistent element displays in the same position and with the same formatting on each screen. Persistence can be applied to any basic element.you can use a persistent element to place a rules button or link on every screen of an application.you can also use a persistent element to place a consistent header or footer on each screen in the application. If you select this option, the Persistence options expand. Click Add or Remove Screens to select one or more screens on which the element will persist.you can also choose whether this element should display above or below other elements on each screen. Be aware of the following conditions: If you change any instance of a persistent element, it affects all other instances of the persistent element. For example, if you nudge a persistent element to the left five pixels, it affects that element on all screens. If you add new screens to the application after creating a persistent element, the persistent element does not apply to the new screens. Audience (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences.

180 Applications 180 Element Set Custom URL Description Choose Yes to override the default URL set by the application, then specify the URL that displays with the Like button on Facebook. Or Choose No to use the default URL set by the application, drag the desired image into the Icon drop box, then specify a site name, site title, and page description. For more information about these settings, see App Settings. Number of Posts Specify the number of comments that you want to display. Format Subtab Element Comments Color Scheme Description Specify the desired label for the element. Select the desired color scheme for the comment box: Light or Dark. Facebook Name Element Add an area that automatically displays the first name of the user who views the application in Facebook. This element lets you personalize the application to increase participation. Settings Subtab Element Facebook Name Persistence Description Specify the desired label for the element. Make this element persistent across all screens in the application. A persistent element displays on each screen in the application. The persistent element displays in the same position and with the same formatting on each screen. Persistence can be applied to any basic element. You can use a persistent element to place a rules button or link on every screen of an application.you can also use a persistent element to place a consistent header or footer on each screen in the application. If you select this option, the Persistence options expand. Click Add or Remove Screens to select one or more screens on which the element will persist. You can also choose whether this element should display above or below other elements on each screen. Be aware of the following conditions: If you change any instance of a persistent element, it affects all other instances of the persistent element. For example, if you nudge a persistent element to the left five pixels, it affects that element on all screens. If you add new screens to the application after creating a persistent element, the persistent element does not apply to the new screens.

181 Applications 181 Element Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Format Subtab Element Facebook Name Use Google Fonts Description Specify the desired label for the element. Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Facebook Profile Pic Element Add a box on the application's screen that displays the Facebook profile picture of the user who views the application in Facebook. Settings Subtab Element Facebook Profile Pic Persistence Description Specify the desired label for the element. Make this element persistent across all screens in the application. A persistent element displays on each screen in the application. The persistent element displays in the same position and with the same formatting on each screen. Persistence can be applied to any basic element.you can use a persistent element to place a rules button or link on every screen of an application.you can also use a persistent element to place a consistent header or footer on each screen in the application. If you select this option, the Persistence options expand. Click Add or Remove Screens to select one or more screens on which the element will persist.you can also choose whether this element should display above or below other elements on each screen. Be aware of the following conditions: If you change any instance of a persistent element, it affects all other instances of the persistent element. For example, if you nudge a persistent element to the left five pixels, it affects that element on all screens. If you add new screens to the application after creating a persistent element, the persistent element does not apply to the new screens.

182 Applications 182 Element Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Image Element Add an Image element to display an image in your application. Settings Subtab Element Image Persistence Description Specify the desired label for the element. Make this element persistent across all screens in the application. A persistent element displays on each screen in the application. The persistent element displays in the same position and with the same formatting on each screen. Persistence can be applied to any basic element. You can use a persistent element to place a rules button or link on every screen of an application.you can also use a persistent element to place a consistent header or footer on each screen in the application. If you select this option, the Persistence options expand. Click Add or Remove Screens to select one or more screens on which the element will persist. You can also choose whether this element should display above or below other elements on each screen. Be aware of the following conditions: If you change any instance of a persistent element, it affects all other instances of the persistent element. For example, if you nudge a persistent element to the left five pixels, it affects that element on all screens. If you add new screens to the application after creating a persistent element, the persistent element does not apply to the new screens. Audience (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Image Alternate Text Drag-and-drop the image from your computer onto the Image box. Specify the text you want to display if the application's user does not allow images to display. Note: To maintain the aspect ratio while moving and resizing the element, press Shift while dragging the lower-left corner of the element.

183 Applications 183 Like Button Element Add a Like Button element to display a Like button in your application. A Like button lets a user share your content with friends on Facebook. When the user clicks the Like button in your application, a story appears in the user's friends' News Feed with a link back to your website. Settings Subtab Element Like Button Persistence Description Specify the desired label for the element. Make this element persistent across all screens in the application. A persistent element displays on each screen in the application. The persistent element displays in the same position and with the same formatting on each screen. Persistence can be applied to any basic element. You can use a persistent element to place a rules button or link on every screen of an application.you can also use a persistent element to place a consistent header or footer on each screen in the application. If you select this option, the Persistence options expand. Click Add or Remove Screens to select one or more screens on which the element will persist. You can also choose whether this element should display above or below other elements on each screen. Be aware of the following conditions: If you change any instance of a persistent element, it affects all other instances of the persistent element. For example, if you nudge a persistent element to the left five pixels, it affects that element on all screens. If you add new screens to the application after creating a persistent element, the persistent element does not apply to the new screens. Audience (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Send Button Show Faces Set Custom URL Include a Send button with the Like button. Display profile pictures below the buttons. Choose Yes to override the default URL set by the application, then specify the URL that displays with the Like button on Facebook. Or Choose No to use the default URL set by the application, drag the desired image into the Icon drop box, then specify a site name, site title, and page description. For more information about these settings, see App Settings.

184 Applications 184 Format Subtab Element Like Button Layout Style Description Specify the desired label for the element. Select the desired style: Standard: Displays text to the right of the button and friends' profile photos below the button. Button Count: Displays the total number of likes to the right of the button. Box Count: Displays the total number of likes above the button. Width Verb to Display Color Scheme Font Specify the element's width. Select the verb that displays on the button: Like or Recommend. Specify the color scheme that you want to use for the element: Light or Dark. Select the button label's font from the drop-down list. Rules Link Element Add a Rules Link element to display a link in your application that lets users review the rules they must follow. Settings Subtab Element Rules Link Persistence Description Specify the desired label for the element. Make this element persistent across all screens in the application. A persistent element displays on each screen in the application. The persistent element displays in the same position and with the same formatting on each screen. Persistence can be applied to any basic element. You can use a persistent element to place a rules button or link on every screen of an application. You can also use a persistent element to place a consistent header or footer on each screen in the application. If you select this option, the Persistence options expand. Click Add or Remove Screens to select one or more screens on which the element will persist.you can also choose whether this element should display above or below other elements on each screen. Be aware of the following conditions: If you change any instance of a persistent element, it affects all other instances of the persistent element. For example, if you nudge a persistent element to the left five pixels, it affects that element on all screens. If you add new screens to the application after creating a persistent element, the persistent element does not apply to the new screens. Audience (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality.

185 Applications 185 Element Description For more information, see App Audiences. Popup Screen Double-click the Rules Popup screen from the Screen View subtab to display the Rules Screen. You can configure each part of the Pop-up Screen element: Header Text: Select the Header Text box on the Artboard. In the Popup Header field, specify the desired label for the element. In the Header Text Field, specify the desired text for the header. You can also double click the text on the header and type the desired text directly in the Artboard. Click the Format subtab, then specify whether you want to use Google fonts for the header text. Choose the desired font from the drop-down list. Header Body: Double-click the Header Body text to edit the rules text. Click the Format subtab, then specify whether you want to use Google fonts for the header text. Choose the desired font from the drop-down list. Okay Button: Select the button, then specify the text you want to display on the button. Click the Format subtab, then specify whether you want to use Google fonts for the header text. Choose the desired font from the drop-down list. Text Specify the text you want users to click to display the popup screen that contains the rules. Format Subtab Element Rules Link Use Google Fonts Justification Description Specify the desired label for the element. Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Select the desired icon to left justify, center, or right justify the text. Text Element Add text to a screen in an application. Settings Subtab Element Text Persistence Description Specify the desired label for the element. Make this element persistent across all screens in the application. A persistent element displays on each screen in the application. The persistent element displays in the same position and with the same formatting on each screen.

186 Applications 186 Element Description Persistence can be applied to any basic element. You can use a persistent element to place a rules button or link on every screen of an application. You can also use a persistent element to place a consistent header or footer on each screen in the application. If you select this option, the Persistence options expand. Click Add or Remove Screens to select one or more screens on which the element will persist. You can also choose whether this element should display above or below other elements on each screen. Be aware of the following conditions: If you change any instance of a persistent element, it affects all other instances of the persistent element. For example, if you nudge a persistent element to the left five pixels, it affects that element on all screens. If you add new screens to the application after creating a persistent element, the persistent element does not apply to the new screens. Audience (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Text Is This Text a Link? Specify the desired text. When you add a Text element, Social inserts Lorem Ipsum text so you can see what the text looks like with default formatting. You can type the text in the Text field on the Settings tab. You can also double-click the text inside the Text element on the Artboard to edit the text. (Conditional) Select this option to specify additional settings if the text is a hyperlink. When you click Yes, additional options display: Link To: Specify the link's destination. Depending on which type of destination you select, additional options applicable to that option display. You can choose the following options: Screen: Select this option to specify a link to another screen in the same page application. Select the desired screen from the Navigation Target drop-down list. Website: Select this option to specify a URL to a website. Specify the website's address in the URL field. App Template: Select this option to specify a link to another application template. Select the desired template from the Navigation Target drop-down list. Next App Template: Select this option link to the next application template. Like Gate Navigation: Select this option to require the application user to Like your Facebook Page, if they are not already a fan, before proceeding with participation in the application. If users have already Liked your Facebook page or are fans, the pop-up message requiring them to Like your page does not display. Support Hover Style: Causes the link color to change if users hover the mouse pointer over the link. Support Active Style: Causes the link color to change if users click the link.

187 Applications 187 Element Description Support Visited Style: Causes the link color to change if users have already clicked the link to show that the link has been visited. Format Subtab Element Text Use Google Fonts Description Specify the desired label for the element. Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Note: If you use the Format bar at the top of the page, all text within the same text field will have the same formatting. Twitter Element Add a Twitter Feed element to display a Twitter Feed from within your application. Settings Subtab Element Twitter Feed Persistence Description Specify the desired label for the element. Make this element persistent across all screens in the application. A persistent element displays on each screen in the application. The persistent element displays in the same position and with the same formatting on each screen. Persistence can be applied to any basic element. You can use a persistent element to place a rules button or link on every screen of an application. You can also use a persistent element to place a consistent header or footer on each screen in the application. If you select this option, the Persistence options expand. Click Add or Remove Screens to select one or more screens on which the element will persist.you can also choose whether this element should display above or below other elements on each screen. Be aware of the following conditions: If you change any instance of a persistent element, it affects all other instances of the persistent element. For example, if you nudge a persistent element to the left five pixels, it affects that element on all screens. If you add new screens to the application after creating a persistent element, the persistent element does not apply to the new screens.

188 Applications 188 Element Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Twitter User Handle Maximum Number of Tweets to Display Specify the Twitter user whose tweets you want to display in the feed. There are two steps to configuring the Twitter Feed element. First, this user must have a Twitter account added to and configured within your Social account. Secondly, you must select the desired Twitter handle when configuring the Twitter element in the Application Builder, as explained in this row. Specify the maximum number of Tweets you want to display in the application. Social displays Tweets posted in the last two weeks only. Format Subtab Element Twitter Font Family Description Specify the desired label for the element. Select the desired font and font size from the drop-down lists. You cannot upload your own fonts. If you have special fonts that you want to use in your page application, use an image or background image that includes the text in the desired font. Font Color Click the Font Color button ( ) to change the text color. Use Google Fonts Font Style Background Color Tweet Background Color Link Color Heading Color Tweet Padding Additional Settings Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Select the desired button to italicize, bold, or left-justify the text. Specify the color that you want to use for the background. You can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Specify the color that you want to use for the background of each Tweet. You can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Specify the color that you want to use for the links. You can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Specify the color that you want to use for the heading. You can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Specify the number of pixels you want to use between the element border and the Tweet text. See Format Elements for additional formatting settings, such as Send Backward, Send Forward, Send to Back, Bring to Front, Position, and Size.

189 Applications 189 Video Player Element Add a Video Player element to play YouTube or Vimeo videos from within your application. Settings Subtab Element Video Player Persistence Description Specify the desired label for the element. Make this element persistent across all screens in the application. A persistent element displays on each screen in the application. The persistent element displays in the same position and with the same formatting on each screen. Persistence can be applied to any basic element. You can use a persistent element to place a rules button or link on every screen of an application.you can also use a persistent element to place a consistent header or footer on each screen in the application. If you select this option, the Persistence options expand. Click Add or Remove Screens to select one or more screens on which the element will persist. You can also choose whether this element should display above or below other elements on each screen. Be aware of the following conditions: If you change any instance of a persistent element, it affects all other instances of the persistent element. For example, if you nudge a persistent element to the left five pixels, it affects that element on all screens. If you add new screens to the application after creating a persistent element, the persistent element does not apply to the new screens. Audience (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Video URL Copy and paste the ID or URL for the YouTube or Vimeo video in the Video URL field. Format Subtab Element Video Player Screen Dimensions Description Specify the desired label for the element. Specify the screen dimensions, in pixels. Note: To maintain the aspect ratio while moving and resizing the element, press Shift while dragging the lower-left corner of the element.

190 Applications 190 Form Elements Add form elements (check boxes, form submit buttons, radio buttons, drop-down lists, text boxes, etc.) to page application screens. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Builder Basics Pt. 2. To access the Form Elements list, from the Application Builder, click the Artboard View tab. Click the Elements subtab, then click Form Elements to display the list of available elements. Check Box Group Element Add a Check Box group to your screen. Check boxes let users select multiple options. You can use Check Box Group element to ask a question and list possible choices. Users can then select all of the options that apply. For example, "Which animals do you like?" Possible answers could be "Dogs," "Cats", "Birds," and "Fish." Users can then select multiple options. If you want users to be able to select one option only, use a Radio Button Group. Settings Subtab Note: The fields on the Settings subtab vary depending on whether you select the heading, "Check Box Group," or one of the labels, "Check Box Label." Two check boxes display by default. You can add additional check boxes, as desired. The following options are available if you select the entire element. A dark blue box surrounds the element after you click the element. Element Check Box Group Audience Description Specify the desired label for the element. (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Group Name Heading + Add Specify the group name. This will be the database field name and appear as the column header in data exports. Specify the heading text. To change the text, double-click Check Box Group on the Artboard, then type the desired text. You can also select the heading, then on the Settings subtab, type the desired text in the Heading field. To add and configure additional check box options, select the group box heading, then on the Settings subtab, click Add. Configure each additional option. The following options are available if you select an individual check box. Click the default label (Check Box Label) to select an individual check box.

191 Applications 191 Element Check Box Group Required Check Box Value Check Box Label Default Checked Description Specify the desired label for the element. Select this check box to require the user to answer this question. An error message displays as a pop-up window if users do not answer a required question. For more information, see Configure Error Popup Message. Specify the desired check box value. This value is the name of the field collected in the database. It also is the value that displays when the user clicks the Export Data button from the main application manager screen to export all data collected from the application into an Excel spreadsheet. Specify the label text. To change the text, double-click Check Box Label on the Artboard, then type the desired text. You can also select the label, then on the Settings subtab, type the desired text in the Check Box Label field. Select this check box to select this option by default. Users can deselect the option, if desired. Format Subtab Element Check Box Use Google Fonts Description Specify the desired label for the element. Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Date Group Element Add a Date Group element with an editable label and drop-down lists that let users specify the month, date, and year. Settings Subtab Element Date Group Audience Description Specify the desired label for the element. (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Required Label Select this option to require the user to fill in the date. An error message displays as a pop-up window if users do not complete required information. For more information, see Configure Error Popup Message. Specify the label text. To change the text, double-click the default heading, "Label," then type the desired text.you can also select the heading, then on the Settings subtab, type the desired text in the Label field.

192 Applications 192 Element Field Key Description Specify a corresponding Field Key name. This will be the database field name and appear as the column header in data exports. Format Subtab Element Date Group Use Google Fonts Description Specify the desired label for the element. Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Element (Mashup template only.) Add an element to an application to collect users' addresses. Note: The fields on the Settings and Format subtabs vary depending on whether you select the entire element, the heading (Please Enter Your Address), or the Submit button. The element also has a drop-down list at the top of the Artboard.The Before Submit option lets you configure the button and its label. The After Submit option lets you configure the Thank You message. For more information, see Configure the Thank You Message. Settings Subtab The following options are available if you the select the Before Submit drop-down option and select the entire element. A dark blue box surrounds the element after you click the element. Element Component Audience Description Specify the desired label for the element. (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. The following option is available if you the select the Before Submit drop-down option and select the heading (Please enter your address): Element Label Description (Optional) To change the header text, double-click Please enter your address on the Artboard, then type the desired text. You can also select the heading, then on the Settings subtab, type the desired text in the Label field. The following options are available if you the select the Before Submit drop-down option and select the Submit button:

193 Applications 193 Element Submit Button Label Tooltip Description (Optional) Specify the desired button text. By default, the button label is "Submit." Specify the tooltip text that displays when users hover the pointer over the button. Format Subtab The following option is available if you the select the Before Submit drop-down option and select the heading (Please enter your address): Element Use Google Fonts Description Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Configure the Thank You Message Configure the Thank You message. You can use a background image, edit the text, and configure the font. 1. While configuring the element, select After Submit from the drop-down list at the top of the Artboard. 2. Click anywhere outside the Artboard to deselect the element. 3. On the Settings subtab, click Yes to use a background image. 4. Drag-and-drop the desired image from your computer into the Background Image box. 5. Select the Thank You text on the Artboard. 6. In the Thank You text field, specify the desired text. 7. Click the Format subtab, click Yes to use Google Fonts, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Form Submit Button Element Add a Form Submit Button element to your screen. If you are designing a form to collect data, you must include a Form Submit Button element. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Builder Basics Pt. 2. Note: This element causes the data entered in the fields to be collected in a secure Adobe database. A Form Submit Button collects form field data so you can export it. The regular Button element will not collect form data. Use a standard Form Submit Button with customized text, font, and color, or you upload your own button images. If you do not need to collect data from a form, add a basic button. For more information, see Button Element. Settings Subtab Element Form Submit Button Description Specify the desired label for the element.

194 Applications 194 Element Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Button Label Tooltip Maximum Total Entries Specify the label text. To change the text, double-click the default button label, "Submit," then type the desired text.you can also select the button, then on the Settings subtab, type the desired text in the Button Label field. Specify the tooltip text that displays when users hover the mouse pointer over the button. To change the tooltip text, on the Settings subtab, type the desired text in the Tooltip field. Specify the maximum number of times each user can submit the form. If a user attempts to submit the form more times than the specified number, an error message displays. If you specify a number in this field, an Edit Popup button displays. You can configure the default error message text now by clicking Edit Popup or by configuring the settings on the Error Message Popup screen. For more information, see Configure Error Popup Message. Time Period Max Entries Specify the maximum number of times each user can submit the form within the time period you select from the Per Day drop-down list. For example, if you specify 3 in this field and then select Per Week, each user can submit the form three times per week. If you specify a number in this field, an Edit Popup button displays. You can configure the default error message text now by clicking Edit Popup or by configuring the settings on the Error Message Popup screen. For more information, see Configure Error Popup Message. Per Day Like Gate Navigate After Submit If you specify a number in the Time Period Max Entries field, select the time period from the drop-down list. You can select Per Day, Per Week, or Per 2 Weeks. Require users to Like your Facebook page before they can submit the form. If users have already Liked your Facebook page or are Fans, the pop-up message requiring them to Like your page does not display. Direct the user to the desired target. You can direct users to another screen in the same application, to a website, to another application (to link them), or to the next application template. If you select this option, the following additional options display in the Navigation Target box: Screen: Select this option to specify a link to another screen in the same page application. Select the desired screen from the Navigation Target drop-down list. Website: Select this option to specify a URL to a website. Specify the website's address in the URL field, then select the Target Window: Current Window or New Window. App Template: Select this option to specify a link to another application template. Select the desired template from the Navigation Target drop-down list. Next App Template: Select this option link to the next application template.

195 Applications 195 Element Prompt Share Story Description Prompt the user to share the story on Facebook. Notice that the Share Story Type drop-down list has only one option: Form Submission. When you select the Prompt Share Story option, a new screen named "Form Submission Share Story" is added to the Screen View page. For more information about configuring this screen and its options, see Configure Share Story. Format Subtab Element Vertical Alignment Use Google Fonts Description Select where you want to place the Submit button text: Top, Middle, or Bottom. Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Background Color Use Images for the Button Transparent Background Color Specify the color that you want to use for the button background.you can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Upload a custom button if you prefer to use your own, brand-specific button on a form. For more information, see Upload a Custom Form Submit Button. Specify that the button's background is transparent. Upload a Custom Form Submit Button You can upload a custom button if you prefer to use your own, brand-specific button on a form. You can add a standard button that you can style and edit. However, uploading your own image lets you leverage creative assets developed outside the application builder. 1. While configuring or editing a Form Submit Button, click the Format subtab. 2. In the Background Color section, select the Use Images for the Button check box. If you select this check box, three boxes display that let you drag-and-drop images from your computer. 3. Drag-and-drop the desired images from your computer into the following boxes: Button Image: The image that displays in the application in normal conditions (not being hovered over or clicked). Button Hover Image: The image that displays when the user hovers the mouse over the button on a desktop or laptop computer. Button Click Image: The image that displays when the user clicks the button. Note that the button image dimensions match the size of the button. You can position the pointer over the lower-right corner of the button until the pointer changes into a horizontal double-headed arrow. You can then drag the border to the right or left to resize the button.

196 Applications 196 Poll Element (Mashup template only.) Add a Poll element to an application to collect users' answers to questions. Note: The fields on the Settings and Format subtabs vary depending on whether you select the entire element, the heading (Question?), an option (Answer 1 and so forth), or the Done button. The Poll element also has a drop-down list at the top of the Artboard. The Question View option lets you configure the questions. The Results option lets you configure the chart that displays to users after they have completed the poll. Settings Subtab The following options are available if you the select the Question View drop-down option and select the entire element. A dark blue box surrounds the element after you click the element. Element Poll Component Poll Name Audience Description Specify the desired label for the element. Specify the desired name of the poll. (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Prompt Share Story Prompt the user to share the story on Facebook. Notice that the Share Story Type drop-down list has only one option: Poll Results. When you select the Prompt Share Story option, a new screen named "Poll Results Share Story Popup" is added to the Screen View page. For more information about configuring this screen and its options, see Configure Share Story. + Add To add and configure additional options, select the heading, then on the Settings subtab, click Add. Configure each additional option. The following option is available if you the select the Question View drop-down option and select the heading (Question?): Element Text Description To change the question text, double-click Question? on the Artboard, then type the desired text. You can also select the heading, then on the Settings subtab, type the desired text in the Question Text field. The following option is available if you the select the Question View drop-down option and select an individual option (Answer 1 and so forth):

197 Applications 197 Element Displayed Text Description Specify the desired text for each answer option. The following options are available if you the select the Question View drop-down option and select the Done button: Element Button Label Tooltip Description (Optional) Specify the desired button text. By default, the button label is "Done." Specify the tooltip text that displays when users hover the pointer over the button. Format Subtab The following options are available if you the select the Question View drop-down option and select the entire element. A dark blue box surrounds the element after you click the element. Element Use Background Image Results Type Description Provide a background image to your poll. When you select Yes, a Background Image box displays. Drag-and-drop a background image from your computer into the Background Image box. Choose the type of chart you want to display to users after they have completed the poll. The graph shows how previous users have responded to the poll. The following charts are available: Bar Chart (Horizontal): Shows relative percentages for answers in a horizontal chart. Bar Chart (Vertical): Shows relative percentages for answers in a vertical chart. Pie Chart: Shows the answer percentages in relation to each other, and shows the percentage of the selected metrics in relation to the whole. Data Label Color Show Answers in Random Order Show Bar Chart Axis Label Show Tooltips on Chart Use the color picker to select the desired color for data labels. You can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Randomize the order of answers to eliminate the statistical advantage of answers in certain positions (such as the first answer presented). Display chart axis labels on bar charts. Display tooltips when users mouse over the chart. The following options are available if you select the Question View drop-down option and select the Question? heading: Element Use Google Fonts Description Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web.

198 Applications 198 Element Justification Description Select the desired icon to left justify, center, or right justify the text. The following options are available if you the select the Question View drop-down option and select an answer option: Element Use Google Fonts Description Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Results Color Justification Specify the color that you want to use for the results background.you can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Select the desired icon to left justify, center, or right justify the text. The following options are available if you the select the Question View drop-down option and select the Done button: Element Use Google Fonts Description Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Justification Background Color Select the desired icon to left justify, center, or right justify the text. Specify the color that you want to use for the button background. You can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Pull Down Element Add a pull-down element (drop-down list) on a page application's screen. Settings Subtab Setting Pull Down Audience Description Specify the desired label for the element. (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Required Make this element a mandatory field in the application that the user must complete. If the user leaves this field

199 Applications 199 Setting Description empty, an error message displays informing the user that the element is required. You can configure the default error message text now by clicking Go to Popup or by configuring the settings on the Error Message Popup screen. For more information, see Configure Error Popup Message. Label Field Key Value List Specify the element's label. Specify a corresponding Field Key name. This will be the database field name and appear as the column header in data exports for information collected. Select the value that displays in the drop-down list selections: Gender: Lets users select Male or Female from the drop-down list. Country: Lets users select the country in which they live from the drop-down list. US State: Lets users select the U.S. state in which they live from the drop-down list. Custom: Lets users define custom options that users can select from the drop-down list. Format Subtab Setting Use Google Fonts Description Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Radio Button Group Element Add a Radio group to your screen. Radio buttons let users select a single option. You can use the Radio Button Group to ask a question and list possible choices. Users can then select one option only. For example, "Do you like cats?" One answer could be "Yes" and the other answer could be "No." Users can select only one option. If you want users to be able to select multiple options, use a Check Box Group Element.

200 Applications 200 Settings Subtab Note: The fields on the Settings subtab vary depending on whether you select the heading, "Radio Group," or one of the labels, "Button Label." Two radio buttons display by default. You can add additional buttons, as desired. The following options are available if you select the entire element. A dark blue box surrounds the element after you click the element. Element Radio Button Group Audience Description Specify the desired label for the element. (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Required Group Name Heading + Add Require the user to answer this question. An error message displays as a pop-up window if users do not answer a required question. For more information, see Configure Error Popup Message. Specify the group name. This will be the database field name and appear as the column header in data exports. Specify the heading text. To change the text, double-click Radio Group on the Artboard, then type the desired text. You can also select the heading, then on the Settings subtab, type the desired text in the Heading field. To add and configure additional radio button options, click Add. Configure each additional option. The following options are available if you select an individual radio button. Click the default label (Button Label) to select an individual button. Element Radio Button Group Button Value Button Label Description Specify the desired label for the element. Specify the desired button value.this value is the name of the field collected in the database. It also is the value that displays when the user clicks the Export Data button from the main application manager screen to export all data collected from the application into an Excel spreadsheet. Specify the label text. To change the text, double-click Button Label on the Artboard, then type the desired text. You can also select the label, then on the Settings subtab, type the desired text in the Button Label field.

201 Applications 201 Format Subtab Element Radio Button Group Use Google Fonts Description Specify the desired label for the element. Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Text Area Element Add a text area box for users to type text into a form. Settings Subtab Setting Text Area Audience Description Specify the desired label for the element. (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Required Make this element a mandatory field in the application that the user must complete. If the user leaves this field empty, an error message displays informing the user that the element is required. You can configure the default error message text now by clicking Go to Popup or by configuring the settings on the Error Message Popup screen. For more information, see Configure Error Popup Message. Label Field Key Default Value Word Limit Specify the element's label. Specify a corresponding Field Key name. This will be the database field name and appear as the column header in data exports for information collected. Specify the default text that you want to populate in the text box. For example, if you want each user to share a short story about your event, you could specify the following default text: "Share your story." Specify the number of words users can enter. The default value is 10,000.

202 Applications 202 Setting Character Limit Description Specify the number of characters users can enter. The default value is 25. Format Subtab Setting Use Google Fonts Description Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Text Field Element Add a text field for users to type text into a form. Settings Subtab Setting Text Field Audience Description Specify the desired label for the element. (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Required Make this element a mandatory field in the application that the user must complete. If the user leaves this field empty, an error message displays informing the user that the element is required. You can configure the default error message text now by clicking Go to Popup or by configuring the settings on the Error Message Popup screen. For more information, see Configure Error Popup Message. Label Field Key Default Value Specify the element's label. Specify a corresponding Field Key name. This will be the database field name and appear as the column header in data exports for information collected. Specify the default text that you want to populate in the text box. For example, if you want to collect

203 Applications 203 Setting Description addresses, you could specify the following default text: "Specify your address." Word Limit Character Limit Format Select this option, then specify the number of words users can enter. The default is 25. Select this option, then specify the number of words users can enter. You can select 1 to 20 words. Select the allowable text format: None Alpha Only Numbers Only Address Date Phone Number (US Only) Format Subtab Setting Use Google Fonts Description Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Contest Form Elements Add contest form elements (name fields, address fields, phone number fields, fields, etc.) to contest application screens. To access the Contest Form Elements list, from the Application Builder while creating or editing a contest application, click the Artboard View tab. Click the Elements subtab, then click Contest Form Elements to display the list of available elements: The majority of the contest form elements are identical to the regular form elements you can use when creating other types of page applications. The contest form elements, however, have been pre-labeled and pre-configured to save users time and effort when creating contest page applications. For example, the Entry Phone Number Field contest form element is identical to the Text Field form element, except that it is pre-labeled "Phone" and is pre-configured to accept only phone numbers. Likewise, the Entry State Field contest form element is identical to the Pull Down form element, except that it is pre-labeled "State" and is pre-configured to provide a drop-down list containing US states. Rather than explaining the options available on the Format and Settings subtabs for each contest form element, the following table lists each contest form element and its corresponding form element. Click the accompanying link to view step-by-step instructions to configure each element's settings.

204 Applications 204 Contest Form Element Submit Entry Corresponding Form Element Form Submit Button Element. The element is pre-labeled "Submit." For configuration information, see Form Submit Button Element. Entry Name Field Text Field Element. The element is pre-labeled "Name." For configuration information, see Text Field Element. Entry Title Field Text Field Element. The element is pre-labeled "Name." For configuration information, see Text Field Element. Entry Description Field Text Field Element. The element is pre-labeled "Description." Use the Settings tab to specify a word or character limit for the description. For configuration information, see Text Field Element. Entry Address Field Text Field Element. The element is pre-labeled "Address1." For configuration information, see Text Field Element. Entry Address Line Two Field Text Field Element. The element is pre-labeled "Address2." For configuration information, see Text Field Element. Entry City Field Text Field Element. The element is pre-labeled "City." For configuration information, see Text Field Element. Entry State Field Text Field Element. The element is pre-labeled "State." For configuration information, see Text Field Element. Entry Postal Code Field Text Field Element. The element is pre-labeled "Postal Code." For configuration information, see Text Field Element.

205 Applications 205 Contest Form Element Entry Phone Number Field Corresponding Form Element Text Field Element. The element is pre-labeled "Phone." For configuration information, see Text Field Element. Entry Field Text Field Element. The element is pre-labeled " ." For configuration information, see Text Field Element. Photo Upload Button Button Element For configuration information, see Button Element. You can upload a photo as large as 5 MB. Photo Upload Preview Text Element For configuration information, see Text Element. Entry Check Box Group Check Box Group An example of a good use for this element is so that contest entrees can check a box indicating that they own the picture they are submitting. For more information, see Check Box Group Element. Date Group Date Group Element For more information, see Date Group Element. Contest Elements Add contest elements to page application screens. To access the Contest Elements list, from the Application Builder while creating or editing a contest application, click the Artboard View tab. Click the Elements subtab, then click Contest Elements to display the list of available elements. Note: To see the contest elements other than the Entry Count element, you must be on the Gallery screen. Submission Gallery Add an element to a contest application that displays a scrollable feed of user-uploaded images where other users can vote on, like, and share individual entries.

206 Applications 206 Settings Subtab Note: The fields on the Settings subtab vary depending on whether you select the entire gallery group box or an individual entry tile. A dark blue box surrounds each element after you select it. The following options are available if you select the entire gallery (the box containing the individual submission tiles). Element Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Default Sorting Specify the default sorting option: Newest Entries: Displays the most recently submitted images. Oldest Entries: Displays the oldest images. Most Votes: Displays the images that have received the most votes. Least Votes: Displays the images that have received the least votes to help promote entries that are not currently getting much attention. Random: Displays images in random order to promote unbiased voting behavior. To prevent users from changing the default sort order, do not add the Gallery Sort Filter Images Show Only Specify whether you want to filter images. If you select Yes, the Show Only drop-down list displays. Choose an option: Winners Only: Display only images that have won the contest. Losers Only: Display only images that did not win the contest. The following options are available if you select an individual submission tile. These settings apply to all tiles, so you need to modify them for a single tile only. Element Show Entry Name Show Entry Title Show Entry Description Show Vote Count Enable Voting Description Enable or disable display of the entry name. Enable or disable display of the entry title. Enable or disable display of the entry description. Enable or disable display of the vote count. Enable or disable display of the Vote button.

207 Applications 207 Note: The settings that are displayed or not displayed on tiles should coincide with the form fields that have been added to the Submit Entry screen. Format Subtab Note: The fields on the Format subtab vary depending on whether you select the entire gallery group box or an individual entry tile. A dark blue box surrounds each element after you select it. The following options are available if you select the entire gallery (the box containing the individual submission tiles). Element Border Color Border Width in Pixels Border Radius in Pixels Transparent Background Color Background Color Description Specify the color that you want to use for the gallery's border. You can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Specify the width of the gallery's border. Specify the radius of the gallery's border. Specify whether you want the gallery's background to be transparent or have a color of your choosing. If you choose No, the Background Color picker displays. Specify the color that you want to use for the gallery's background. You can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. The following options are available if you select an individual submission tile. These settings apply to all tiles, so you need to modify them for a single tile only. Element Width Hover-Over: Dark Color Scheme? Background Color Border Color Border Width Description Specify the width (in pixels) of the gallery tiles. Note that the value you specify impacts the number of columns that display. Change the color scheme of the hover bar: Light or Dark. Specify the color that you want to use for the tiles' backgrounds.you can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Specify the color that you want to use for the tiles' borders. You can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Specify the width of the tiles' borders.

208 Applications 208 Entry Count Add an element to a contest application that displays the number of users who have entered your contest. Settings Subtab Setting Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Format Subtab Setting Use Google Fonts Description Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Entry Description Add an entry description element to a contest application. Settings Subtab Setting Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Format Subtab Setting Use Google Fonts Description Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web.

209 Applications 209 Entrant Facebook Profile Pic Add a box on the application's screen that will display the Facebook profile picture of the user who submits an entry. Settings Subtab Element Facebook Profile Pic Audience Description Specify the desired label for the element. (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Entry Flag Link Add an element to a contest application that lets users flag a contest entry as inappropriate. Settings Subtab Setting Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Link Text Flagged Text Specify the desired text.you can type the text in the field on the Settings tab. You can also double-click the text inside the Link Text element on the Artboard to edit the text. Specify the desired text.you can type the text in the field on the Settings tab. You can also double-click the text inside the Link Text element on the Artboard to edit the text. Format Subtab Setting Use Google Fonts Description Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list.

210 Applications 210 Setting Description Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Entry Name Add an element to a contest application that lets users specify the name for the entry. Settings Subtab Setting Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Format Subtab Setting Use Google Fonts Description Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Entry Photo Add an element to a contest application that displays a randomly selected submitted photo in your application. Settings Subtab Element Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Entry Search Add an element to a contest application that lets users search for specific entries.

211 Applications 211 Settings Subtab Setting Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Name From the drop-down list, select the fields that are searched: Name, Title, or Name and Title. Gallery Sort Add an element to a contest application that lets users sort entries by the number of votes or likes, in a random order, or by the most recent submissions to the least recent submissions. Settings Subtab Setting Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Sort: Votes Sort: Likes Sort: Random Sort: Recent Allow users to sort the submissions in the gallery by the number of votes, from most to least. Allow users to sort the submissions in the gallery by the number of Likes, from most to least. Allow users to sort the submissions in the gallery in random order. Allow users to sort the submissions in the gallery by the most recent submission to the least recent submission. Note: These settings should correspond to other settings within the contest application. For example, if you do not add a Like button, users should not be able to sort based on Likes. If you do not want entrants/voters to be able to change the filter, remove or do not add this element.

212 Applications 212 Entry Title Add a title element to a screen. Settings Subtab Element Text Audience Description Specify the desired label for the element. (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Text Is This Text a Link? Specify the desired text. When you add a Text element, Social inserts Lorem Ipsum text so you can see what the text looks like with default formatting. You can type the text in the Text field on the Settings tab. You can also double-click the text inside the Text element on the Artboard to edit the text. (Conditional) Select this option to specify additional settings if the text is a hyperlink. When you click Yes, additional options display: Link To: Specify the link's destination. Depending on which type of destination you select, additional options applicable to that option display. You can choose the following options: Screen: Select this option to specify a link to another screen in the same page application. Select the desired screen from the Navigation Target drop-down list. Website: Select this option to specify a URL to a website. Specify the website's address in the URL field. App Template: Select this option to specify a link to another application template. Select the desired template from the Navigation Target drop-down list. Next App Template: Select this option link to the next application template. Like Gate Navigation: Select this option to require the application user to Like your Facebook Page, if they are not already a fan, before proceeding with participation in the application. If users have already Liked your Facebook page or are fans, the pop-up message requiring them to Like your page does not display. Support Hover Style: Causes the link color to change if users hover the mouse pointer over the link. Support Active Style: Causes the link color to change if users click the link. Support Visited Style: Causes the link color to change if users have already clicked the link to show that the link has been visited.

213 Applications 213 Format Subtab Element Text Use Google Fonts Description Specify the desired label for the element. Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Note: If you use the Format bar at the top of the page, all text within the same text field will have the same formatting. Pagination Indicator Add an element to a contest application that displays the page number that the user is currently viewing and the total number of pages in the application. Settings Subtab Setting Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Indicator Text Specify the text that you want displayed at the bottom of each screen in the application. The default text uses variables that automatically populate the page number for each screen. Format Subtab Setting Use Google Fonts Description Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Vote Button Add a button element to a contest application that lets users vote for their favorite contest entries.

214 Applications 214 Settings Subtab Element Vote Button Audience Description Specify the desired label for the element. (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Button Label Tooltip Like Gate Voting Restrict User Votes Max Votes Navigate After Vote Specify the label text. To change the text, double-click the default button label, "Submit," then type the desired text.you can also select the button, then on the Settings subtab, type the desired text in the Button Label field. Specify the tooltip text that displays when users hover the mouse pointer over the button. To change the tooltip text, on the Settings subtab, type the desired text in the Tooltip field. Require users to Like your Facebook page before they can vote. If users have already Liked your Facebook page or are Fans, the pop-up message requiring them to Like your page does not display. Select an option: Do Not Restrict User Votes: Allow each user to vote as many times as he or she desires. Per Day: Restrict each user to cast the specified number of votes across all entries in the contest, per day. Per Entry Per Day: Restrict each user to cast the specified number of votes per entry, per day. Specify the desired number. The number you specify is the maximum number of times a user can vote each day according to the option you chose in Restrict User Votes. Direct the user to the desired target. You can direct users to another screen in the same application, to a website, to another application (to link them), or to the next application template. If you select this option, the following additional options display in the Navigation Target box: Screen: Select this option to specify a link to another screen in the same page application. Select the desired screen from the Navigation Target drop-down list. Website: Select this option to specify a URL to a website. Specify the website's address in the URL field, then select the Target Window: Current Window or New Window. App Template: Select this option to specify a link to another application template. Select the desired template from the Navigation Target drop-down list. Next App Template: Select this option link to the next application template. Prompt Share Story Prompt the user to share the story on Facebook. Notice that the Share Story Type drop-down list has only one option: Form Submission.

215 Applications 215 Element Description When you select the Prompt Share Story option, a new screen named "Contest Vote Popup" is added to the Screen View page. For more information about configuring this screen and its options, see Configure Share Story. Format Subtab Element Vertical Alignment Use Google Fonts Description Select where you want to place the Submit button text: Top, Middle, or Bottom. Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Background Color Use Images for the Button Transparent Background Color Specify the color that you want to use for the button background.you can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Upload a custom button if you prefer to use your own, brand-specific button on a form. For more information, see Upload a Custom Form Submit Button. Specify that the button's background is transparent. Vote Count Add an element to a contest application that displays the number of votes submitted for your contest. Settings Subtab Setting Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Format Subtab Setting Use Google Fonts Description Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web.

216 Applications 216 Vote or Flag Confirmation Add an element to a contest application that displays a confirmation that the vote or flag action was successful. Format Subtab Setting Use Google Fonts Description Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Transparent Background Color Show Border Icon Theme Specify that the button's background is transparent. Specify whether or not to show a border around the confirmation message. Specify the theme for the icon: Light or Dark. Contest Social Elements Add contest social elements to page application screens: Entry Like Button and Entry Comment Box. To access the Social Contest Elements list, from the Application Builder while creating or editing a contest application, click the Artboard View tab. Click the Elements subtab, then click Contest Social Elements to display the list of available elements. Note: To see the contest social elements, you must be on the Gallery screen. Entry Like Button Add an element to a contest application that displays a Like button for users to click. At runtime on Facebook, the Like button displays on the Gallery screen for each user. When a user clicks the button, a Like is created for whichever entry is currently displayed in the carousel. Settings Subtab Element Audience Description (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Send Button Include a Send button with the Like button.

217 Applications 217 Element Show Faces Description Display profile pictures below the buttons. Format Subtab Element Like Button Layout Style Description Specify the desired label for the element. Select the desired style: Standard: Displays text to the right of the button and friends' profile photos below the button. Button Count: Displays the total number of likes to the right of the button. Box Count: Displays the total number of likes above the button. Width Verb to Display Color Scheme Font Specify the element's width. Select the verb that displays on the button: Like or Recommend. Specify the color scheme that you want to use for the element: Light or Dark. Select the button label's font from the drop-down list. Entry Comment Box Add a Comments element to allow users to post comments for contest entries. Settings Subtab Element Comments Audience Description Specify the desired label for the element. (Conditional) If you have enabled the App Audience functionality in Social, select the desired audience from the drop-down list. The Audience drop-down list does not display if you have not enabled this functionality. For more information, see App Audiences. Number of Posts Specify the number of comments that you want to display. Format Subtab Element Comments Color Scheme Description Specify the desired label for the element. Select the desired color scheme for the comment box: Light or Dark.

218 Applications 218 Coupon Elements Add elements to Coupon application screens that generate unique coupon codes for each user or let users print coupons. You can also specify the number of coupons to make available to Facebook users. To access the Coupon Elements list while configuring a Coupon application, from the Application Builder, click the Artboard View tab. Click the Elements subtab, then click Coupon Elements to display the list of available elements: Print Coupon Element Format a button that lets users print a coupon if the device is set up to print to a printer. The Print Coupon element is located on the Coupon Success screen of a Coupon application. Although you do not need drag it from the Elements subtab onto the Artboard like with other elements in the Application Builder, you can configure it as desired. Settings Subtab Element Check Box Group Button Label Tooltip Description Specify the desired label for the element. Specify the label text. To change the text, double-click the default button label, "Print Coupon," then type the desired text.you can also select the button, then on the Settings subtab, type the desired text in the Button Label field. Specify the tooltip text that displays when users hover the pointer over the button. To change the tooltip text, on the Settings subtab, type the desired text in the Tooltip field. Format Subtab Element Vertical Alignment Use Google Fonts Description Select where you want to place the Submit button text: Top, Middle, or Bottom. Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Note: If you use the Format bar at the top of the page, all text within the same text field will have the same formatting. Background Color Use Images for the Button Transparent Background Color Specify the color that you want to use for the button background. You can specify a hex value or you can use the color picker to choose a color from a color pallette. Upload a custom button if you prefer to use your own, brand-specific button on a screen. For more information, see Upload a Custom Button. Specify that the button's background is transparent.

219 Applications 219 Coupon Code Generator Element Insert an element into a Coupon application that displays a unique coupon code for each Facebook user who lands on the Coupon Sucess screen. To insert the Coupon Code Generator element, open the Coupon Success screen in the Artboard, click the Elements subtab, then click Coupon Elements to expand the list. Drag the Coupon Code Generator element onto the Artboard. Settings Subtab Element Upload a File Description Click Browse to select and upload a CSV file into Social. The CSV file must contain exactly one column with a row for each coupon code. You can create the file in Microsoft Excel and save it in CSV (.csv) format. The number of available coupons corresponds with the number of rows in the uploaded file. For example, if the file contains 5,000 rows, each containing a coupon code, 5,000 coupons are available. Note: If you use this element, the Number of Coupons option described in Specifying the Number of Coupons Available disappears. After you add the Coupon Code Generator element and upload the file, you must save the application, close it, and then re-open the application to synchronize this setting. Reset Coupons to 0 Resets the coupon codes to 0. Format Subtab Element Use Google Fonts Description Click Yes, then select the desired font from the drop-down list. Google Fonts lets you use hundreds of free, open-source fonts optimized for the web. Note: If you use the Format bar at the top of the page, all text within the same text field will have the same formatting. Specifying the Number of Coupons Available Specify the number of coupons that you want to make available to your Facebook audience. 1. While creating or editing a Coupon application, click the Template View tab. 2. Select the Coupon template on the right side, then click the Settings subtab. A dark blue box surrounds the template when it is selected.

220 Applications In the Number of Coupons box, specify the number of coupons that you want to make available. Suppose that you specify 5,000. After 5,000 coupons have been distributed to Facebook users, they see the Fail Coupon screen that informs them that no more coupons are available. You can configure the Fail Coupon screen with whatever information and elements that you want to display. Note: If you use the Coupon Code Generator element to upload a file containing coupon codes, this setting is not available. The number of available coupons corresponds with the number of rows in the uploaded file. For more information, see Coupon Code Generator Element. To prevent users from obtaining multiple coupons, you can use the Form Submission Restriction options. For example, if you specify 1 in the Maximum Total Entries field, each user can obtain only one coupon. 4. (Conditional) Click Reset Coupons to 0 to restart the numbering at zero (0). This option removes all distributed coupons from the database and resets the distribution counter to zero. Click OK to confirm the action. This option is useful, for example, to reset the numbering after internal testing of your coupon application. Format Elements Format an element in a page application to specify its text font and style, stack order, position, and size. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Builder Basics Pt. 2. Note: Depending on the selected element, some options might not be available. Also, additional options might be available on the Format subtab. These options are described in the individual instructions about each element. See Add and Configure Elements. 1. While creating or editing a page application in the Application Builder, click the Artboard View tab.

221 Applications Select the element in the Artboard that you want to format. A dark blue box surrounds the element after you click the element. A formatting ribbon displays at the top of the Artboard page, as illustrated below: 3. Format the element: Font Family and Font Size: Select the desired font and font size from the drop-down lists. You cannot upload your own fonts. If you have special fonts that you want to use in your page application, use an image or background image that includes the text in the desired font. See Add a Background Image. Font Color: Click the Font Color button ( ) to change the text color. Font Appearance: Select the desired button ( Text Justification: Select the desired button ( ) to italicize, bold, or underline the text. ) to left justify, center, or right justify the text. Stacking Order: Select the desired button ( ) to specify the stacking order for elements on the screen. The stacking order determines which element is "on top of" other elements, and therefore, which element is visible when two or more elements overlap. The available options include: send backward, send forward, send to back, bring to front. Position: In the first two boxes ( ), specify the number of pixels from the left and top of the application window where you want the top-left corner of the element to be positioned. You can also position the mouse pointer over the element until a four-sided arrow displays, then drag the element to the desired position. Notice that as you drag an element to a new location, the values in the fields update. This makes it easier to align multiple objects. Element Size: In the last two boxes ( selected element. ), specify the number of pixels for the width and height of the You can also position the mouse pointer over the bottom-right corner of the element until the pointer changes into a horizontal double-headed arrow, then drag the border to the right or left to resize the element. Notice that as you drag an element to a new location, the values in the fields update. This makes it easier to align multiple objects. Note: If you have several elements that you want to align perfectly, it is often easier to select each element and then use the Position boxes to ensure that each element is positioned exactly as you want it. Reset: Click to undo any changes you have made and to reset the formatting back to the default settings. Delete Elements Remove unneeded elements from your page applications. 1. While creating or editing a page application in the Report Builder, click the Artboard View tab. 2. Select the element that you want to delete.

222 Applications 222 A dark blue box surrounds the element after you click the element. 3. Click, then click OK to confirm that you want to delete the element. Note: If you are creating or editing a form to collect data, do not delete the Submit button. A form that collects data entered into the fields must include the Form Submit Button element. This button causes the data entered in the fields to be collected in the Social database. Add a Background Image Add a background image to each page application screen. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Builder Basics Pt. 2. A background image can contain pictures and text. If your creative department creates a detailed background image, only a few elements might be needed on the screen. For example, you could use company fonts and logos on the background and then simply add a Next button. 1. While creating or editing a page application, select the desired screen, then click the Artboard View tab. 2. Click the Settings sub-tab. 3. Enable the Use a Background Image option. When you click Yes, a Background Image box displays. 4. Drag and drop a pre-sized and designed background image from your computer into the Background Image box. 5. (Conditional) To adjust the screen dimensions to accommodate the background, click the Format sub-tab, then specify the desired screen height. 6. (Conditional) Repeat the previous steps to add background images to additional screens within the same application.

223 Applications 223 You can select the same background image for all screens in the application or you can select a different background image for each screen. 7. Select any screen on the Screen View page, then click the Artboard View tab to drill into each screen to which background images were added to view the background and to adjust any elements on top of it. 8. Click Save at the top right of the window. Configure a Different Initial Screen for Non-Fans Create an additional screen that initially displays to non-fans when they use your Facebook application. 1. While creating or editing a page application, click the Template View tab. 2. Select the application template on the right side, then click the Settings subtab. A dark blue box surrounds the template when it is selected. 3. Select the Have a Different Initial Screen for Non-Fans option. Notice that the number of screens listed on the application increases or decreases depending on whether this option is selected. 4. Click the Screen View tab to display all screens in the application template. You can also double-click the application template to display all screens in the application template. 5. Select the Non-Fans Splash screen, then click the Artboard View tab. You can also double-click the Non-Fans Splash screen. 6. Select Use a Background Image to provide a background image to your screen. When you select Yes, a Background Image box displays. Drag-and-drop a background image from your computer into the Background Image box. 7. Add and format elements as desired.

224 Applications 224 For more information, see Add and Configure Elements and Format Elements. 8. Click Save. Configure Error Popup Message Edit the default messages that display in a pop-up window if users fail to enter information into a required field in a form. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Builder Basics Pt. 2. All error messages can be designed together for a consistent look and feel. Format the background, text, style, text color, the center shaded area, outline around buttons, and button text on the Format tab to achieve a unique theme for your application. 1. From the Screen View, double-click the Error Message Popup screen to open it in the Artboard View. 2. Click the Settings sub-tab. 3. Select and edit any of the following messages: Message Type Header Text Required Field Alpha Only Numbers Only Date Phone Number Max Entries Time Period Max Entries Default Message An error has occurred You must enter a value for {*field_name*} Please enter letter or words only for {*field_name*} Please enter numbers only for {*field_name*} Please enter a date using the following format: mm/dd/yyyy for {*field_name*} Please enter a US area code and phone number for {*field_name*} using the following format: xxx-xxx-xxxx We're sorry but you have entered too many times and cannot enter again We're sorry but you have entered too many times and cannot enter again until {*date*} Some of the default messages use a variable, {*field_name*}, that automatically inserts the name of the field into the error message. 4. Click Save. Configure Share Story Configure the settings and copy that display to users when your content is shared with other Facebook users. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Builder Basics Pt. 2. You must select the Prompt Share Story option when configuring certain elements in order to create a Form Submission Share Story Popup screen. The Prompt Share Story option is available for the following elements: Form Submit Button Element Poll Element

225 Applications From the Screen View, double-click the appropriate Share Story Popup screen to open it. The name of the screen varies, depending on the element type. For example, for a Poll element in a Mashup application, the screen is named Poll Results Share Story Popup. 2. Select the element, then click the Settings subtab. 3. Fill in the fields: Share Story Name: Use the default variable, ("widget_name"), to automatically insert the name of the widget into the share story. Or, you can specify a new name. This name will be the database field name and appear as the column header in data exports for information collected. Story Link: Use the default variable, ("app_link"), to automatically insert the link to the application into the share story. Or, you can specify a new URL. Story Caption: Specify the share story caption. Note: For tips to increase the number of times users will share your Facebook content, see Facebook Share Copy Best Practices. Story Description: Specify the share story description. Story Image: Drag-and-drop the image from your computer onto the Story Image box. 4. Click Save. Facebook Share Copy Best Practices Tips to increase the number of times users will share your Facebook content.

226 Applications 226 Use the following general guidelines as you write text for your share dialog boxes: Keep it Consistent: Every element of your Facebook page, from your bio, to your photo, to your applications' share dialog boxes, should align with your brand message. Keep the tone of the share copy in line with the rest of your online presence in order to ensure a consistent brand identity. Keep it Friendly: Users will not want to share something if they re prompted to do so in a boring or bossy way. Keep your share copy light and friendly to improve your chances of increasing your shares. Provide Incentives for Sharing: Give fans a reason to share your content by including an incentive to do so in the share copy. For example, Share your entry with your friends in order to increase your chances of winning! Keep it Brief: Provide short and succinct instructions in a share dialog box. Most Facebook users are accustomed to the fast pace of social media and tend to skim the copy. It is important to keep everything short and to the point. In addition to these general guidelines, the following application-specific guidelines should help you increase the number of times users share and use your Facebook applications: Sweepstakes Clearly mention prizes in your copy to provide incentive for users to enter. Include a link that takes users directly to the entry page to make entering the sweepstakes as easy as possible. For example: I just entered to win [prize] in the [name of sweepstakes] sweepstakes! Click here to learn more and to enter for your own chance to win up to [monetary value] in prizes! Poll Include the user's answers to the poll. Include a reason for taking the poll, such as "Let us know what you think about." For example: I just chose [answer] in the [name] poll. Let [brand] know what you think by taking the poll now! Contest Include a description of what you have to do to enter the contest, such as submit a photo or a written essay. Clearly mention prizes in your copy to provide incentive for users to enter. For example: I just submitted my photo to the [brand] contest for a chance to win [prizes]! Submit your own photo and you could win up to [monetary value] in prizes from [brand!] Save a Page Application Periodically save your work in the Application Builder while creating a page application. Or, while editing an active application, save changes without propagating them to an active application that has been published to one or more Facebook pages. 1. Create or edit the page application as desired. 2. At the top of the Application Builder, click Save.

227 Applications 227 Update a Page Application Propagate editing changes you have made to a page application since it was last published to one or more Facebook pages. Note: If the application has not yet been published to one or more Facebook pages, click Publish. For more information, see Publish a Page Application. 1. Create or edit the page application as desired. 2. At the top of the Application Builder, click Update. View an Application's Statistics View statistics for a selected page application, including Views/Engagement, Likes, Shared Stories, and Visits (new/return). Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Apps Overview. 1. Click Applications > Apps Overview to display the Applications page. 2. Locate the application whose stats you want to view. For more information, see Display and Filter Applications. 3. From the drop-down list, select the desired metric to view statistics in numeric and graphical form: Views/Engagement: The Views metric measures the total number of non-unique views of the first screen of an application. The Views metric is similar to the concept of "hits." Depending on the application template, the Engagement metric varies:

228 Applications 228 Form or Sweepstakes templates: The Engagement metric measures the number of form submissions. Mashup templates: The Engagement metric measures the number of poll responses. Contest templates: The Engagement metric measures the number of contest entries. Likes: The Likes metric measures the number of likes caused by a like-gated link, navigation button, or form submission button. Shared Stories: The Shared Stories metric measures the number of shared stories generated by form submission (form and sweepstakes), poll entry, contest entry, or contest vote. Visits (new/return): The Visits metric behaves differently depending on the user's country. The difference is due to differing privacy laws in different countries governing the use of cookies. In The United States, Canada, India, and China, a new visitor is one who has never viewed the application. If a new visitor visits the application for the first time, a new visitor stat is recorded. If a new visitors returns to the application any number of times within four hours after the first visit, a new visitor stat is not recorded. A return visitor is one who has visited the application before, but did not trigger the recording of a stat in the last four hours. If a new visitor returns to the application after four hours, a single return visit stat is recorded. If the same return visitor visits the application again any number of times within four hours of the previous visit, a new return stat is not recorded. If the same return visitor visits the application again four hours after the previous return visit stat was recorded, another return visit stat is recorded. In all other countries, return visitor stats are not currently recorded. 4. Under Pages, click the thumbnail to view the Facebook pages on which the application has been posted. Click to perform tasks such as editing, publishing/unpublishing, renaming, deactivating, cloning, resetting results, and exporting results. For more information, see Manage Applications. Manage Applications Manage existing applications from the Applications Overview page (Applications > Apps Overview). Click the icon at the bottom of an application's tile to perform to access more options. Edit a Page Application Edit an application at any time to change its format, elements, settings, and so forth. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Apps Overview and App Publishing. 1. Click Applications > Apps to display the Applications page. 2. Locate the application you want to edit. For more information, see Display and Filter Applications. 3. On the application's tile, click, then click Edit Application. 4. Follow the instructions in the appropriate sections listed under Step 8 of Create a Page Application.

229 Applications 229 Publish a Page Application Publish a page application to one or more Facebook pages or websites that you manage. Note: It is good practice to publish a newly created application to a test Facebook page before publishing the application to a public-facing page. You can then test the application to ensure that it functions the way you expect and to ensure that the correct information is being collected by Form elements. If you collect form data with an application in a test environment, you can clear its data before publishing the application to a public-facing Facebook page. See Manage Application Results. Note: Publishing a page application does not create a new Story in fans' News Feeds. To publicize your page applications in fans' News Feeds, you should use the Publisher to create posts containing links to your applications. Link posts also ensure that fans using mobile devices view the applications optimized for their environment. For more information, see Publisher and Mobile Device Considerations. To publish an application that your are currently creating or editing 1. In the Application Builder, click Save to save your most recent changes, then click Publish. To publish an existing application from the Applications page 1. Click Applications > Apps Overview. 2. Locate the application you want to publish. 3. For more information, see Display and Filter Applications. On the application's tile, click, then click Publish to display the Application Publishing dialog box. 4. Select an existing registered Facebook application from the drop-down list to associate with this page application, then click Continue to display the Application Publishing dialog box.

230 Applications 230 Note: If you do not have any registered Facebook applications available from the drop-down list, a message displays indicating that you need to request a new application. For more information, see Request a New Facebook Application. 5. Locate the desired Facebook pages or websites to which you want to publish this application: Search: Begin typing the name of the desired pages in the search box. 6. Select the desired Facebook pages or websites to which you want to publish this application: To select all Facebook pages or websites, click the checkbox in the header at the top of the list. To select one or more Facebook pages or websites, select the desired check boxes next to each page or website in the list. 7. (Optional) Select Publish to a Webpage to publish the application to a standalone website. This feature lets you use applications created in Social to engage social audiences outside of Facebook, letting you leverage your entire social presence. After publishing the application to a website, application builders can easily retrieve iframe code so that the application can be embedded within websites. Note: Non-fan splash pages and like-gating is disabled for applications published to websites. a) In the pop-up box that displays after selecting the Publish to a Webpage option, append a unique, customizable suffix to the preset URL. After the application is published to the specified URL, you can click the link to view the application. b) To obtain iframe code for your website developers to use on websites, click Get Code, then copy the code and give to your website developers.

231 Applications 231 If you publish an application to your Facebook page and also to your website, you can differentiate data from both pages. For example, if you publish a poll to both locations, when you use the Export Results feature to view the results, the spreadsheet contains a column titled Network. Entries in this column designate the location that the data came from (Facebook, Website, or Mobile). You can also determine which Facebook page or website the results are coming from. 8. Click Publish. Request a New Facebook Application Submit a request to your Adobe Social Account Consultant for a new Facebook application. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Publishing. When you create a new page application in Adobe Social, the application exists only in Social, not in Facebook. Before you can publish an application to Facebook, your Adobe Account Manager must manually create an application in Facebook. After the application is created in Facebook, you can then associate the application in Social with the application in Facebook. Your Account Manager will inform you when the application in Facebook is ready so that you can continue publishing the application. You can request a new application while you are publishing an existing application or at any time from the Facebook Applications page. Note: We recommend that you request a new Facebook application early in the application-building process. You can request several applications and have them ready to associate with future applications that you create in Social. To request a new application while publishing an existing application 1. While performing Step 5 in Publish a Page Application, click the click here link to request a new Facebook application. To request a new application from the Facebook Applications page 1. From the left navigation menu, click Applications, then click Configure Facebook Apps to display the Facebook Apps page. 2. Click the Request New Facebook App button in the upper-right corner. Unpublish a Page Application Unpublish a page application to automatically remove the application from all Facebook pages to which is was published. Unpublishing an application does not remove it from the active applications list on the Display and Filter Applications page. If you want to remove an application from Facebook pages and also remove it from the Applications page, use the Deactivate option instead. 1. Click Applications > Apps. 2. Locate the application you want to unpublish. For more information, see Display and Filter Applications.

232 Applications On the application's tile, click 4. Click OK to confirm the action., then click Unpublish. Rename a Page Application Rename an existing page application to give it a new name. When you create an application, you might not know what you want to name it. This option lets you create an application with a temporary name, such as "Form1," and then later rename it to a more appropriate name. 1. Click Applications > Apps. 2. Locate the application you want to rename. 3. For more information, see Display and Filter Applications. On the application's tile, click the application's tile. 4. Specify the new name, then click Save., then click Rename to display the a name field and Save button at the top of 5. (Optional) In the App Description field, specify a new description for the application. Deactivate a Page Application Deactivate a page application to automatically remove the application from all Facebook pages to which is was published. Deactivating an application also removes it from the active applications list on the Display and Filter Applications page. If you want to remove an application from Facebook pages, but still view it on the Applications page, use the Unpublish option instead. 1. Click Applications > Apps. 2. Locate the application you want to deactivate. 3. For more information, see Display and Filter Applications. On the application's tile, click 4. Click OK to confirm the action., then click Deactivate. Clone a Page Application Duplicate an application that you can then edit to create a new, similar application. Cloning an application saves time if you have already created successful applications and you want to create a similar application by changing just a few elements. 1. Click Applications > Apps. 2. Locate the application you want to clone. 3. For more information, see Display and Filter Applications. On the application's tile, click, then click Clone to display the Clone Application dialog box.

233 Applications Specify a name and description for the cloned application. A descriptive name and accurate description becomes very useful if you create numerous applications. The name and description will help you locate applications faster for editing, publishing, and so forth. The description is for internal use only. 5. From the Owner drop-down list, select the owner of the application. You can select an individual user or a user group. If you select a user group, any member of that user group can edit, publish, unpublish, or deactivate the application. 6. Review the information in the two Facebook links, then select the check box to indicate that you agree with the terms imposed by Facebook. 7. Click Clone. 8. Follow the instructions in the appropriate sections listed under Step 8 of Create a Page Application to edit the application. Manage Application Results Export application statistics and data collected via form fields to a Microsoft Excel file.you can also clear all collected data or reset the results of an application. 1. Click Applications > Apps to display the Applications page. 2. Locate the desired application. For more information, see Display and Filter Applications. 3. On the application's tile, click, then select an option: Reset Results: Clear all collected data or reset the results of an application. This option is helpful, for example, to clear the data collected during your internal testing process. When you are ready to publish the application and start collecting real user data, you can clear test data using this option. Note: Use this option with caution and contact Customer Support with any questions. Export Results: Export data collected via form fields to a Microsoft Excel file so you can analyze the results or process the results further. This option exports application statistics, such as Views/Engagement, Likes, Shared Stories, and Visits. For more information about these statistics, see Glossary: Application Builder.

234 Applications 234 You could also use this option to review all data collected by a form application. You could then use this data to pick a winner for a sweepstakes or to review other data users have entered into form fields. Configure Facebook Applications Use the Facebook Apps page view a list of your applications, along with each application's Facebook ID, status, application name, and canvas width. You can also use this page to request a new Facebook application or to edit an application's configuration settings. 1. Click Applications > Configure Facebook Apps. 2. (Conditional) Click Request New Facebook App to submit a request to your Adobe Social Account Consultant for a new Facebook application. 3. For more information, see Request a New Facebook Application. Access the filter options by clicking above the left navigation rail. 4. Locate the desired application in the list by using the following methods: Search By Name: Search for an application by its name. Start typing in the box and the list displays only those applications that begin with what you typed. Add Edited Dates: Use the drop-down list to select a time frame: All Edited Dates, Last Day, Last 3 Days, Last Week, Last Month, Last Quarter, or Last Year. For example, if you select Last Month, all applications that were created or edited in the last month display in the list. All Publish Dates: Use the drop-down list to select a time frame: All Publish Dates, Last Day, Last 3 Days, Last Week, Last Month, Last Quarter, or Last Year. For example, if you select Last 3 Days, all applications that were published in the last three days display in the list. 5. View the application's details. You can configure a new Facebook application or edit a previously configured application's settings. Configure or Edit Facebook Application Settings Configure or edit an application's settings, including its name, tab name, canvas width, images and icons, application restrictions, and links for privacy policies and terms and conditions. 1. Click Applications > Configure Facebook Apps.

235 Applications (Conditional) To initially configure an application, in the Name column, click Configure Facebook App. 3. (Conditional) To edit a previously configured application's settings, in the Options column, click Edit. 4. Fill in the fields: Application Name: When you or someone in your organization created the application, its name was specified. You can change the name of the application if you desire. For example, if you recently completed a "Spring" campaign and you want to use the same Facebook Application ID for your "Summer" campaign, you can specify a new application name. You cannot edit the Facebook Application ID. Default Tab Name: Specify the text that displays below the tab image on your facebook page, as shown in the following example:

236 Applications 236 Canvas Width: Specify the desired canvas width: 520 px or 810 px (the default). Drop Your Logo Here: Drop the desired image into the box. This image must be exactly 75x75 pixels or it will not render on Facebook. The maximum upload size is 5 MB. This logo displays in users' News Feeds with the application, as shown in the following example: Drop Your Icon Here: Drop the desired image into the box. This image must be exactly 16x16 pixels or it will not render on Facebook. The maximum upload size is 5 MB. This icon displays in posts as the icon for the publisher and in Facebook permission dialog boxes. Drop Your Page Tab Image Here: Drop the desired image into the box. The maximum upload size is 5 MB. You image will be resized to 111x74 pixels. This page tab image displays at the top of your Facebook page, as shown in the following example:

237 Applications 237 Privacy Policy: Specify the URL to your brand's privacy policy. Facebook requires that each application provides a link to a privacy policy. Terms and Conditions: Specify the URL to your terms and conditions. Facebook requires that each application provides a link to terms and conditions. The Privacy and Terms and Conditions links display on Facebook elements that access users' profile data. Add Application Restrictions: Select this option to display the following options: Country: Add one or more countries to specify that your application will only be visible to people in the listed countries. Separate countries with a comma (,). If no countries are listed, your application will be visible to people located in all countries. You are responsible for setting the proper country restrictions to ensure that the content of your application is appropriate for the country or countries where you allow it to be visible. Age: Specify the age range that you want to use for the application. Selecting an age restriction means that anyone under or over the specified age will not be able to find your application in search, on friends' profiles, or view the content in other ways. Alcohol: The Alcohol-Related age restriction sets the minimum age based on the location of the user. The Alcohol-Related age restriction is for convenience, and Facebook does not represent that by using this setting your application will be legally compliant in all countries where your application is visible. You are responsible for setting the proper legally compliant age restrictions for each country where your application is visible. If age restrictions and alcohol restrictions conflict, the most restrictive setting is applied. 5. Click Update Facebook Application. Manage Audiences Create one application with multiple audience combinations using the App Audiences feature in the Application Builder. App Audiences are assigned to each element to target different versions of the same application to different viewers. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Audiences. For example, if you have a logo specific to the United Kingdom, you can add the logo to a screen in your application, then assign an App Audience to that image element so that only users in the United Kingdom see the logo. Application users in other locations will see everything on the application screen except for that logo. Or, you could configure a text element to display "Bienvenue!" to viewers who have French set as their Facebook language setting. All other users will see "Welcome!" instead. Note: Some customers experience problems when they publish an application using app audiences and then attempt to test the application. If the person does not belong to the demographics specified in the app audience, he or she cannot see the application. A workaround is to remove the app audience settings during testing and then reapply the settings.

238 Applications 238 To use the App Audiences feature 1. Contact Adobe to Enable the App Audiences Permission 2. Create and Configure App Audiences 3. Enable App Audiences on an Application 4. Assign Audiences to Elements Within an Application Contact Adobe to Enable the App Audiences Permission Contact your Adobe Account Manager to enable the App Audiences functionality.your Account Manager will ensure that the desired users in your account are assigned to the appropriate user group with permissions to access the App Audiences feature. Create and Configure App Audiences 1. Click Applications > Manage Audiences. 2. Click Create Audience. 3. Fill in the fields: Audience Name: Specify a descriptive name for the audience, for example, "Germany/German." Choose Owner (Individual or Group): Select the desired owner for the App Audiences. The owner is the user or user group that has permission to edit the App Audiences settings. Locale: Select Locale. Language: Specify the desired languages for the audience. When you start typing the name of a language, languages matching your input display. Country: Specify the desired countries for the audience. When you start typing the name of a country, countries matching your input display. 4. Click Save. Enable App Audiences on an Application After you enable the App Audience permission, create and configure audiences, you must enable App Audiences for each application. For more information, see App Audiences. Assign Audiences to Elements Within an Application For users who own only one audience 1. Drag-and-Drop an element onto the Artboard of a screen in an application. The element automatically defaults to become associated with the one owned audience. For users who own multiple audiences 1. Drag-and-Drop an element onto the Artboard of a screen in an application. 2. Select the element to highlight it, then click the Settings tab. 3. From the Audience drop-down list, assign the desired audience to the element. 4. From the App Audience drop-down list above the Settings tab, assign the desired audience to the application.

239 Applications 239 Integrate Scene7 Rich Media Viewers with Social Use a Code Block element in an application to embed Adobe Scene7 Rich Media viewers into page applications. Note: The Code Block element is advanced functionality. Please use at your own risk. Any code used though the code block is not supported by our platform and cannot be troubleshot by our platform team.we recommend rigorously testing your applications when using any custom code via the Code Block element. You can integrate the following viewers: Note: For examples of each viewer, see Sample Scene7 Rich Media Viewers. Viewer: Gallery with Zoom Spin Viewer Mixed Media Zoom Viewer Video ecatalog Description: Lets users view a gallery of object images. Users can click any image and then zoom in to see the image in greater detail. Lets users simulate the real-world act of turning an object to examine it. Users can view items from any angle. Lets users enjoy an integrated viewing experience that can include images, Image Sets, Swatch Sets, Spin Sets, and videos. Lets users interactively view high-resolution details in images. For example, users can see the colors, options, angles, and details of an image in a dynamic, fully configurable, integrated viewer. Users can inspect images at close range and pan images at high resolutions to examine them closely. Zooming gives users an engaging, informative, and interactive viewing experience. Lets users enjoy high-quality video experiences on multiple screens, including desktops, mobile devices, and tablets. Lets users view a digital, web version of print material, such as a catalog, brochure, flyer, product manual, or advertising circular. This viewer simulates the experience of reading printed material. For more information about Scene7, see the Adobe Scene7 Help. Implement Template Code Steps to add template code for Scene7 Viewers to the Code Block element. 1. While creating a page application, insert a Code Block element. For more information, see Code Block Element. 2. Click the Text icon ( ) at the bottom of the following code to copy it in text format. <div id="name of div">loading </div> <script type="text/javascript" language="javascript"> $(document).ready(function(){ if(co && CO.page_id){ dothis(); } }); function dothis(){ var html = '<ob'+ 'ject classid="clsid:d27cdb6e-ae6d-11cf-96b "' + ' codebase=" + ' id="is7companys7company/asset" width="width" height="height" align="">' + '<param name="movie" value="s7 viewer SWF URL">' + '<param name="flashvars" value="asset=s7 company/asset"> ' + '<param name="fullscreenonselection" value="true">' + '<param name="menu" value="false">' + '<param name="quality" value="high">' + '<param

240 Applications 240 name="wmode" value="opaque">' + '<param name="scale" value="noscale">' + '<param name="salign" value="lt">' + '<param name="allowfullscreen" value="true"> ' + '<param name="bgcolor" value="#ffffff">' + '<param name="allowscriptaccess" value="always">' + '<em' + 'bed src="s7 viewer SWF URL" fullscreenonselection="true" allowscriptaccess="always" wmode="opaque" quality="high" bgcolor="#ffffff" '+width="width" height="height" SWLIVECONNECT="true" flashvars="asset=s7 company/asset" ' + ' name="is7companys7company/asset" type="application/x-shockwave-flash" menu="false" allowfullscreen="true" pluginpage=" + '</em' + 'bed>' + '</ob' + 'ject>'; $('#ecatalog').html(html); } </script> 3. Edit the highlighted variables in the above code from information from the Scene7 system. See Sample Template to see an example of a fully completed template. 4. Paste the edited code into the Code Block element in the page application. Sample Template Example of a fully completed template. <div id="ecatalog">loading </div> <script type="text/javascript" language="javascript"> $(document).ready(function(){ if(co && CO.page_id){ dothis(); } }); function dothis(){ var html = '<ob'+ 'ject classid="clsid:d27cdb6e-ae6d-11cf-96b "' + ' codebase=" + ' id="iportalcoportalco/adobescene7_overview_us" width="520" height="660" align="">' + '<param name="movie" value="htp:/sample.scene7.com/skins/scene7sharedasets/desktopviewers-as3/ecatalogviewer.swf?company=portalco&contentrot=/skins/&videoserverurl=rtmp:/s7strmn2.scene7.com/s7strmn2/e2&vidserverurl=/e2/&comserverurl=rtmp:/s7strmn2.scene7.com/s7strmn2/e2&config=scene7sharedasets/ecatalog_flash&serverurl=htp:/sample.scene7.com/is/image/&stagesize=1060,60&company=portalco">' + '<param name="flashvars" value="asset=portalco/adobescene7_overview_us"> ' + '<param name="fullscreenonselection" value="true">' + '<param name="menu" value="false">' + '<param name="quality" value="high">' + '<param name="wmode" value="opaque">' + '<param name="scale" value="noscale">' + '<param name="salign" value="lt">' + '<param name="allowfullscreen" value="true"> ' + '<param name="bgcolor" value="#ffffff">' + '<param name="allowscriptaccess" value="always">' + '<em' + 'bed src="htp:/sample.scene7.com/skins/scene7sharedasets/desktopviewers-as3/ecatalogviewer.swf?company=portalco&contentrot=/skins/&videoserverurl=rtmp:/s7strmn2.scene7.com/s7strmn2/e2&vidserverurl=/e2/&comserverurl=rtmp:/s7strmn2.scene7.com/s7strmn2/e2&config=scene7sharedasets/ecatalog_flash&serverurl=htp:/sample.scene7.com/is/image/&stagesize=1060,60&company=portalco" fullscreenonselection="true" allowscriptaccess="always" wmode="opaque" quality="high" bgcolor="#ffffff" '+width="520" height="660" SWLIVECONNECT="true" flashvars="asset=portalco/adobescene7_overview_us" ' + ' name="iportalcoportalco/adobescene7_overview_us" type="application/x-shockwave-flash" menu="false" allowfullscreen="true" pluginpage=" + '</em' + 'bed>' + '</ob' + 'ject>'; $('#ecatalog').html(html); } </script> Using Custom CSS Use a Custom Style Sheet (CSS) to have more control over the appearance of your page applications. You can apply a CSS to individual elements on each screen. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: App Builder Advanced. One of the purposes of the Application Builder is that you do not need to have extensive CSS knowledge to style page applications. Before using the Custom CSS feature, you or your designer should have a good knowledge of CSS.

241 Applications 241 Note: The CSS is advanced functionality. Please use at your own risk. Customer Support does not provide assistance with Custom Style Sheets should you encounter problems. We recommend rigorously testing your applications when using any custom code. 1. While creating or editing a page application, on the Artboard, select the desired element. A dark blue box surrounds the element after you click the element. 2. Click the Format subtab. 3. Click the Custom CSS link to open the Edit Custom CSS box. 4. Type or copy and paste the CSS code into the box. You can resize the box, if needed. Your CSS code is automatically checked to ensure that it is valid. Mobile Device Considerations Create and promote page applications appropriately for users accessing Facebook from mobile devices. All newly created and existing page applications display appropriately on mobile devices. Social supports all page application templates and elements for viewing on mobile devices. For information specific to creating applications for display on mobile devices with smaller screens, such a phones, see Create an Application Using Mobile Layout. Note, because mobile users can access Facebook page applications only from the newsfeed or brand timeline, applications must be actively promoted through publishing, featured posts on your brand's timeline, and promoted posts. To publish your application to the Facebook newsfeed using the Social Publisher, while creating a Facebook post, select the desired application from the Action Link drop-down list. For more information, see the Action Link row in Publisher. You can then configure the post's targeting and campaign options as desired. When Facebook users Share or Like stories generated by the application, the mobile-friendly link is used so that viral views render properly if accessed from mobile devices as well. Create an Application Using Mobile Layout Create two versions of the same application: the Default Layout and a Phone Layout. One version displays appropriately on devices with larger screens, such as desktop or tablets. The second version displays appropriately

242 Applications 242 on devices with smaller screens, such as smart phones. The two versions of the same application use different assets (buttons and images, for example) for display on different devices. 1. While creating an application, click Preferences at the top of the Application Builder window. 2. Click the App Settings tab. 3. Toggle Use Mobile Layout to Yes. After you enable this feature, a new drop-down list displays at the top of the artboard of each application screen that lets you toggle between the Default Layout and the Phone Layout. When you select the Phone Layout view, the artboard dimensions change to 320 x 480. This gives you an idea of the finished screen size on which the application will be viewed by users.

243 Applications Add and configure elements as desired for each layout, using elements appropriate for each version size. For more information, see Add and Configure Elements and Format Elements. 5. Click Save to periodically save your work in the Application Builder while creating a page application. Or, while editing an active application, save changes without propagating them to an active application that has been published to one or more Facebook pages. Or Click Update to propagate editing changes you have made to a page application since it was last published to one or more Facebook pages. Or Click Publish to publish a page application to one or more Facebook pages or websites. Glossary: Application Builder Terms and definitions used in the Adobe Social Application Builder. Term Alpha Only Error Popup Definition The default popup screen that displays if application users enter non-alpha characters in a field that requires alpha characters. See Configure Error Popup Message. Background Image A background image displays on each page application screen. The image displays behind the screen's elements, such as text, buttons, etc.

244 Applications 244 Term Definition See Add a Background Image. Basic Elements Standard elements you can drag-and-drop from the Basic Elements section onto the Artboard View of a screen to build content within an application. Basic elements include Facebook Name, Image, Button, Twitter Feed, Video Player, Text, Facebook Profile Pic, and Code Block. See Basic Elements. Button Click Image While creating a page application, you can upload a custom button. The Button Click Image is what displays when application users click the button image and before the application goes to the next step. See Upload a Custom Button or Upload a Custom Form Submit Button. Button Element An element available from the Basic Elements section that lets you add a button to your application screen. See Button Element. Button Hover Image While creating a page application, you can upload a custom button. The Button Hover Image is what application users see when they hover their mouse pointer over the button image. See Upload a Custom Button or Upload a Custom Form Submit Button. Button Image While creating a page application, you can upload a custom button. The Button Image is the initial button the application users click to perform the defined function. See Upload a Custom Button or Upload a Custom Form Submit Button. Check Box Group Element An element available from the Form Elements section that lets you add a Check Box group to your screen. Check boxes let users select multiple options. See Check Box Group Element. Code Block Element An element available from the Basic Elements section that lets you add a field that contains JavaScript or embed code to add advanced functionality to that area of the screen. For example, you can use a Code Block element to embed a video in an application. See Code Block Element. Date Error Popup The default popup screen that displays if application users fail to enter a date in the mm/dd/yyyy format. See Configure Error Popup Message.

245 Applications 245 Term Date Group Element Definition An element available from the Form Elements section that lets you add an editable label and drop-down lists that let users specify the month, date, and year. See Date Group Element. Deactivate a Page Application Deactivate a page application to automatically remove the application from all Facebook pages to which is was published. Deactivating an application also removes it from the active applications list on the Applications page. See Deactivate a Page Application. Element An element available from the Form Elements section that lets you add an field to an application to collect users' addresses. This element is available on the Mashup template only. See Element. Error Popup The default popup screen that displays if application users enter data in an field that does not follow the typical address format. See Configure Error Popup Message. Error Message Popup Messages that display in a pop-up window if users fail to enter information into a required field in a form or if they enter the wrong type of information. You can edit the text that displays by default. See Configure Error Popup Message. Export Results Data collected via form fields and exported into Microsoft Excel files for analysis and further personal processing. See Manage Application Results. Facebook Profile Pic Element An element available from the Basic Elements section that lets you add a box on the application's screen that will display the Facebook profile picture of the user who views the application in Facebook. See Facebook Profile Pic Element. Facebook Name Element An element available from the Basic Elements section that automatically adds the first name of the user who views the page application in Facebook. See Facebook Name Element. Form Elements Standard elements you can drag-and-drop from the Form Elements section onto the Artboard View of a screen to build content within an application.

246 Applications 246 Term Definition Form elements include Date Group, Check Box, Radio Button Group, Form Submit Button, Pull Down, Text Area, Text Field, , and Poll. You must use a Form Submit Button so that data can be collected and then exported for further analysis. See Form Elements. Form Page Application A Facebook page application used to collect user information. You can use a form application, for example, to sign people up for a mailing list or to receive a newsletter. See Create a Page Application. Form Submit Button Element An element available from the Form Elements section that lets you add a Submit button to your screen. If you are designing a form to collect data, you must include this element. See Form Submit Button Element. Image Element An element available from the Basic Elements section that lets you display an image in your application. See Image Element. Initial Screen for Fans At the App Template level of the app builder, you can check the box for "Have a different screen for fans?" on the Settings tab to add another screen to the app for people who are already fans of the Facebook Page. A Fan Splash Screen will get added to the Screen View for the app. The Default screen will remain in the app for non-fans, and each can be designed separately. Like Gate Navigation Likes When configuring certain elements, the Like Gate Navigation option requires application users to Like your Facebook page, if they are not already a fan, before proceeding with participation in the application. The Likes metric measures the total number of users who have clicked the Like button through the like gate popup on the page or application. See View an Application's Statistics. Mashup Page Application A Facebook page application used to conduct a poll or to collect addresses for a newsletter or to receive special offers. A mashup is a generic, single-screen application, although you can add additional screens. See Create a Page Application. Max Entries Error Popup The default popup screen that displays if application users try to enter a sweepstakes too many times. See Configure Error Popup Message.

247 Applications 247 Term Next App Template Definition When editing a text link or button, the Next App Template option allows navigation from that element to the next application in the series, if there is more that one App Template at the App Template level. See Text Element and Button Element. Numbers Only Error Popup The default popup screen that appears if application user enter characters other than numeric digits in a field that calls for numbers only. See Configure Error Popup Message. Persistence Phone Number Error Popup The Persistence option makes that element carry over exactly the same on all screens in the application. Any changes made to a persistent element on one screen automatically apply to all screens. The default popup screen that displays if application users enter data in an phone field that does not follow the typical phone number format. See Configure Error Popup Message. Poll Element Prompt Share Story An element available from the Form Elements section that lets you add a poll to an application to collect users' answers to questions. This element is available on the Mashup or Poll template. The Prompt Share Story option on a Form Submit Button element and Poll element let you configure the settings and copy that display to users when your content is shared with other Facebook users. See Configure Share Story. Pull Down Element An element available from the Form Elements section that lets you add a pull-down element (drop-down list) on a page application's screen. See Pull Down Element. Radio Button Group Element An element available from the Form Elements section that lets you add a Radio group to your screen. Radio buttons let users select a single option. See Radio Button Group Element. Reset Results Clears all data collected or reset the results of an application. Use Reset Results with caution and contact Support with any questions. See Manage Application Results. Required Field Error Popup The default popup screen that displays if application users fail to enter data in a field that you specify as required.

248 Applications 248 Term Definition See Configure Error Popup Message. Shared Stories The Shared Stories metric measures the total number of users sharing stories from within your application. See View an Application's Statistics. Stacking Order The stacking order determines which element is "on top of" other elements on a page application screen, and therefore, which element is visible when two or more elements overlap. See Format Elements. Sticky You can specify that an existing application is sticky by selecting the Sticky check box on its application tile on the Applications page. Note that the Sticky setting is for display purposes only. See Display and Filter Applications. Support Active Style When configuring a text element that contains a link, the Support Active Style option causes the link color to change if users clicks the link. See Text Element. Support Hover Style When configuring a text element that contains a link, the Support Hover Style option causes the link color to change if users hover the mouse pointer over the link. See Text Element. Support Visited Style When configuring a text element that contains a link, the Support Visited Style option causes the link color to change if users have already clicked the link to show that the link has been visited. See Text Element. Sweepstakes Page Application Text Area Element A Facebook page application used to drive fan growth and engagement. See Create a Page Application. An element available from the Form Elements section that lets you add a text area box for users to type text into a form. See Text Area Element. Text Element An element available from the Basic Elements section that lets you add text to an application screen. See Text Element.

249 Applications 249 Term Text Field Element Definition An element available from the Form Elements section that lets you add a text field for users to type text into a form. See Text Field Element. Time Period Max Entries Error Popup The default popup screen that displays if application users try to enter a sweepstakes too many times during a specified time frame. See Configure Error Popup Message. Twitter Feed Element An element available from the Basic Elements section that lets you display a Twitter Feed from within your application. See Twitter Element. Unpublish a Page Application Unpublish a page application to automatically remove the application from all Facebook pages to which is was published. Unpublishing an application does not remove it from the active applications list on the Applications page. See Unpublish a Page Application. Video Player Element An element available from the Basic Elements section that lets you show YouTube videos from within your application. See Video Player Element. Views/Engagement The Views metric measures the total number of users who have viewed the page or application. The Engagement metric measures the number of users who have taken a specific action within an application template (for example, poll vote, contest entry upload, form/sweeps submit, coupon redemption, etc). See View an Application's Statistics. Visits (new/return) The Visits metric measures the number of first-time users or return users who used the application. It is a unique number for a four-hour time period. After the first visit to the application, visitor will be counted as return. Does not matter if fan or non-fan. See View an Application's Statistics.

250 Moderation 250 Moderation Moderate posts and comments across social properties from within one convenient workflow. You can create and configure moderation feeds to facilitate moderation of escalated issues and posts on owned Facebook pages, LinkedIn group or company pages, Twitter accounts, and your own social community designed with Adobe Experience Manager (AEM) Social Communities. In addition to the features discussed in this section, you can also use the Moderation Overview dashboard to get a complete view of your organization's moderation efforts.you can view moderation statistics for individual members of your team, see how long it takes your team to resolve escalated issues, determine which time of day most issues are escalated, compare the number of unresolved issues to resolved issues, and more. For more information, see Moderation Overview Dashboard. Note: The legacy Twitter moderation tool has been deprecated. Use the unified moderation tool to moderate Twitter content. The legacy Facebook moderation tool is being deprecated, but you can still access it from the left navigation menu. After you are comfortable with the new workflows for Facebook moderation within unified moderation, contact your Social Account Manager to have the legacy Facebook moderation tool removed from your configuration.you should not use both moderation tools simultaneously.your account admin should consult the Moderation Tool Migration Guide to decide which tool to use. If you have further questions, contact your Social Account Manager. Unified Moderation Moderate posts, tweets, and comments across social platforms from within one convenient workflow. You can create and configure moderation feeds to facilitate moderation of escalated issues and content on owned Facebook pages, LinkedIn group or company pages, Twitter accounts, and your own social communities designed with Adobe Experience Manager (AEM) Social Communities. Images and videos display inline in Facebook, Twitter, and LinkedIn feeds. Create a New Moderation Feed Create a new moderation feed that displays posts from a single social platform (Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, or AEM Social Communities) or posts that have been escalated from within Social. You can then display this feed in a list layout (single column) or in a column layout (side-by-side columns). You can create as many feeds as necessary. However, you can display as many as ten feeds at a time. 1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation. 2. Click, then select the desired feed type: Escalations, Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, or Social Communities. The configuration options vary depending on the selected feed type. Some types display two tabs (Filters and Settings) and other types display only one tab (Filters). 3. Provide a descriptive name for the feed. A descriptive name helps you quickly locate a specific feed if you have many saved feeds. The name can also help you quickly understand the feed's purpose and settings. For example, you could create a filter that includes content with positive sentiment scores and high follower numbers, and name the filter "Influencers." Or, you could create a filter of escalations assigned to you and name it "My Escalations."

251 Moderation Configure the feed: Configure an Escalation Moderation Feed Configure or edit a feed to facilitate moderation of posts that have been escalated from within Social. You can configure the following filters for the feed: Filter Escalation Users Description Select the desired option: Escalated to Users: Display only posts that have been escalated from within Social to individual users or user groups. Click the Search for User box, then select one or more users or user groups. Escalated by Users: Display only posts that have been escalated from within Social by individual users or user groups. Click the Search for User box, then select one or more users or user groups. Escalation Status Select the desired option: All: Display all posts that have been escalated from with Social, regardless of the current escalation status. New: Display only new posts that have been escalated from within Social. If you select this option, posts that have been claimed or resolved do not display. Claimed: Display only posts that have been escalated from within Social and have been claimed by a user or user group for resolution. Resolved: Display only posts that have been escalated from within Social and have been resolved. Escalation Priority Select the desired option: All: Display all posts that have been escalated from within Social, regardless of the escalation priority. High: Display only posts that have been escalated from within Social and have been marked as high priority. Normal: Display only posts that have been escalated from within Social and have been marked as normal priority. Sentiment Select a sentiment range to display only posts with the selected range: Negative, Neutral, or Positive. You can determine each post's sentiment range by viewing the colored bar along the left side of each post in the moderation feed. For example, a post with positive sentiment has a green bar along the left side of the post with a + sign. For more information, see Understanding Sentiment Scores.

252 Moderation 252 Filter Moderation Status Description Select one or more status types to display only posts that have been marked with the selected moderation statuses: Read, Unread, Spam, Not Spam, Flagged, and Moderation Error. Content with a status of Moderation Error means that something went wrong and the content could not be posted. For example, if you reply to a post and the platform (Facebook or Twitter, for example) is down, the content will not be posted. You can use the Moderation Filter to find failed content and take corrective action. Time Range Select the desired range to filter the feed: Last Hour, Last 12 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week, 1 Month, or All. Note that each option is a rolling range. For example, if you select 1 Week, whenever you access the feed, it always displays content for the previous seven days. Language Emotions Select the desired language to display only content posted in the selected language. You can display posts in all languages or you can specify an individual language.you can select only one individual language for each feed. Select one or more emotions to display only posts that have been designated as having the selected emotions: Admiration, Anger, Anticipation, Disgust, Fear, Joy, Sadness, and Surprise. You can determine the emotion associated with a post by viewing the colored dot and its corresponding emotion underneath each post in the feed. For example, a post associated with Admiration has a green dot with the word "Admiration" at the bottom of the post in the feed. Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed Configure or edit a feed to facilitate moderation of posts that have been posted to a single owned Facebook page. You can also assign the feed to one or more users or groups. You can configure the following filters for the feed: Filter Feed Type Description Select an option: Page Posts: Display only content that has been posted to an owned Facebook page. Private Messages: Display only private messages that have been posted to an owned Facebook page. These messages are not seen publicly. Audiences: Display only content that has been posted to an owned Facebook page from users in a specified Facebook audience. This feature helps large organizations moderate Facebook posts more efficiently using a targeted approach. For example, an organization might have a global page and want to create individual moderation feeds for specific geographical regions. Instead of creating a single feed, you can create

253 Moderation 253 Filter Description Facebook Page (Page Posts and Private Messages feed types only) several feeds representing different regions. You can also create different moderation feeds using audiences across pages and page groups. Select the owned Facebook page whose posts you want to moderate from within this feed. Facebook Audience (Audiences feet type only) Sentiment Select the Facebook audience whose posts you want to moderate from within this feed. Select a sentiment range to display only posts with the selected range: Negative, Neutral, or Positive. You can determine each post's sentiment range by viewing the colored bar along the left side of each post in the moderation feed. For example, a post with positive sentiment has a green bar along the left side of the post with a + sign. For more information, see Understanding Sentiment Scores. Moderation Status Select one or more status types to display only posts that have been marked with the selected moderation statuses: Read, Unread, Spam, Not Spam, Flagged, and Moderation Error. Content with a status of Moderation Error means that something went wrong and the content could not be posted. For example, if you reply to a post and the platform (Facebook or Twitter, for example) is down, the content will not be posted. You can use the Moderation Filter to find failed content and take corrective action. Time Range Select the desired range to filter the feed: Last Hour, Last 12 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week, 1 Month, or All. Note that each option is a rolling range. For example, if you select 1 Week, whenever you access the feed, it always displays content for the previous seven days. Post Author Language Emotions Select the desired post author: All, By Me, or By Others. Select the desired language to display only content posted in the selected language. You can display posts in all languages or you can specify an individual language. You can select only one individual language for each feed. Select one or more emotions to display only posts that have been designated as having the selected emotions: Admiration, Anger, Anticipation, Disgust, Fear, Joy, Sadness, and Surprise. You can determine the primary emotion associated with a post by viewing the colored dot and its corresponding emotion underneath each post in the feed. For example, a post associated with Admiration has a green dot with the word "Admiration" at the bottom of the post in the feed.

254 Moderation 254 You can configure the following settings for the feed: Filter Feed Assignment Description Assign this feed to one or more users or groups. Configure a Facebook Comments Moderation Feed Configure or edit a feed to facilitate moderation of an individual Facebook post and its comments. For example, you might want to more closely monitor a specific Facebook post so that you can more effectively moderate that post and reply to any comments that it subsequently receives. 1. From with a Facebook moderation feed, click the View x Comments link at the bottom of an individual post that has comments to expand the post and its comments. 2. Click at the top of that feed to create a new moderation feed for that post and its comments.

255 Moderation (Conditional) Click to configure the feed. For more information, see Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed. 4. Moderate the feed as you would any other Facebook moderation feed. For more information, see Moderate an Individual Facebook Post. Configure a Twitter Moderation Feed Configure or edit a feed to facilitate moderation of tweets that have been tweeted to one or more Twitter accounts. You can also specify the default Twitter account to use to reply to tweets and assign the feed to one or more users or groups. You can configure the following filters for the feed: Filter Feed Type Description Select an option: Listening Rules: Display only tweets that have been captured by listening rules that you have configured in Social. For more information, see Listening Rules. Direct Messages: Display direct messages.

256 Moderation 256 Filter Description For important information about direct-message feed rate limits, see Direct Message a Twitter User. Properties Listening Rules Select one or more Twitter accounts whose tweets you want to moderate from within this feed. Select one or more listening rules. Only those tweets captured by the selected rules display in the feed. For more information, see Listening Rules. Sentiment Select a sentiment range to display only posts with the selected range: Negative, Neutral, or Positive. You can determine each post's sentiment range by viewing the colored bar along the left side of each post in the moderation feed. For example, a post with positive sentiment has a green bar along the left side of the post with a + sign. For more information, see Understanding Sentiment Scores. Moderation Status Select one or more status types to display only posts that have been marked with the selected moderation statuses: Read, Unread, Spam, Not Spam, Flagged, and Moderation Error. Content with a status of Moderation Error means that something went wrong and the content could not be posted. For example, if you reply to a post and the platform (Facebook or Twitter, for example) is down, the content will not be posted. You can use the Moderation Filter to find failed content and take corrective action. Time Range Select the desired range to filter the feed: Last Hour, Last 12 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week, 1 Month or All. Note that each option is a rolling range. For example, if you select 1 Week, whenever you access the feed, it always displays content for the previous seven days. Text Search Followers Author Search Language Specify the text that you want to use to filter this feed. Only tweets that contain the specified text display in the feed. Select one or more ranges. Only tweets made by users with the specified number of followers display in the feed. Specified the desired Twitter handle whose posts you want to moderate from within this feed. You do not need to use symbol in the Twitter user's handle. Select the desired language to display only content posted in the selected language. You can display posts in all languages or you can specify an individual language. You can select only one individual language for each feed.

257 Moderation 257 Filter Emotions Description Select one or more emotions to display only posts that have been designated as having the selected emotions: Admiration, Anger, Anticipation, Disgust, Fear, Joy, Sadness, and Surprise. You can determine the emotion associated with a post by viewing the colored dot and its corresponding emotion underneath each post in the feed. For example, a post associated with Admiration has a green dot with the word "Admiration" at the bottom of the post in the feed. You can configure the following settings for the feed: Filter Default Reply Account Feed Assignment Description Specify the default Twitter account that you want to use to reply to tweets from within this moderation feed. Assign this feed to one or more users or groups. Configure a LinkedIn Moderation Feed Configure or edit a feed to facilitate moderation of posts that have been posted to a LinkedIn company page or group. You can also assign the feed to one or more users or groups. You can configure the following filters for the feed: Filter Feed Type Description Select an option: Group Posts: Display only content that has been posted to a LinkedIn group. Company Updates: Display only content that has been posted to a LinkedIn company page. My Groups My Companies Sentiment (Conditional) If you selected Group Posts for the Feed Type, select the desired LinkedIn group whose posts you want to moderate from within this feed. (Conditional) If you selected Company Updates for the Feed Type, select the desired LinkedIn company page whose posts you want to moderate from within this feed. Select a sentiment range to display only posts with the selected range: Negative, Neutral, or Positive. You can determine each post's sentiment range by viewing the colored bar along the left side of each post in the moderation feed. For example, a post with positive sentiment has a green bar along the left side of the post with a + sign. For more information, see Understanding Sentiment Scores.

258 Moderation 258 Filter Moderation Status Description Select the one or more status types to display only posts that have been marked with the selected moderation statuses. If you are configuring a Group Posts LinkedIn feed, the following options are available: Read, Unread, Flagged, Commented, Liked, and Moderation Error. If you are configuring a Company Updates LinkedIn feed, the following options are available: Read, Unread, Commented, and Moderation Error. Content with a status of Moderation Error means that something went wrong and the content could not be posted. For example, if you reply to a post and the platform (Facebook or Twitter, for example) is down, the content will not be posted. You can use the Moderation Filter to find failed content and take corrective action. Time Range Select the desired range to filter the feed: Last Hour, Last 12 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week, 1 Month, or All. Note that each option is a rolling range. For example, if you select 1 Week, whenever you access the feed, it always displays content for the previous seven days. Language Emotions Select the desired language to display only content posted in the selected language. You can display posts in all languages or you can specify an individual language. You can select only one individual language for each feed. Select one or more emotions to display only posts that have been designated as having the selected emotions: Admiration, Anger, Anticipation, Disgust, Fear, Joy, Sadness, and Surprise. You can determine the emotion associated with a post by viewing the colored dot and its corresponding emotion underneath each post in the feed. For example, a post associated with Admiration has a green dot with the word "Admiration" at the bottom of the post in the feed. You can configure the following settings for the feed: Filter Feed Assignment Description Assign this feed to one or more users or groups. Configure a Social Communities Moderation Feed Configure or edit a feed to facilitate moderation of posts that have been posted to a single social community. You can configure the following filters for the feed: Filter Communities Description Select the social community whose posts you want to moderate from within this feed.

259 Moderation 259 Filter Sentiment Description Select a sentiment range to display only posts with the selected range: Negative, Neutral, or Positive. You can determine each post's sentiment range by viewing the colored bar along the left side of each post in the moderation feed. For example, a post with positive sentiment has a green bar along the left side of the post with a + sign. For more information, see Understanding Sentiment Scores. Moderation Status Select one or more status types to display only posts that have been marked with the selected moderation statuses: Read, Unread, Spam, Not Spam, Flagged, and Moderation Error. Content with a status of Moderation Error means that something went wrong and the content could not be posted. For example, if you reply to a post and the platform (Facebook or Twitter, for example) is down, the content will not be posted. You can use the Moderation Filter to find failed content and take corrective action. Time Range Select the desired range to filter the feed: Last Hour, Last 12 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week, 1 Month, or All. Note that each option is a rolling range. For example, if you select 1 Week, whenever you access the feed, it always displays content for the previous seven days. Keywords Author Search Language Emotions Specify the keyword that you want to use to filter this feed. Only posts that contain the specified keyword display in the feed. Specified the desired author whose posts you want to moderate from within this feed. Select the desired language to display only content posted in the selected language. You can display posts in all languages or you can specify an individual language. You can select only one individual language for each feed. Select one or more emotions to display only posts that have been designated as having the selected emotions: Admiration, Anger, Anticipation, Disgust, Fear, Joy, Sadness, and Surprise. You can determine the emotion associated with a post by viewing the colored dot and its corresponding emotion underneath each post in the feed. For example, a post associated with Admiration has a green dot with the word "Admiration" at the bottom of the post in the feed. Display Moderation Feeds Toggle moderation feeds from a list layout (view one feed only) or into a column layout (as many as ten feeds, side by side).you can also open or close feeds, delete feeds, or arrange open feeds in the moderation queue in a desired order.

260 Moderation Click Moderation > Unified Moderation. 2. (Conditional) If the moderation queue is currently in column layout, click to display the queue in a list layout. Arranging moderation feeds in a list layout lets you focus on and monitor one feed at a time. Click the pagination controls at the top of the feed to cycle though your saved feeds. 3. (Conditional) If the moderation queue is currently in list layout, click to display the queue in a column layout. Arranging multiple saved feeds in a column layout lets you focus on several feeds at a time. Click the pagination controls at the top of the feed to cycle though your saved feeds. 4. (Optional) Manually retrieve new posts by clicking the Refresh circular arrow icon ( ) above each feed. Because of the rapid nature of some platforms, especially Twitter, content is not automatically refreshed and displayed in the feeds. This lets you moderate the currently displayed content without new content flooding your feeds. Twitter: Tweets are retrieved and available for display in the Moderation feed almost immediately after they are posted to Twitter. Facebook: Posts and comments are usually retrieved and available for display in the Moderation feed on average within 15 minutes after they are posted to Facebook. Social queries for new data frequently, but Facebook

261 Moderation 261 provides no guarantee of any specific response time. Also, because it is a 3rd-party network, there are a variety of other factors that can affect latency of content from Facebook, resulting in periods where Social will collect data faster than 15 minutes and periods where it will take longer than 15 minutes. LinkedIn: Posts and comments are usually retrieved and available for display in the Moderation feed on average within 45 minutes after they are posted to LinkedIn. Social queries for new data frequently, but LinkedIn's APIs are relatively new and still a work-in-progress. For this reason, there will be periods when Social will collect data faster than 45 minutes and periods when it will take longer than 45 minutes. Social Communities: Posts and comments are retrieved and available for display in the Moderation feed almost immediately after they are posted to the social community (Optional) To close an open feed, click at the top of a feed. You can also close feeds from the rail at the left of the feeds. (Optional) To change which feeds display in the queue, click in the left rail, then close feeds in the Open Feeds list and open feeds in the Closed Feeds list, as needed. To display feeds in a specific order, open the feeds in the desired order. See also: Create a New Moderation Feed Moderate Individual Posts or Tweets Edit a Moderation Feed Edit and save an existing moderation feed. 1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation. 2. Locate the feed that you want to edit. 3. For more information, see Display Moderation Feeds. Click to open the feed in configuration mode. 4. Edit the feed as desired by changing its filters and settings. For more information, see the appropriate topic: Configure an Escalation Moderation Feed Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed Configure a Twitter Moderation Feed Configure a LinkedIn Moderation Feed Configure a Social Communities Moderation Feed 5. Click Done. You can click Revert to change any filters and settings back to their state before the previous save. Clone a Moderation Feed Duplicate an existing moderation feed that you can then edit to create a new, similar feed. 1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation. 2. Locate the feed that you want to clone.

262 Moderation For more information, see Display Moderation Feeds. Click to open the feed in configuration mode. 4. Edit the feed as desired by changing its filters and settings. For more information, see the appropriate topic: Configure an Escalation Moderation Feed Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed Configure a Twitter Moderation Feed Configure a LinkedIn Moderation Feed Configure a Social Communities Moderation Feed You can click Revert to change any filters and settings back to their state before the previous save. 5. Click Save As, specify a new name for the feed, then click Save. Delete a Moderation Feed Delete an existing moderation feed that you no longer need. 1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation. 2. Locate the feed that you want to delete. For more information, see Display Moderation Feeds. 3. Click to open the feed in configuration mode. 4. Click Delete, then click Delete Feed to confirm the deletion. Note: All filter settings will be lost and that you cannot undo the deletion. Instead of deleting feeds, you can simply close them. To close an open feed, click at the top of a feed. You can also close feeds from the rail at the left of the feeds. You can then open a closed feed at a later time, if needed. You can also click next to the desired feed in the left rail. Moderate Individual Posts or Tweets Moderate individual posts or tweets from your saved moderation feeds. Moderate an Individual Escalated Post or Tweet Moderate an individual post that has been escalated and assigned to an individual user or to a user group for further follow-up action. An escalation feed is different from other feeds because it can contain content from different social platforms. For example, an escalation feed can contain Facebook and LinkedIn posts as well as tweets. 1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation. 2. Display an escalation moderation feed, either in list or column layout.

263 Moderation 263 When a post or tweet is escalated, it can be assigned to an individual user or to a user group for further follow-up action. If the post or tweet was assigned to you, a Claim badge displays on the post or tweet's tile in an escalation feed. If the post or tweet was assigned to a user group, an Assign to Me badge displays on the post or tweet's tile. Note: You can manually retrieve new posts by clicking the Refresh circular arrow icon ( ) in the toolbar. Because of the rapid nature of some platforms, especially Twitter, content is not automatically refreshed and displayed in the feeds. This lets you moderate the currently displayed content without new content flooding your feeds. Twitter: Tweets are retrieved and available for display in the Moderation feed almost immediately after they are posted to Twitter. Facebook: Posts and comments are usually retrieved and available for display in the Moderation feed on average within 15 minutes after they are posted to Facebook. Social queries for new data frequently, but Facebook provides no guarantee of any specific response time. Also, because it is a 3rd-party network, there are a variety of other factors that can affect latency of content from Facebook, resulting in periods where Social will collect data faster than 15 minutes and periods where it will take longer than 15 minutes. LinkedIn: Posts and comments are usually retrieved and available for display in the Moderation feed on average within 45 minutes after they are posted to LinkedIn. Social queries for new data frequently, but LinkedIn's APIs

264 Moderation 264 are relatively new and still a work-in-progress. For this reason, there will be periods when Social will collect data faster than 45 minutes and periods when it will take longer than 45 minutes. Social Communities: Posts and comments are retrieved and available for display in the Moderation feed almost immediately after they are posted to the social community. 3. If the escalated post or tweet was assigned to you, click Claim to move it into your moderation queue. Or If the escalated post or tweet was assigned to a user group that you belong to, click Assign to Me to move it into your moderation queue. 4. (Optional) Click at the bottom each the tile to see moderation information about that post or tweet. You can see the name of the user who escalated the content, the date and time that the content was escalated, the reason for escalation, suggestions on how to handle the content, and additional notes. 5. To perform actions on an individual post or tweet, hover over the desired content to display additional options. On a tablet or mobile device, touch the desired content to display additional options. 6. Perform the desired action by clicking the appropriate icon. Depending on the content's social platform, the icons vary. For more information about the icons and actions for each platform, see the table in the following topics: Moderate an Individual Facebook Post Moderate an Individual Tweet Moderate an Individual LinkedIn Post Moderate an Individual Social Communities Post 7. (Optional) View author details inside Social by clicking the author's avatar image or name. The author detail includes a list of the user's information and recent posts. The available information depends on the user's privacy settings. You can also connect that user's social profiles and view his or her Klout score. For more information, see Connect Social User Profiles and View Klout Scores. Moderate an Individual Facebook Post Moderate an individual post on an owned Facebook page. 1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation. 2. Open a Facebook moderation feed, either in list or column layout.

265 Moderation 265 Note: You can manually retrieve new posts by clicking the Refresh circular arrow icon ( ) in the toolbar. Posts and comments are usually retrieved and available for display in the Moderation feed on average within 15 minutes after they are posted to Facebook. Social queries for new data frequently, but Facebook provides no guarantee of any specific response time. Also, because it is a 3rd-party network, there are a variety of other factors that can affect latency of content from Facebook, resulting in periods where Social will collect data faster than 15 minutes and periods where it will take longer than 15 minutes. 3. To perform actions on an individual post, hover over the desired content to display additional options. On a tablet or mobile device, touch the desired content to display additional options. 4. Perform the desired action by clicking the appropriate icon:

266 Moderation 266 Icon Action View Detail Read/Unread Instruction Display the details of the posts, including its moderation history.you can also click the authors name to view author details and interactions you have had with this author. The author detail includes a list of the user's information and recent posts. The available information depends on the user's privacy settings.you can also connect that user's social profiles across different platforms and view that user's Klout score. For more information, see Connect Social User Profiles and View Klout Scores. Mark the post as read. Marking a post as read does not remove it from the feed, unless you have set the filter feed to display only tweets with a moderation status of Unread. A Read icon ( ) displays on the right side in the panel. You can click to unmark content that has already been marked as read. Reply Post a public reply to the post on Facebook. Type the message, then click Reply. Like/Unlike Like or unlike the content. Escalate Open the escalation controls that let you assign a reason for the escalation, assign a person to follow up on the tweet, offer a suggestion, and more. For more information, see Unified Moderation Workflow. Flag/Unflag Flag or unflag the content. Flagging a post does not edit or remove it from the feed, but simply marks it for further consideration. A Flagged icon ( ) displays on the right side in each panel. You can flag content that needs follow-up attention. You can click again to unflag content that has already been flagged. Delete Delete the post from your owned Facebook page. You can also create moderation rules that automatically delete posts containing specified words that you never want to appear on your Facebook pages. For more information, see Unified Moderation Rules. Note: Some posts in the feed indicate that they have been escalated. For more information, see Moderate an Individual Escalated Post or Tweet. 5. (Optional) Click View Replies to expand the post to display its replies, then moderate the replies as desired. You can view two levels of replies. For example, you can see the original post, replies to the original post, and replies to the replies. 6. (Optional) View author details inside Social by clicking the author's avatar image or name.

267 Moderation 267 The author detail includes a list of the user's information and recent posts. The available information depends on the user's privacy settings. You can also connect that user's social profiles and view his or her Klout score. For more information, see Connect Social User Profiles and View Klout Scores. Moderate an Individual Tweet Moderate an individual tweet in a Twitter account. 1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation. 2. Open a Twitter moderation feed, either in list or column layout. Note: Tweets are retrieved and available for display in the Moderation feed almost immediately after they are posted to Twitter. However, because of the rapid nature of Twitter, tweets are not automatically refreshed and displayed in the feed. This lets you moderate the currently displayed tweets without new tweets flooding your feed. You can manually retrieve new tweets by clicking the Refresh circular arrow icon ( ) above each feed. 3. To perform actions on an individual tweet, hover over the desired content to display additional options. On a tablet or mobile device, touch the desired content to display additional options. 4. Perform the desired action by clicking the appropriate icon: Icon Action View Detail Instruction Display the details of the tweet, including its replies on Twitter and its moderation history. You can also click to view the tweet on Twitter.

268 Moderation 268 Icon Action Read/Unread Instruction Mark the tweet as read. Marking a tweet as read does not remove it from the feed, unless you have set the filter feed to display only tweets with a moderation status of Unread. A Read icon ( ) displays on the right side in the panel. You can click to unmark content that has already been marked as read. Reply Post a public reply to the tweet on Twitter. Choose the desired account from which to reply, type the message, then click Reply. The Reply From drop-down list is populated with the Twitter accounts that you have added to the Social report suite. Adding multiple Twitter accounts gives you the flexibility to moderate or respond to tweets using different Twitter handles. For example, your organization could have a main Twitter handle and another handle that is used for customer-support issues. If both of those accounts have been added to the report suite, a moderator can quickly and easily reply to a tweet using either handle. You can also specify a default account for all replies in the feed. For more information, see Add Twitter Accounts and Configure a Twitter Moderation Feed. Retweet Post a public retweet of the original tweet to the followers of one of your Twitter properties. From the Retweet dialog box, choose the desired property from which to retweet, then click Retweet. The Retweet From drop-down list is populated with the Twitter accounts that you have added to the Social report suite. Adding multiple Twitter accounts gives you the flexibility to moderate or respond to tweets using different Twitter handles. For example, your organization could have a main Twitter handle and another handle that is used for customer-support issues. If both of those accounts have been added to the report suite, a moderator can quickly and easily retweet a tweet using either handle. For more information, see Add Twitter Accounts. You can optionally click Quote Tweet to edit the tweet before retweeting. There are differences between unedited and edited retweets. If you do not edit the tweet, Retweet displays in your Twitter feed verbatim and indicates that it was retweeted from the property you specified. However, If you edit the tweet, the result is more like a direct tweet from the specified property (the tweet will automatically be prefixed with "RT"). You cannot currently schedule a retweet from the Moderation feed. You can, however, schedule tweets in the Publisher. Escalate Open the escalation controls that let you assign a reason for the escalation, assign a person to follow up on the tweet, offer a suggestion, and more. For more information, see Unified Moderation Workflow.

269 Moderation 269 Icon Action Flag/Unflag Instruction Flag or unflag the content. Flagging a tweet does not edit or remove the tweet from the feed, but simply marks it for further consideration. A Flagged icon ( ) displays on the right side in each panel. You can flag content that needs follow-up attention. You can click again to unflag content that has already been flagged. Direct Message Send a direct message to an author using the selected account. The user must follow one of your owned Twitter properties in order for you to direct message him or her. You can also direct message a Twitter user from the user's author detail page. Favorite Publicly favorite the tweet on Twitter. Choose the desired property from which to favorite the content, then click Favorite. Mark as Spam Mark the content as spam. This prevents the author from following or replying to any of your configured Twitter accounts. It also sends a "spam request" to Twitter. Twitter personnel can then take action on the content. You can also mark a user as spam from the user's author detail page. For more information, see Mark a Twitter User as Spam. Note: Some tweets in the feed indicate that they have been escalated. For more information, see Moderate an Individual Escalated Post or Tweet. 5. (Optional) View author details inside Social by clicking the author's avatar image or name. The author detail includes a list of the user's information and recent posts. The available information depends on the user's privacy settings. You can also connect that user's social profiles and view his or her Klout score. For more information, see Connect Social User Profiles and View Klout Scores. Mark a Twitter User as Spam Mark a Twitter user as spam. This action reports the user as a spammer to Twitter so that Twitter can take further action, if necessary. This action also blocks this user from following or replying to your Twitter account. You can mark a Twitter user as spam from a Twitter moderation feed or from the Twitter author's detail page. To mark a user as spam from a Twitter moderation feed See Moderate an Individual Tweet. To mark a user as spam from the author's detail page 1. Display the desired Twitter moderation feed. 2. Click the user's avatar image or name to display the author's detail page. 3. Click, then click Mark User as Spam. 4. Click Mark as Spam to confirm the action.

270 Moderation Click to return to the moderation feed. Direct Message a Twitter User Send a direct message to a Twitter user. A direct message is a private message sent via Twitter. You can send direct messages only to authors who follow at least one of your owned Twitter accounts that are registered with Social. You can receive direct messages only from authors you follow. You can direct message a Twitter user from a Twitter moderation feed or from the Twitter author's detail page. To display direct messages in a feed 1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation. 2. Configure or edit a Twitter moderation feed. Ensure that you select Direct Messages from the Feed Type drop-down list. Configure the other settings as desired. When you work with direct-message moderation feeds, keep in mind that Twitter imposes rate limits on server calls to its platform through APIs. You most likely won't exceed Twitter's rate limit for most types of calls. However, be aware that the rate limit to display, refresh, or use the infinite scroll feature to load additional direct messages is currently 15 requests per Twitter account every 15 minutes. If you exceed this limit, you will receive the following error message: Twitter has exceeded its Rate Limit. Please try again later. Keep in mind that if other Social users in your organization are using the Unified Moderation feature to load or refresh direct messages, their server calls also count towards this per-twitter-account limit. To direct message a user from a Twitter moderation feed 1. Hover over the desired content to display additional options, then click. For more information, see Moderate an Individual Tweet. To direct message a user from the author's detail page 1. Display the desired Twitter moderation feed. 2. Click the user's avatar image or name to display the author's detail page. 3. Click, then click Direct Message. 4. Specify the text and send the message. 5. Click to return to the moderation feed. Moderate an Individual LinkedIn Post Moderate an individual post on a LinkedIn company page or group. 1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation. 2. Open a LinkedIn moderation feed, either in list or column layout.

271 Moderation 271 Note: You can manually retrieve new posts by clicking the Refresh circular arrow icon ( ) in the toolbar. Posts and comments are usually retrieved and available for display in the Moderation feed on average within 45 minutes after they are posted to LinkedIn. Social queries for new data frequently, but LinkedIn's APIs are relatively new and still a work-in-progress. For this reason, there will be periods when Social will collect data faster than 45 minutes and periods when it will take longer than 45 minutes. 3. To perform actions on an individual post, hover over the desired content to display additional options. On a tablet or mobile device, touch the desired content to display additional options. 4. Perform the desired action by clicking the appropriate icon: Icon Action View Detail Instruction (Available on LinkedIn company page feeds and LinkedIn group feeds.) Displays the details of the posts, including its moderation history. You can also click the authors name to view author details and interactions you have had with this author. Read/Unread (Available on LinkedIn company page feeds and LinkedIn group feeds.) Marks the post as read. Marking a post as read does not remove it from the feed, unless you have set the filter feed to display only tweets with a moderation status of Unread. A Read icon

272 Moderation 272 Icon Action Instruction ( ) displays on the right side in the panel. You can click to unmark content that has already been marked as read. Escalate (Available on LinkedIn group feeds only.) Open the escalation controls that let you assign a reason for the escalation, assign a person to follow up on the tweet, offer a suggestion, and more. For more information, see Unified Moderation Workflow. Flag/Unflag (Available on LinkedIn group feeds only.) Flag or unflag the content. Flagging a post or comment does not edit or remove it from the feed, but simply marks it for further consideration. A Flagged icon ( ) displays on the right side in each panel. You can flag content that needs follow-up attention. You can click again to unflag content that has already been flagged. Add Comment (Available on LinkedIn company page feeds and LinkedIn group feeds.) Posts a public reply to the post on your LinkedIn company page or group. Choose the desired account from which to reply, type the message, then click Reply. The Comment From drop-down list is populated with the LinkedIn accounts that you have added to the Social report suite. Adding multiple accounts gives you the flexibility to moderate or respond to post using different LinkedIn accounts. For example, your organization could have a main account and another account that is used for customer-support issues. If both of those accounts have been added to the report suite, a moderator can quickly and easily reply using either account. For more information, see Add LinkedIn Company Pages and Groups. Like/Unlike (Available on LinkedIn company page feeds and LinkedIn group feeds.) Like or unlike the content. Delete (Available on LinkedIn company page feeds and LinkedIn group feeds.) Delete the post from your LinkedIn company page or group. Note: Some posts in the feed indicate that they have been escalated. For more information, see Moderate an Individual Escalated Post or Tweet. 5. (Optional) Click View Replies to expand the post to display its replies, then moderate the replies as desired. 6. (Optional) View author details inside Social by clicking the author's avatar image or name. The author detail includes a list of the user's information and recent posts. The available information depends on the user's privacy settings. You can also connect that user's social profiles and view his or her Klout score. For more information, see Connect Social User Profiles and View Klout Scores.

273 Moderation 273 Moderate an Individual Social Communities Post Moderate an individual post on a social community page. 1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation. 2. Open a social community moderation feed, either in list or column layout. Note: You can manually retrieve new posts by clicking the Refresh circular arrow icon ( ) in the toolbar. Posts and comments are retrieved and available for display in the Moderation feed almost immediately after they are posted to the social community. 3. To perform actions on an individual post, hover over the desired content to display additional options. On a tablet or mobile device, touch the desired content to display additional options. 4. Perform the desired action by clicking the appropriate icon:

274 Moderation 274 Icon Action Read/Unread Instruction Mark the post as read. Marking a post as read does not remove it from the feed, unless you have set the filter feed to display only tweets with a moderation status of Unread. A Read icon ( ) displays on the right side in the panel. You can click to unmark content that has already been marked as read. Escalate Open the escalation controls that let you assign a reason for the escalation, assign a person to follow up on the tweet, offer a suggestion, and more. For more information, see Unified Moderation Workflow. Approve Approve the content for posting on the social community's page. Deny Deny the content. The content will not be posted on the social community's page. Spam Mark the content as spam. This prevents the author from following or replying to any of your configured social communities. Reply Post a public reply to the post on the social community's page.type the message, then click Reply. Flag/Unflag Flag or unflag the content. Flagging a post does not edit or remove it from the feed, but simply marks it for further consideration. A Flagged icon ( ) displays on the right side in each panel. You can flag content that needs follow-up attention. You can click again to unflag content that has already been flagged. Delete Deletes the post from your social community's page. Note: Some posts in the feed indicate that they have been escalated. For more information, see Moderate an Individual Escalated Post or Tweet. 5. (Optional) Click View Replies to expand the post to display its replies, then moderate the replies as desired. You can view two levels of replies. For example, you can see the original post, replies to the original post, and replies to the replies. 6. (Optional) View author details inside Social by clicking the author's avatar image or name. The author detail includes a list of the user's information and recent posts. The available information depends on the user's privacy settings.

275 Moderation 275 Moderate Multiple Posts using Bulk Actions Moderate content by selecting multiple posts and tweets to perform the same action in bulk. You can mark content as read, unread, flagged, or unflagged. 1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation. 2. You can perform bulk actions in both moderation queue layouts (list or column). Up to 30 posts and tweets display in each moderation feed by default. Scroll to the bottom to load additional content, if additional content is available for loading. You can manually retrieve new content by clicking the Refresh circular arrow icon ( ) at the top of each feed. Tweets are retrieved and available for display in the Moderation feed almost immediately after they are posted to Twitter. However, because of the rapid nature of Twitter, tweets are not automatically refreshed and displayed in the feed. This lets you moderate the currently displayed tweets without new tweets flooding your feed. To perform bulk actions on more than one post or tweet, click 3. Click the panel for each post or tweet on which you want to perform bulk actions. in the toolbar to enable bulk-selection mode. 4. Perform the desired action by clicking the appropriate button on the toolbar: Read: Mark the content as read. Marking content as read does not remove it from the feed, unless you have set the filter feed to display only content with a moderation status of Unread. A Read icon ( side in each panel. ) displays on the right Unread: Mark the content as unread. Marking content as unread removes the Read icon ( the right side in each panel. Flag: Flag the content. Flagging content does not remove it from the feed. A Flagged icon ( right side in each panel. You can flag content that needs follow-up attention. ) that displays on ) displays on the 5. Unflag: Unflag the content. To exit bulk-selection mode, click on the toolbar.

276 Moderation 276 Connect Social User Profiles and View Klout Scores Connect social user profiles across different social platforms to create a unified social profile of an individual user and view that user's Klout scores. You can also view previous interactions you have had with this user, relevant posts or tweets, and recent posts or tweets. 1. Display the desired moderation feed. 2. Click the user's avatar image or name to display the author's detail page. 3. Click Connect Profiles. Social tries to connect that user's various social user profiles on different platforms to create a unified social profile. For example, Social can attempt to connect a Twitter user's account with that user's Facebook and LinkedIn accounts so you can get a more complete view of that user's online presence. Social currently attempts to connect profiles on platforms that Social moderates (Facebook, Twitter, and LinkedIn). In addition to connecting the profiles across platforms, you can also view the following information for that user: Klout Score: A score between 1 and 100 that measures a user's online social influence (a higher score means the user is more influential on the social web). This information does not display if the user is not a registered Klout user. For more information, see the Klout website. Interactions: Displays all posts across social properties that the user has made and with whom you have had interactions using Social. Interactions include liking, replying to, claiming, resolving, and so forth. Relevant Tweets: (For Twitter feeds only) Displays a list of the user's tweets that match your active listening rules. Recent Tweets: (For Twitter feeds only) Displays a list of the user's 25 most-recent tweets.

277 Moderation 277 Comments: View previous comments about that user posted by Social users in your organization. You can also create new comments by typing in the Write a Comment box and by pressing Enter. 4. (Conditional) Add notes by typing text in the Write a Comment text box, then press Enter. Comments are viewable only in the Social product by moderators in your organization. Facebook fans and Twitter followers, for example, cannot see comments. 5. (Conditional) Mark the user as spam. 6. (Conditional) Direct message the user. 7. (Conditional) To disconnect the social profiles, click Disconnect Profiles. 8. Click to return to the moderation feed. Troubleshoot Moderation Feeds Information to help you troubleshoot moderation feeds and issues. The following list offers suggestions to solve common issues when moderating feeds: Posts and Tweets Missing from Moderation Feeds Reasons why posts and tweets might be missing from your moderation feeds include the following: A post or tweet does not display in the feed based on your current filter conditions. A post or tweet might not display in a moderation feed based on actions moderators have previously taken. For example, if the post or tweet was marked as read, it is hidden from the feed unless you select Read from the Moderation Status filter section. As another example, a tweet might not display in a moderation feed based on its number of followers. If a tweet was tweeted from a user with 500 followers, it is hidden from the feed unless you select 101-1K from the Followers filter section. These are just two examples of why posts and tweets might not display in a moderation feed. Other examples could include that you have specified a time range or sentiment value in the filter. As best practice, you should always check your filtering options if you suspect that posts or tweets are missing from the feed. For more information, see the appropriate topic: Configure an Escalation Moderation Feed Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed Configure a Twitter Moderation Feed Configure a LinkedIn Moderation Feed Configure a Social Communities Moderation Feed After you display the post tweet in the moderation feed by adjusting its filter conditions, you can view a tweet's moderation history by viewing its details. From the moderation feed, click in the post or tweet's panel. Unified Moderation Rules Manage moderation rules (watch word lists): create a new rule, change a rule's status (active or inactive), edit a rule, or delete a rule. After you activate this functionality, Social scans for direct keyword matches and automatically deletes all top-level posts, comments, and replies (regardless of the author) on your owned Facebook pages based on each rule.

278 Moderation 278 The Rules page (Moderation > Unified Moderation Rules) displays your moderation rules and provides details about each rule (rule name, number of tracked terms, platform, and status). To create a new rule, click Add New Rule, then follow the instructions in Create a Moderation Rule. To activate or deactivate a rule, slide the Activate toggle to the desired position. To edit an existing rule, click the desired rule's name in the Name column. You can edit the rule's name, add or remove pages, add or remove keywords, and add or remove addresses. For more information about each option, see Create a Moderation Rule. To delete one or more rules, select the desired rules, click, then confirm the deletion. Create a Moderation Rule Create moderation rules that automatically delete posts containing specified words that you never want to appear on your Facebook pages. Note: As a best practice, we recommend that you allow only Admin users the permissions necessary to define moderation rules. For more information, see Add User Group, Permissions, and Members. 1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation Rules. 2. Click Add New Rule > Auto-Delete.

279 Moderation Fill in the fields: Display Name: Specify a descriptive name for the moderation rule. Platforms: Select All Pages to apply this rule to all of your owned Facebook pages, or select Specific Pages then select one or more Facebook pages to apply this rule to those pages only. Filters: Specify the desired keywords. Specify a word, press Enter, then specify a new word. You can also paste a list that you created in Word or a text editor into the box. Click Use Adobe Social Default "Bad Words" List to use a pre-populated list. You can add or remove words from the default list, as needed. Specify one or more address. Notification messages are sent to these addresses when a post is automatically removed from the specified Facebook pages based on this rule. Separate multiple addresses with commas. Note: As best practice, we recommend that you leverage the notification feature, especially when creating new rules, so that you can monitor the content being deleted. You can then adjust the rules as necessary.

280 Moderation Click Save. A message displays informing you that the message was successfully created but not activated. Click Activate or No, Activate Later. If you choose to activate this rule at a later time, use the Activate toggle on the Rules page (Moderation > Unified Moderation Rules) to activate the rule. Unified Moderation Workflow Use the Escalation page to configure the Escalation controls that display when you click Escalate while moderating a post or a tweet.you can choose which reasons and suggestions display and specify the default assignee for each reason. You can also add new reasons or suggestions to the controls. You must configure the Escalation features in Social before you can escalate tweets. For more information, see Configure Escalation Management. 1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation Workflow. 2. In the Escalation Reason field, specify the reason that you want to display in the Escalation controls. You can create multiple reasons, such as "Assign to Customer Support," "Offer Refund," "Need More Information," and so forth. 3. For each reason, select the default assignee from the Assign To drop-down list. The assignee can be anyone who is a user in the account or a user group. When you or someone in your organization escalates a post or tweet, the escalation is assigned to default assignee unless another user or user group is explicitly assigned.

281 Moderation (Conditional) To add additional reasons, click the add icon ( ), specify the reason's label, then specify the default assignee. To delete the existing reason, click the cancel icon ( ). 5. In the Suggested Action panel, specify the suggested action that you want to display in the Escalation controls. 6. While moderating, you can select an action for each tweet. (Conditional) To add additional suggestions, click the add icon ( suggestion, click the cancel icon ( ). 7. Click Save. ), then specify the label. To delete the existing After completing the steps in this topic, you can assign escalation actions within the individual moderation feeds. For more information, see Moderate Individual Posts or Tweets. Configure Escalation Management Configure the Escalation Management features in the Adobe Analytics Admin Tools. 1. Click Settings > Marketing Cloud Users & Groups. 2. Click Edit Groups. 3. Click Add New User Group to display the Define User Group page. 4. In the Group Name field, specify "EscalationModerators" as the label. 5. In the Group Description field, specify a label, such as "Twitter Moderation." 6. In the Assign User Logins section, add available users to the Group Members box. 7. Click Save Group. You do not need to specify a report suite or any other settings. The settings you configure apply to your entire company. When you select Escalate while moderating a post or tweet, you will notice that the users that you added to the group are synchronized and can be selected from the Assign To drop-down list. Facebook Moderation Adobe Social pulls and archives posts and comments from the wall on Facebook pages and places. All posts and comments can be scanned for watch words and each post and comment can be moderated (viewed, removed, replied to, liked, or escalated). Note: The legacy Facebook moderation tool described in this section is being deprecated, but you can still access it from the left navigation menu. After you are comfortable with the new workflows for Facebook moderation within unified moderation, contact your Social Account Manager to have the legacy Facebook moderation tool removed from your configuration. You should not use both moderation tools simultaneously. Your account admin should consult the Moderation Migration guide to decide which tool to use. If you have further questions, contact your Social Account Manager. Enable Moderation and Insights Before you can actively moderate Facebook pages, you must add them to Adobe Social and then enable the moderation functionality. 1. (Conditional) Add the pages that you want to moderate in Adobe Social. 2. Click Moderation > Facebook Moderation.

282 Moderation In the desired Facebook page's pane in the list, click Edit Settings to display the Settings page. 4. Under Moderation and Insights, select the Moderate this Page check box, then click Apply Settings. Moderation is now enabled for this Facebook page. Enable and Configure Watch Words Activate and configure the Bad Words, Medium Words, or Good Words list functionality. After you activate this functionality, Social scans for direct word matches. Social then highlights, alerts, or deletes posts and comments based on each word list. The words can be in any language and can contain any characters. 1. Click Moderation > Facebook Moderation. 2. In the desired Facebook page's pane in the list, click Edit Settings to display the Settings page. 3. Fill in the fields: Scan Messages: Under Watch Words, select this option to activate scanning of words in the Bad, Medium, and Good lists. After you select Scan Messages, the following options display: Send Alerts To: Specify one or more addresses to receive notifications when a post or comment contains a word in the Bad Words or Medium Words list. Separate multiple addresses with commas. For example, you@example.com, me@example.com.you cannot send alerts if a post or comment contains a word in the Good Words list. Bad Words: Words contained in the Bad Words list should never be present on your Facebook pages. Add or remove words from the default list. Click inside the box and add or remove words as desired. Use this list to alert you or to remove the post or comment if it contains an objectionable word. An alert is automatically sent to the designated addresses when a post or comment contains one or more words in this list. You can optionally select the Auto-Remove Bad Messages option to automatically delete posts and comments from the page's wall if they contain one or more words in the Bad Words list. An alert is also automatically sent to the designated addresses when a post or comment is removed. If a post or comment contains a word in the Bad Words list, that word is highlighted in the Social moderation queue for that page and in the Moderation box on the page's Wall Activity in the dashboard. Bad words display in red boxes.

283 Moderation 283 Medium Words (Alerts Only): Words contained in the Medium Words list are flagged because they could be considered inappropriate depending on the context.you can then review the post or comment and take additional action, if needed. Add or remove words from the default list. Click inside the box and add or remove words as desired. An alert is automatically sent to the designated addresses when a post or comment contains one or more words in this list. If a post or comment contains a word in the Medium Words list, that word is highlighted in the Social moderation queue for that page and in the Moderation box on the page's Wall Activity in the dashboard. Medium words display in yellow boxes. You can also add competitors' names or key phrases to the Medium Words list if you want posts or comments containing these words to stand out in the Moderator queue or to generate alerts. Good Words (No Alerts): Add or remove words from the default list. Click inside the box and add or remove words as desired. Alerts are not sent to the designated addresses when a post or comment contains one or more words in this list. If a post or comment contains a word in the Good Words list, that word is highlighted in the Social moderation queue for that page and in the Moderation box on the page's Wall Activity in the dashboard. Good words display in green boxes. You can use the Good Words list for words that you want to review internally. For example, you might want to better understand the frequency of words associated with a brand, campaign, and so forth. 4. Click Apply Settings. Troubleshooting Watch Words If after setting up your watch-word list, words in your Bad Words list are present on your owned Facebook page, perform the following tasks: Examine your Bad Words list to confirm that it contains the exact word or phrase that should not have been allowed to be posted to your Facebook page. The watch word list and the post must match exactly for the post to be auto-removed. Ensure that the Auto-Remove Bad Messages check box is selected, as explained above. Ensure that the Facebook page has been authorized. See Grant Permissions for Social. Ensure that the Facebook page does not need to be re-authorized due to changes to the account. See Re-Authorize a Facebook Page. Moderate a Facebook Page Moderate a Facebook page's posts and comments. You can mark a post or comment as viewed, or you can like, remove, escalate, reply to, or view the post or comment. 1. Click Moderation > Facebook Moderation. 2. In the desired Facebook page's pane in the list, click Moderate Page to display the page's Moderation dashboard. All new posts and comments display in the queue. By default, 100 posts and comments display. If more than 100 posts and comments exist, click the link at the bottom of the page to display more.

284 Moderation 284 Note: Posts and comments are retrieved and display in the Moderation queue approximately every 12 minutes. You can retrieve new posts and comments by clicking the Check for Updates circular arrow icon ( ) next to the text that displays the time and date that posts and comments were last retrieved. 3. (Optional) Click Filter Settings to filter posts and comments that display in the list. For more information, see Filter Posts and Comments. 4. Perform the desired action by clicking the appropriate option. Note: Performing any of the following actions removes the post or comment from the Moderation queue. If you want to see content that has been removed from the queue, export the moderation history and view the content in an Excel file. For more information, see Export Moderation History. Viewed: Approve the post or comment and remove it from the Moderation queue. Remove: Permanently remove the post or comment from the Facebook page's wall. Note: The Remove action cannot be undone. Escalate: Display the Escalation controls, select from the following options, then click Escalate. Reason: Select the desired reason for the escalation from the drop-down list. Default reasons include Incorrect Information, Needs Response, and Question. You can also add customized reasons. For more information about customizing the list of reasons, see Facebook Escalation Workflow. Suggestion: Select the desired suggestion from the drop-down list. Default suggestions include Consider for F.A.Q., Needs More Information, and Thank You Note. You can also add customized suggestions. For more information about customizing the list of reasons, see Facebook Escalation Workflow. Assign To: Select the assignee from the drop-down list. You can assign any user who has Moderation permissions in the account. Reply: Reply to the post or comment on the Facebook page's wall. Replies are not threaded but appear in the thread as a comment on the post or comment. Quick View: Displays what the post looks like on Facebook, including any images or links on the post. This option lets moderators quickly view an image included in a post or comment so that immediate action can be taken. Go to Facebook: Open the Facebook page. You can also perform bulk actions on posts and comments. For example, you can select multiple posts and comments and then mark them all as viewed. For more information, see Perform Bulk Actions. Filter Posts and Comments Filter the list of posts and comments that display on the Moderation page. 1. Click Moderation > Facebook Moderation. 2. In the desired Facebook page's pane in the list, click Moderate Page to display the page's Moderation dashboard. 3. Click Filter Settings to filter the list of posts and comments.

285 Moderation Select the desired filtering options: Posts in Language: Select the desired language from the drop-down list. Only posts and comments in the specified language display. Filter By: Select a post and comment state from the drop-down list: New Messages: Displays all new posts and comments that have appeared on the Facebook wall that have not been moderated. New Flagged Messages: Displays all posts and comments that have been flagged because they contain a word in the Bad, Medium, and Good word lists that have not been moderated. For more information about these lists, see Enable and Configure Watch Words. New Admin Messages: Displays all new posts and comments made by a Facebook page administrator or Adobe Social user. My Issues: Displays all posts and comments that are assigned to the logged-in user. These messages can be viewed, re-assigned, and replied to. All Issues: Displays all posts and comments that are assigned to all users in the account with Moderate permissions. These posts and comments can be viewed, re-assigned, and replied to. Audience: Select the desired option: All Page Posts: Displays all posts and comments that appeared on the Facebook page's wall that have not been moderated. My Audiences: Displays only posts associated with post audiences for which you have ownership in the User Group permissions model. Only User Posts: Displays posts and comments made by Facebook users and fans. Selecting this option does not display posts and comments from Facebook administrators or people who post on your page using Adobe Social. Perform Bulk Actions Perform bulk actions on posts and comments posted on Facebook. You can mark multiple posts and comments as viewed, escalate multiple posts or comments, or simultaneously remove multiple posts and comments from the Facebook page's wall. 1. Click Moderation > Facebook Moderation.

286 Moderation In the desired Facebook page's pane in the list, click Moderate Page to display the page's Moderation dashboard. 3. To select all posts and comments in the list, select Check All. Or To select multiple posts or comments, select the check boxes next to each post or comment on which you want to perform bulk actions. 4. From the With Checked drop-down list, select the desired option: Mark Viewed: Select Mark Viewed to approve the selected posts and comments and remove them from the queue, then click Apply. Escalate: Select Escalate, then click Apply to display the Escalation controls. Select from the following options, then click Escalate. Reason: Select the desired reason for the escalation from the drop-down list. Default reasons include Incorrect Information, Needs Response, and Question. You can also add customized reasons. For more information about customizing the list of reasons, see Facebook Escalation Workflow. Suggestion: Select the desired suggestion from the drop-down list. Default suggestions include Consider for F.A.Q, Needs More Information, and Thank You Note. You can also add customized suggestions. For more information about customizing the list of suggestions, see Facebook Escalation Workflow. Remove: Select Remove, then click Apply to permanently remove all selected posts and comments from the Facebook page's wall. This action cannot be undone. Note: The selected option is applied to all selected posts and comments. If you select Escalate, all selected posts and comments are escalated with the same reason, suggestion, and assignee. A separate notification is sent for each escalated post or comment. Export Moderation History Export the moderation history to a Microsoft Excel file. 1. Click Moderation > Facebook Moderation. 2. From the Moderation History drop-down list, select the time period for which you want to export data. 3. Click Export. Retrieve and Refresh Posts in Facebook Moderation Queues Information about how often posts and comments are loaded into a Facebook Moderation queue and how to manually refresh a queue to load new content. Posts and comments are retrieved and display in the Moderation queue approximately every 12 minutes. You can manually refresh the queue to retrieve new posts and comments. While moderating a Facebook page, click the Check for Updates circular arrow icon ( ) next to the text that displays the time that posts and comments were last retrieved.

287 Moderation 287 Troubleshooting Facebook Moderation Information to help you troubleshoot Facebook moderation issues. The following list offers suggestions to solve common issues when moderating Facebook pages: Posts or Comments Missing from Facebook Moderation Reasons why posts and comments might be missing from your moderation feeds include the following: A post or comment does not display in the feed based on your current filter conditions. A post or comment might not display in Facebook moderation based on actions moderators have previously taken. For example, if the post or comment was moderated, it is hidden from moderation if New Messages is selected as a filtering condition. As best practice, you should always check your filtering options if you suspect that posts or comments are missing from Facebook Moderation. For more information, see Filter Posts and Comments. You can export moderation history to an Excel file. See Export Moderation History. Facebook Issues Moderate open issues that have been assigned to you.

288 Moderation 288 Note: The legacy Facebook moderation tool described in this section is being deprecated, but you can still access it from the left navigation menu. After you are comfortable with the new workflows for Facebook moderation within unified moderation, contact your Social Account Manager to have the legacy Facebook moderation tool removed from your configuration. You should not use both moderation tools simultaneously. Your account admin should consult the Moderation Migration guide to decide which tool to use. If you have further questions, contact your Social Account Manager. 1. To display a list of issues that you have been assigned to you, click Moderation > Facebook Issues. 2. In the desired Facebook page's pane in the list, click Open Issues. 3. (Conditional) Filter the list of open issues by using the Posts in Language and Filter By drop-down lists. For more information, see Filter Posts and Comments. 4. Moderate the posts and comments as explained in Moderate a Facebook Page. Note that you can also re-assign the post or comment to another user. Facebook Escalation Workflow Use the Escalation Workflow page to configure the Escalation controls that display when you click Escalate while moderating a post or comment. You can choose which reasons and suggestions display and specify the default assignee for each reason. You can also add new reasons or suggestions to the controls. Note: The legacy Facebook moderation tool described in this section is being deprecated, but you can still access it from the left navigation menu. After you are comfortable with the new workflows for Facebook moderation within unified moderation, contact your Social Account Manager to have the legacy Facebook moderation tool removed from your configuration. You should not use both moderation tools simultaneously. Your account admin should consult the Moderation Migration guide to decide which tool to use. If you have further questions, contact your Social Account Manager. 1. Click Moderation > Facebook Escalation Workflow. 2. In the Reasons section, select the Show check box for each label that you want to display in the Escalation controls. 3. For each reason, select the default assignee from the drop-down list. The assignee can be anyone who is a user in the account. 4. (Conditional) To add additional reasons, click Add a New Reason, specify the label, then specify the default assignee. 5. In the Suggestions section, select the Show check box for each label that you want to display in the Escalation controls. While moderating, you can select an action for each post or comment. For more information, see Moderate a Facebook Page. 6. (Conditional) To add additional suggestions, click Add a New Suggestion, then specify the label. 7. Click Save. CRM Integration You can integrate the Adobe Social moderation functionality into many CRM (Customer Relationship Management) systems to effectively open tickets on posts and comments made on a Facebook page's wall.

289 Moderation 289 The easiest method of integration is to add the address of the CRM ticketing system. You then insert the subject line of the notification s as a rule to open a ticket. The notification messages are sent from moderation@contextoptional.com. A typical subject line could be, "Issue for [page name] on Facebook. After the integration, every time a post or comment is escalated and assigned, an message is sent that opens a ticket. For deeper CRM system integrations, contact Adobe.

290 Settings 290 Settings Configure settings to enable social monitoring of terms, publishing applications, interacting with social media users, and more. Listening Rules Manage your active and inactive rules, add rules to track one by one using the Add tab, and add multiple rules in bulk by using the Bulk tab. The Rules Builder lets you create complex rules to track activities on the social web. You can continue tracking keywords mentioned on the social web as you could in previous versions of Social. However, the Rules Builder lets you track activities not associated with keywords, for example Foursquare check-ins or tweets that originated within a geographic boundary. For example, a city's Tourism department might want to monitor all Foursquare check-ins in its downtown area. Or, a members of a sporting team's public relations department might want to monitor all tweets that are tweeted within a specified distance of its venue. The possibilities are nearly limitless. For a list of all of the different filter types you can use to create rules, see Filter List. Add Rules to Track Add individual rules to track activities on the social web. Training Video: To view a short video explaining how to use the Rule Builder, see Listening Enhancements. 1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. Click the Add tab. 3. Fill in the fields: Display Name Platforms Collection Dates Filters Campaigns Classifications and Tags

291 Settings 291 Note: Click the icons in the user interface to access online Help. 4. Click Add Rule to add the term to the Active Terms list. 5. Add additional rules, as desired, by repeating the instructions in this topic. Display Name Specify the name for this rule. The name you specify displays in Social reports. This name is not unique and can contain as many as 255 characters. In previous versions of Social, each term displayed in reports included the actual term and all inclusions and exclusions. Using "pretty" display names helps make your reports more readable. As explained in Platforms, you can create several rules that collect mentions of the same keywords by listening on different social platforms (such as Facebook, Twitter, G+, Foursquare, and so forth). Creating multiple rules targeting different platforms lets you add additional filter types to rules to target and narrow your results. These individual rules can have the same name so that information about collected activities is grouped in Social reports. For example, if you create a rule named "Adobe Sweepstakes" that collects mentions of "adobe" and "sweepstakes" from several platforms (Facebook, Metacafe, G+, YouTube, etc.), you can also create a rule with the same name that collects mentions of "adobe" and "sweepstakes" from only Twitter and Foursquare to take advantage of the geo capabilities of these two platforms. Because both of these rules have the same name, when you look at the Social Buzz report, for example, the mentions that both rules collected are grouped with the same display name, "Adobe Sweepstakes." When you create rules with the same name, you are basically creating classifications for reporting purposes. Platforms Select one or more social platforms on which you want Social to listen for this rule. Be aware that the available filter types (discussed below) depend on the selected platforms. If you select more than one platform, the available filter types include only those types that are applicable for all selected platforms. For this reason, as best practice, you might want to create keywords to collect brand names and select multiple providers, because the Keyword filter type is available for most providers. However, you might want to create multiple, similar

292 Settings 292 rules that listen on different platforms to take advantage of the additional filter types that are available for specific platforms. For example, Foursquare and Twitter both let you add geo filters. However, if you select Facebook, Foursquare, and Twitter as providers, you cannot use the geo filter functionality for this rule because Facebook does not support this functionality. Another example is if you want to use the Word Proximity filter type so that only mentions that contain two terms in close proximity in a post are collected. This filter is available for Tumblr, Disqus, and Twitter only. If you select these three providers, but also select Facebook, you cannot use the Word Proximity filter type for this rule. Social currently supports the following platforms: Supported Platforms Blogs Facebook G+ Reddit Twitter DailyMotion Flickr Instagram Tumblr VK Disqus Foursquare MetaCafe WordPress* YouTube * Social listens on sites hosted by WordPress.com and powered by WordPress.org. Note: If you choose Twitter as one of your selected platforms, the Twitter Preview automatically displays. Adobe plans to add more social platforms to this list in the future. If there is a particular platform that you would like us to add, contact your Account Manager. Collection Dates Specify the start and end dates to specify a date range for which you want to collect data for this rule.you can select a date in the past to backfill Twitter data. In the Start Date and End Date boxes, specify the date range for which you want to start and stop collecting data for the rule. Or, you can click, then specify the desired dates. The End Date is optional. If you do not specify an end date, the rule will be tracked forever, unless you delete the rule from Social, which moves the rule to the inactive list. Using a start and end date lets you track rules for the duration of a special campaign. For example, if you have a Summer campaign that runs during the months of June, July, and August, you can set the starting date as June 1 and the end date at August 31. Data for this rule will be tracked only during the specified time range. Note: You can specify up to the 28 days in the past to backfill historical Twitter data. You cannot backfill data for other social platforms. After historical data has been requested, the request cannot be reversed. Use discretion when requesting historical data for rules. For important information to help you manage costs associated with backfilling data, see Backfilling Twitter Data.

293 Settings 293 If you add a new term without backfilling data, that term will start collecting data immediately and you should see results in your reporting within approximately two hours. If no tweets match your rule's search criteria, your reports won't populate for that term. In addition, that term will not be present in the metric selector. Backfilling Twitter Data You can retrieve and populate historical Twitter data about tracked rules. You can choose to backfill data while creating a rule or after the rule has been created and activated. Note: Requesting historical data adds an unknown and unpredictable number of mentions to the total for which you are billed and can lead to overage billing. After historical data has been requested, the request cannot be reversed. Use discretion when requesting historical data. It might take up to 24 hours to back fill historical data. A status bar displays the process' progress. The backfill process typically takes approximately 24 hours to complete and for the reports to populate. The time needed depends on how many days you backfilled and if Social is backfilling a large amount of data due to the rule being a high-traffic rule. For high-traffic rules for which you want to backfill many days, we often see backfills take as long as 48 hours. We cannot expedite any specific backfill. All of the terms are uploaded into a queue that we cannot adjust. To backfill data while creating a rule 1. While creating a rule on the Add page (Settings > Rules > Add), in the Start Date box, specify the date on which you want to start collecting data for the rule. Or Next to Start Date, click, then specify the date on which you want to start collecting data for the rule. You can select up to the previous 28 days. 2. Finish configuring the rule settings as explained in Add Rules to Track. To backfill data after a rule has been created and activated 1. On the Active page (Settings > Rules > Active), from the Active Rules list, double-click the desired rule to display additional options.

294 Settings Click to open the rule in edit mode. 3. In the Start Date box, specify the date on which you want to start collecting data for the rule. Or Next to Start Date, click, then specify the date on which you want to start collecting data for the rule. You can select up to the previous 28 days. 4. Finish configuring the rule settings as explained in Add Rules to Track. 5. Click Update Rule. Filters Use the Basic and Builder tabs to create rules to track activities on the social web. As best practice, use the Basic tab if you are familiar with setting up listening rules and are comfortable using boolean logic. Use the Builder tab if you are unfamiliar with setting up rules. The Builder prevents you, for example, from adding a filter that is not supported by your selected platforms. When using the Basic tab, be aware that you can specify filters that are not applicable for your selected platforms. In this case, nothing will be collected for that filter. This section contains the following information: Maximum Character Length for Rules Basic Tab Builder Tab

295 Settings 295 Maximum Character Length for Rules The maximum character length for rules depends on the platform, as explained in the following table. These lengths are imposed limitations from the data providers and apply to rules created using the Basic and Builder tabs. Platforms that allow as many as 2,048 characters in listening rules Disqus Foursquare Tumblr Twitter WordPress Platforms that allow as many as 255 characters in listening rules Blogs DailyMotion Facebook Flickr G+ Instagram MetaCafe Reddit YouTube VK If you exceed the character limit for a provider, an error message displays. Be aware that if you select providers from each group, your rule cannot exceed the most restrictive character limit (255). You could modify the rule to fit the most restrictive character limit; however, best practice is to create two rules with the same display name. Each rule can then comply with its respective character limit. Basic Tab The Basic tab opens by default. Add a rule using keywords. You can use Boolean operators, such as All (AND), Any (OR), and None (NOT) to narrow results. For a full list of supported filters, see Filter List. The following illustration shows a rule created on the Basic tab using boolean logic: Operators are case-sensitive. When typing the AND, OR, or NOT operators, ensure that they are all uppercase letters.

296 Settings 296 For example, consider the following examples: AND hash_tag:adobe Not Keywords:photoshop AND hash_tag:adobe NOT Keywords:photoshop Not in the first example should be NOT, as in the second example (all uppercase letters). Note that while you are creating a rule on the Basic tab, you can click the Builder tab, if desired. However, some syntax code that you can specify on the Basic tab might not be compatible with the Builder functionality. If this is the case, the Builder tab is disabled. For example, if you change parentheses in the above example, the Builder tab will be disabled and a pop-up message displays informing you that the rule is supported for collection purposes but it cannot be displayed in the Builder. For Twitter only, you can click Preview to display the Twitter Preview pane. For more information, see Twitter Preview. Builder Tab After you select one or more platforms, the Filters section expands to display more options. The Builder tab lets you construct term sets using an intuitive user interface using the three operators that Social supports: All (AND), Any (OR), and None (NOT), as explained below.

297 Settings 297 From the All (AND) and None (NOT) drop-down lists, select the desired filter types, provide user input as needed, then click Add next to each operator. From the Any (OR) drop-down lists, select the desired filter type, provide user input as needed, then click Add to New Group to create the initial Any (OR) group (boolean parenthesis) for the filter. To add another filter to this group, select the desired filter type, provide user input as needed, then click Add to Group. To add another Any (OR) group (boolean parenthesis), click Add to New Group.You can then click rules, as needed. inside any group to add additional You can add multiple filters for each filter operator to target and narrow your results. For more information, see the text below each filter in the user interface or refer to Filter List.

298 Settings 298 As you build a rule by adding operators and filters, the rule displays in the Generated Rule box. You can use the Generated Rule box to understand the logic that Social uses to construct rule sets and to help you fine-tune your rule. For example, suppose you create a rule using the following operators and rules: You select Twitter as the platform. In the All (AND) section, you add the keywords "adobe" and "social," separated by commas. In the All (AND) section, you add the Word Proximity filter and specify 3. In the All (AND) section, you add the Has Geo filter set. In the Any (OR) section, you add the keywords, "analytics" and "adlens," separated by commas. In the None (NOT) section, you add the keywords, "brick" and "house," separated by commas. Your completed rule should look like the following illustration. Note the text in the Generated Rule box at the bottom of the illustration.

299 Settings 299 This rule will collect data for tweets that contain geo data and mention both "adobe" and "social" within three words of each other, mention "analytics" or "adlens," but do not mention "brick" or "house." You can add more filters as desired, or you can delete existing filters by clicking the x on each filter's tile. In addition, you can add more platforms at any time, providing that these platforms support all of your selected filters. If you have selected a filter that is not supported by a particular platform, that platform's check box is disabled. In summary, if you select multiple platforms before selecting filter types, only those filters supported by all selected

300 Settings 300 platforms are available for use. However, if you attempt to add additional platforms after you have selected one or more filter, the platforms you intend to add must also support the selected filters. The text in the Generated Rule box is not editable. If you want to further edit the rule using boolean logic, click the Basic tab at the top of the Rules section to display the generated rule in an editable text box. Click the following link for a full list of all available filters, with platform information, descriptions, examples, and advanced syntax to use on the Basic tab. Filter List Platform information, descriptions, and examples for all available filters you can use while adding rules to track using Social. In the Description and Examples column in the table below, the User Input information specifies the input you must perform when using the user interface on the Builder tab. The Advanced Syntax information specifies the syntax you must use when building a rule using boolean logic on the Advanced tab. For example, to specify the syntax for a Twitter rule using the Author filter, you would specify author:mtalbot to collect mentions of a term on Twitter by the user with the "mtalbot" Twitter handle. For more information, see Add Rules to Track. Note: If a provider receives a rule with filters it does not support, it gets treated as a keyword. For example, if Disqus gets part of its rule as country_code:us, it will look for the keyword, country_code:us. Social supports the following filters (in alphabetical order): Filter Activity URL Contains Applicable Platforms WordPress Description and Examples Matches activities where the activity URL (i.e. permalink) contains the given phrase or keyword. URL encodings are not encoded at this time. User Input: Specify a phrase or keyword. Example: adobe matches all activities with "adobe" in the URL.

301 Settings 301 Filter Applicable Platforms Description and Examples Advanced Syntax: activity_url_contains Syntax Example: activity_url_contains:adobe Author Twitter Matches any activity that matches the given user. User Input: Specify an author. Do not include character. Example: adobe but not adobe photoshop. Advanced Syntax: author Syntax Example: author:mtalbot Bio Contains Twitter Matches tweets whose author's Twitter bio contains the given keyword or phrase. User Input: Specify the desired value. Example: Start-up matches Start-up junkie but not Software Engineer startup. Advanced Syntax: bio_contains Syntax Example: bio_contains:start-up Bio Language Twitter Matches tweets where the user's bio-level language setting matches a given language. This language setting simply changes the language in which Twitter displays its UI text (it does not translate tweet text). This is not a language classification. Customers have reported that this setting is often left in its default of English even when the Tweets an account is generating are in a non-english language. We recommend its use in conjunction with the language classification operator (lang) rather than a standalone indicator of a user or Tweet's language. User Input: Select the desired language from the drop-down list. Advanced Syntax: bio_lang Syntax Example: bio_lang:ja Valid language codes include: Arabic, ar; Danish, da; German, de; Greek, el ; English, en ; Spanish, es; Persian, ; Finnish, fa; French, fr; Hebrew, he; Italian, it; Indonesian, id; Japanese, ja; Korean, ko; Dutch, nl; Norwegian, no; Polish, pl; Portuguese, pt; Russian, ru; Swedish, sv; Thai, tv; Turkish, tr; Ukrianian, uk; Chinese, zh.

302 Settings 302 Filter Bio Location Applicable Platforms Twitter Description and Examples Matches tweets where the user's bio-level location contains the specified keyword or phrase. This operator performs a tokenized match, similar to the normal keyword rules on the message body. The user bio location is a non-normalized, user-generated, free-form string. User Input: Specify the desired value. Example: boulder matches Boulder and Boulder, CO and Beautiful Boulder, CO. Advanced Syntax: bio_location Syntax Example: bio_location:boulder Bio Location Contains Twitter Matches tweets where the user's bio-level location contains the specified substring. User Input: Specify the desired value. Example: boulder matches Boulder and Boulder, CO and Beautiful Boulder, CO. Advanced Syntax: bio_location_contains Syntax Example: bio_location_contains:boulder Bio Name Contains Twitter Matches tweets where the user's display name (not username) as specified in their bio, contains a given substring. User Input: Specify the desired value. Example: Mike matches any tweets from a user who said he was named Mike in his bio. Advanced Syntax: bio_name_contains Syntax Example: bio_name_contains:mike Bounding Box Foursquare, Twitter Matches against the exact location (x,y) of the Checkin or Tweet (when present in Tweet) and against an intersecting Place bounding box if the exact location is not present, where the place is fully contained within the defined region. User Input: Specify the values in the appropriate longitude and latitude boxes. The width and height of the bounding box cannot exceed 25 miles. Example: matches all activities contained in a box around Boulder, CO. Advanced Syntax: bounding_box

303 Settings 303 Filter Applicable Platforms Description and Examples Syntax Example: bounding_box:[ ] Contains Tumblr, Disqus, Twitter, WordPress Substring match for activities that have the given substring in the body, regardless of tokenization. User Input: Specify a word or phrase. Example: phone matches on the phone and telephone. Advanced Syntax: contains Syntax Example: contains:phone Country Code Twitter Matches tweets where the country code associated with a tagged place/location matches the specified country. User Input: Select the desired country code from the drop-down list. Advanced Syntax: country_code Syntax Example: country_code:jp Valid ISO country codes. Country Name Foursquare Matches on the country in which the check-in occurred. User Input: Select the desired country from the drop-down list. Advanced Syntax: country_name Syntax Example: country_name:japan Valid ISO country names. Followers Count Twitter Matches tweets where the author has a friends count (the number of users they follow) that falls within the given range. User Input: Specify the minimum number of friends and the maximum number of friends that the author must follow for a match to be made. Advanced Syntax: followers_count Syntax Example: followers_count: Friends Count Twitter Matches tweets where the author has a followers count within the given range. User Input: Specify the minimum number of followers and the maximum number of followers that the author must have for a match to be made. Advanced Syntax: friends_count Syntax Example: friends_count:

304 Settings 304 Filter From Applicable Platforms Tumblr, Disqus, Twitter, WordPress Description and Examples Matches any activity from a specific user. Can either be a username or MD5-hashed . For Twitter, the user ID can be used as well. Do not include character. User Input: Specify a username. Example: mikesmith matches all posts, comments, or likes from mikesmith. Advanced Syntax: from Syntax Example: from:mikesmith Gender Foursquare Matches on gender. User Input: Select the desired gender from the drop-down list: Male or Female. Advanced Syntax: gender Syntax Example: gender:female Hashtag Instagram, Tumblr, Twitter Matches any activity with the given hashtag. Also supports phrases to match "phrase tags" that contain whitespace characters. This operator performs an exact match, not a tokenized match. The rule 2012 matches posts with the exact tag 2012, but not those with the tag 2012 election. User Input: Specify a hashtag. Do not include the hashtag (#) character. Example: boulderfire matches all posts containing or tagged #boulderfire, but not #boulderfirefighters. Advanced Syntax: hash_tag Syntax Example: hash_tag:boulderfire Has Geo Twitter Matches activities which contain geo (geographic data) in the metadata. User Input: None. Advanced Syntax: has:geo Syntax Example: has:geo Has Hashtags Twitter Matches activities that contain hashtags in the message body. User Input: None. Advanced Syntax: has:hashtags Syntax Example: has:hashtags

305 Settings 305 Filter Has Language Applicable Platforms WordPress Description and Examples Matches activities that have been classified as any language. User Input: None. Advanced Syntax: has:lang Syntax Example: has:lang Has Links Tumblr, Disqus, Twitter, WordPress Matches activities that contain links in the message body. User Input: None. Advanced Syntax: has:links Syntax Example: has:links Has Media Twitter Matches any activities that contain a media URL, such as an image or video. User Input: None. Advanced Syntax: has:media Syntax Example: has:media Has Mentions Twitter Matches any activities that mention other users. User Input: None. Advanced Syntax: is:comment Syntax Example: is:comment Is Comment WordPress Matches only activities that are comments. User Input: None. Advanced Syntax: has:mentions Syntax Example: has:mentions Is Reblog Tumblr Delivers only reblogs that match a rule. Can also be negated to exclude reblogs that match a rule from delivery and only original content is delivered. User Input: None. Advanced Syntax: is:reblog Syntax Example: is:reblog Is Retweet Twitter Delivers only explicit retweets that match a rule. Can also be negated to exclude retweets that match a rule from delivery and only original content is delivered. User Input: None.

306 Settings 306 Filter Applicable Platforms Description and Examples Advanced Syntax: is:retweet Syntax Example: is:retweet Is Verified Twitter Delivers only Tweets where the author is "verified" by Twitter. User Input: None. Advanced Syntax: is:verified Syntax Example: is:verified Keywords Blogs, Facebook, G+, Reddit, YouTube, DailyMotion, Flickr, Tumblr, Disqus, Metacafe, Twitter, VK, WordPress Matches an exact work or phrase. Word boundaries are respected. To match a substring, use the Contains filter, if applicable for the selected platforms. User Input: Specify a word or phrase. You can specify multiple words by separating them with a comma. For more information about specifying terms, see Guidelines for Keyword Selection. Example: phone matches on the phone but not on the telephone. Advanced Syntax: keywords Syntax Example: keywords:phone Klout Score Twitter Matches tweets whose author's Klout score (if, and only if, they have one) are within the given range. User Input: Specify the minimum and maximum Klout score. Klout scores are represented by integers from 1 to 100. Advanced Syntax: klout_score Syntax Example: klout_score: Language Tumblr, Disqus, Twitter, WordPress Matches activities that have been classified as a being a part of a particular language. Only one language is allowed. User Input: Select the desired language from the drop-down list. Advanced Syntax: lang Syntax Example: lang:ja Valid language codes include: Arabic, ar; Danish, da; German, de; Greek, el ; English, en ; Spanish, es; Persian, ; Finnish, fa; French, fr; Hebrew, he; Italian, it; Indonesian, id; Japanese, ja; Korean, ko; Dutch, nl; Norwegian, no; Polish, pl; Portuguese, pt; Russian, ru; Swedish, sv; Thai, tv; Turkish, tr; Ukrianian, uk; Chinese, zh.

307 Settings 307 Filter Listed Count Applicable Platforms Twitter Description and Examples Matches tweets where the author has been listed within Twitter a number of times falls within the given range. User Input: Specify the minimum and maximum list count. Advanced Syntax: listed_count Syntax Example: listed_count: Locality Foursquare Exact matches on the city or town name. To reduce collisions, can be combined with region and country operators. User Input: Specify the desired locality. Example: boulder matches check-ins to Boulder, CO and Boulder, MT. Advanced Syntax: locality Syntax Example: locality:boulder Locality Contains Foursquare Substring match on the city or town name. To reduce collisions, can be combined with region and country operators. User Input: Specify the desired locality. Example: boulder matches check-ins to Boulder, CO and Boulder City, NV. Advanced Syntax: locality_contains Syntax Example: locality_contains:boulder Place Twitter Matches tweets tagged with the specified location. User Input: Specify the desired location. Example: Rio de Janeiro matches tweets from Rio de Janeiro. Advanced Syntax: place Syntax Example: place:rio de Janeiro Place Contains Twitter Matches tweets where the tagged place/location contains a given substring. User Input: Specify part of the name of the desired location. Example: Boulder matches Boulder and Boulder City. Advanced Syntax: place_contains Syntax Example: place_contains:boulder Postal Code Foursquare Exact match on the postal code.

308 Settings 308 Filter Applicable Platforms Description and Examples User Input: Specify the desired postal code. Example: matches check-ins with the postal code Advanced Syntax: postal_code Syntax Example: Valid postal codes. Post Title Tumblr, WordPress Matches an exact phrase within the title of a post. User Input: Specify the desired value. Example: Big Data matches Making sense of big data within your company. Advanced Syntax: post_title Syntax Example: post_title:big Data Post Title Contains Tumblr, WordPress Matches activities that have the given substring in the body, regardless of tokenization. In other words, this does a pure substring match, and does not consider word boundaries. User Input: Specify a word or phrase. Example: phone matches on the phone but not on the telephone. Advanced Syntax: post_title_contains Syntax Example: post_title_contains:phone Radius From Point Foursquare, Twitter Matches against the exact location (x,y) of the activity when present, and against an intersecting place bounding box if the exact location is not present, where the place is fully contained within the defined region. User Input: Specify the desired distance, select mi (miles) or km (kilometers) from the drop-down list, then specify the values in the appropriate longitude and latitude boxes. The radius cannot exceed 25 miles. Example: mi matches activity within 10 miles of 17th and Pearl Street in Boulder, CO. Advanced Syntax: point_radius Syntax Example: point_radius:[ mi] Reblogs Of Tumblr Matches activities that are reblogs of a specified tumblog. Accepts only tumblog names. User Input: Specify the desired value. Example: phone matches on the phone but not on the telephone. Advanced Syntax: reblogs_of

309 Settings 309 Filter Applicable Platforms Description and Examples Syntax Example: reblogs_of:phone Region Foursquare Exact match on the state, province, territory, district, and so forth (user defined). User Input: Specify the desired value. For some types of regions, including U.S. states, these are 2-character abbreviations. For other regions, these are full names. To reduce collisions, this rule can be combined with the Country Name filter. Example: ma matches check-ins to Massachusetts and Maranhao because both are abbreviated to MA. Advanced Syntax: region Syntax Example: region:ma Retweets Of Twitter Matches tweets that are retweets of a specified user. Accepts both usernames and userids. User Input: Specify the desired username, separated by commas. Example: justinbieber matches any retweets of justinbieber. Advanced Syntax: retweets_of Syntax Example: retweets_of:justinbieber Rule Variables Blogs, DailyMotion, Disqus, Facebook, Flickr, Foursquare, G+, Instagram, Metacafe, Reddit, Tumblr, WordPress, Twitter, VK, YouTube Includes a rule variable. This field is dynamic. If the external rule variable is modified, this rule is modified as well. Note: If you add a rule variable to a listening rule and assign the rule to a social platform, any individual filters used in the rule variable must be applicable for that social platform. For example, the keyword filter is not applicable to Instagram. If you create a rule containing a variable that contains a keyword filter and assign it to Instagram, no data will be returned. Likewise, if you create a variable that contains the Bio Location filter, and include that variable in a listening rule for Facebook, no data will be returned because Bio Location applies to Twitter only. User Input: Select the desired rule variable. You can add multiple rule variables. Example: adobe social Advanced Syntax: rule_variable Syntax Example: rule_variable:[adobe social]

310 Settings 310 Filter Source Applicable Platforms Twitter Description and Examples Matches any tweet generated by the given source application. The value must be either the name of the application, or the application's URL. Cannot be used alone. User Input: Specify the application name or its URL. Example: web matches activities from the web but not activities from a mobile app. Advanced Syntax: source Syntax Example: source:web Source URL Contains Tumblr Matches activities where the post's author has attributed the post's content to a URL containing the given substring. Note that this is an optional field that is editorially entered by the post's author. User Input: Specify the desired value. Example: phone matches on the phone but not on the telephone. Advanced Syntax: source_url_contains Syntax Example: source_url_contains:phone Statuses Count Twitter Matches tweets where the author has posted a number of statuses that falls within the given range. User Input: Specify the minimum number of statuses and the maximum number of statuses that the author must have for a match to be made. Advanced Syntax: statuses_count Syntax Example: statuses_count: Thread URL Contains Disqus Matches activities posted to a web page if its URL contains the given phrase or keyword. URL encodings are not encoded at this time. User Input: Specify the desired value. Example: obama matches all activities posted to a web page with the word "obama" in the URL. Advanced Syntax: thread_url_contains Syntax Example: thread_url_contains:obama Timezone Twitter Matches tweets where the user-selected timezone specified in a user's profile settings matches the specified timezone. User Input: Select the desired timezone from the drop-down list. Advanced Syntax: time_zone

311 Settings 311 Filter Applicable Platforms Description and Examples Syntax Example: time_zone:tokyo To Disqus, Twitter Matches any activity that is in reply to a particular user. In Disqus, this operator only supports the hashed actor IDs delivered via the Disqus API, not pretty usernames or displaynames present on the platform. In Twitter, the value must be the user's screen name (handle) or numeric ID (excluding character). User Input: Specify a username. Example: mikesmith matches all activity in reply to mikesmith. Advanced Syntax: to Syntax Example: to:mikesmith Type Tumblr Matches activities of a given type: answer, audio, chat, link, photo, quote, text, or video. User Input: Select an option from the drop-down list: Answer, Audio, Chat, Link, Photo, Quote, Text, or Video. Advanced Syntax: type Syntax Example: type:video URL Contains Disqus, Twitter, WordPress, Matches activities with URLs that literally contain the given phrase or keyword. User Input: Specify a phrase or keyword. Example: adobe matches but not search on adobe. Advanced Syntax: url_contains Syntax Example: url_contains:adobe Venue Category Foursquare Exact match on the Foursquare venue category. For venues with multiple categories, will match an activity if any of the venue categories match. Matches against category name, not shortname or pluralname. User Input: Specify the desired value. Example: italian restaurant matches check-ins to Italian restaurants but not check-ins to just the generic restaurant category. Advanced Syntax: venue_category Syntax Example:

312 Settings 312 Filter Venue Category Contains Applicable Platforms Foursquare Description and Examples Substring match on the Foursquare venue category. For venues with multiple categories, will match an activity if any of the venue categories match. Matches against category name, not shortname or pluralname. User Input: Specify the desired value. Example: restaurant matches Foursquare venues with the categories italian restaurants and mexican restaurants. Advanced Syntax: venue_category_contains Syntax Example: venue_category:italian restaurant Venue ID Foursquare Matches the Foursquare ID for a specific venue. These match the IDs seen on the Foursquare application. User Input: Specify the desired value. Example: 4d598c ea809ab789f matches check-ins to Ozo Coffee. Advanced Syntax: venue_id Syntax Example: venue_id:4d598c ea809ab789f Venue Name Foursquare Exact match of the Foursquare venue name. User Input: Specify the desired value. Example: starbucks matches Starbucks but not Starbucks Coffee. Advanced Syntax: venue_name Syntax Example: venue_name:starbucks Venue Name Contains Foursquare Substring match on the Foursquare venue name. User Input: Specify the desired value. Example: starbuck matches Starbucks and Starbuck's. Advanced Syntax: venue_name_contains Syntax Example: venue_name_contains:starbuck Verb Disqus Matches activities where a new comment has been created, updated, or deleted. User Input: Select an option from the drop-down list: Post, Update, or Delete. Advanced Syntax: verb Syntax Example: verb:delete

313 Settings 313 Filter URL Contains Applicable Platforms Tumblr, Disqus, Twitter Description and Examples Matches activities with URLs that literally contain the given phrase or keyword. User Input: Specify the desired value. Example: google matches but not search on google. Advanced Syntax: url_contains Syntax Example: url_contains:google Word Proximity Tumblr, Disqus, Twitter, WordPress Matches an activity where the keywords are no more than N tokens from each other. Phrases are not allowed. This filter is especially useful for posts that contain a lot of text or for tweets in which you want the words to be in close proximity to each other. User Input: Specify two keywords, then specify the maximum number of words that can separate the two words to be considered a match. Punctuation, such as an apostrophe or hyphen, is not allowed inside keywords. For this reason, "we're" and " " cannot be used as keywords. An error message displays when you click Add if a keyword contains punctuation. Example: adobe and photoshop. If you specify these two words, then select 4 from the drop-down list, the following phrases are considered matches because no more than four words separate the two keywords: adobe photoshop or adobe makes photoshop. The following phrase would not be considered a match because more than four words separate the two keywords: adobe recently released a new version of photoshop. Advanced Syntax: proximity:[word1 word2 4] Syntax Example: proximity:[adobe photoshop 4] Campaigns Associate this rule to a previously configured campaign.

314 Settings 314 To associate this rule to a specific campaign that you have previously set up, select it from the drop-down list. Associating individual rules with campaigns lets you view individual rules with the number of mentions generated by each rule on the Campaign Details report. For more information, see Campaigns. Classifications and Tags Select an existing classification group and classification for this rule. You can also create a new classification group and classification. To classify this rule, select a classification group and classification from the drop-down lists, then click Add. You can also create new classification groups and classifications from within Social by specifying the classification group and classification in the text boxes. This functionality gives you the option of creating classifications or assigning terms to classifications without using SAINT. If you want to add a subclassification to the rule, you must also add its parent classification. Twitter Preview Use the Twitter Preview pane to better understand what Twitter users are currently saying about activities on the social web that your rule and its filters will track. When you specify a rule using Twitter as at least one of its platforms, the real-time Twitter Preview pane automatically displays on the right side if you are using the Builder tab to create the rule. The pane automatically updates as you add additional filters to the rule.you can use this information to refine the rule, if desired. If you are using the Basic tab to create the rule, click Preview to display the Twitter Preview pane. If you do not select Twitter as a platform, the Twitter Preview pane does not display. For example, the following example shows the results and tweets for the last 30 days for a rule the contains the following filters: Contains "adobe" and "social" as keywords Contains media Does not contain "brick" and "house" as keywords

315 Settings 315 You can mouse over any data point on the graph to display the search count for that day. You can click a user's Twitter handle to display the user's Twitter profile. The profile contains metrics for that user, including the number of tweets, following, and followers. You can also see the user's recent tweets. Click to see that tweet's details. You can also preview the results for active or inactive rules. For more information, see Preview Active or Inactive Rules. Rule Variables Create and configure rule variables for use in listening rules. Rule variables let you create snippets of rules that can then be added to multiple listening rules. If you later update a rule variable, any listening rules that contain that variable are automatically updated. You can think of rules variables as partial rules or even variables. For example, suppose you want to create many listening rules to collect data about your primary competitors. Without using rule variables, you might need to add conditions, such as "Competitor1 OR Competitor2 OR Competitor3" to many rules. Not only is this time-consuming, it is inefficient. Suppose after collecting data about competitor mentions for several months using listening rules, you want to add a new competitor to all of your listening rules. Without a rule variable, you would need to edit each listening rule individually. Using a rule variable, you could add "competitor4" in one place and the change would automatically update each listening rule. The previous scenario uses the keyword filter, but you can use any filter as part of a rule variable. Note: If you add a rule variable to a listening rule and assign the rule to a social platform, any individual filters used in the rule variable must be applicable for that social platform. For example, the keyword filter is not applicable to Instagram. If you create a rule containing a variable that contains a keyword filter and assign it

316 Settings 316 to Instagram, no data will be returned. Likewise, if you create a variable that contains the Bio Location filter, and include that variable in a listening rule for Facebook, no data will be returned because Bio Location applies to Twitter only. Add a Rule Variable Create and configure a rule variable for use in other listening rules. 1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. Click the Rule Variables tab. 3. Click Add. 4. Specify a name for the rule variable. A descriptive name becomes very useful if you create numerous rule variables. The name will help you locate rule variables faster for editing, adding to listening rules, and so forth. Note: The variable name cannot contain a hyphen ( - ). 5. Specify the desired rule using boolean logic.

317 Settings 317 If you are unfamiliar with creating rules using boolean logic, you can create a rule using the Filters section on the Add page and then copy the rule from the Generated Rule box and paste it into the Add Rule box for the rule variable, shown above. The following examples show properly formatted rule variables: AND (keywords:competitor1 OR keywords:competitor2 OR keywords:competitor3) NOT keywords:competitor4 This rule variable collects data for the keywords "competitor1," or "competitor2," or "competitor3," but not "competitor4." AND (hash_tag:adobe OR hash_tag:adobesocial) NOT hash_tag:photoshop This rule variable collects data for the hashtags "adobe" or "adobesocial," but not "photoshop." 6. Click Save. Edit or Delete a Rule Variable Edit a rule variable so that the changes automatically affect all listening rules of which it is a part. 1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. Click the Rule Variables tab. 3. Click the rule variable that you want to edit. 4. Click Edit, then edit the rule, as desired. 5. Click Save. To delete the a rule variable, click Delete.

318 Settings 318 Add Rules in Bulk Quickly and efficiently add large sets of rules using a line-delimited text file. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Terms Set Up. Within Social, using the Add tab, you can conveniently manage rules that you want to track. The Add tab, however, lets you add new rules only one at a time. For more information, see Add Rules to Track. You can use the Bulk Add tab to quickly and efficiently add large sets of rules. Upload Rules Add rules in bulk to Social that you want to track on the social web. Note: These instructions help you add rules in bulk.you can also add rules one at a time. For more information, see Add Rules to Track. 1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules. 2. Click the Bulk Add tab. 3. Click Choose File, then browse to and select the file you want to upload. You can upload any line-delimited text file. If you want to import a file created in Microsoft Excel, you must save it as a text file before uploading it into Social. Or You can upload a CSV file. The advantage of uploading a CSV file is that, in addition to uploading rules, you can also specify or exclude social providers that will listen for individual rules. The following illustration is a sample file:

319 Settings 319 If you want to upload only rules using a CSV file, you must have one column labeled "Rule." The remaining columns are optional. If you want to specify or exclude providers from listening to individual rules, you must have an additional column labeled "Provider." If you leave the "Provider" row empty for an individual rule, Social enables listening for that rule for all providers that Social supports. If you specify individual providers, Social enables listening for those providers only. In the previous example, Social will listen for "adobe + photoshop - house" on all providers that Social supports. However, Social will listen for "photoshop" only on Facebook, Flickr, Tumblr, and Google+. When you specify providers, ensure that you spell them exactly as listed on the Platforms tab, but case does not matter. Also, separate individual providers with a comma (,). The "Start Date" and "End Date" columns specify dates that collection for the rule begin and end. If you do not specify a start date, collection begins immediately after you upload the file into Social. If you do not specify an end date, the rule will be tracked forever, unless you delete the rule from Social. The "Display Name" column is used to specify a "pretty" display name for reports. The Type and Class columns above can contain any label you desire and are used to classify the rule. These columns are for classification and the values in this column correspond to your classifications. If a value in this column is empty, that classification is not assigned. Note: You cannot create new classifications using a.csv file upload. The value you specify in the Class column must correspond to an existing classification created in SAINT. Note that these columns correspond to the options you can specify in the Rules Builder. For more information about these options, see Platforms, Collection Dates, Display Name, and Classifications and Tags. Ensure that you save the file as a CSV file (comma delimited) before uploading it into Social. 4. Click Add Terms to add the terms in the file to the list of currently tracked terms. This option merges the terms with your currently tracked terms. Or Click Replace All Terms to replace all currently tracked terms with the terms in the file. This option replaces your currently tracked terms. To deactivate rules that you no longer want to track, see Deactivating or Reactivating Rules. Download Rules You can download the rules you are currently tracking to a text file. 1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules.

320 Settings Click in the top right corner of the page, then save the text file to the desired location. Manage Active Rules Edit active rules, preview rule results in the Twitter Preview pane, or delete active rules that you no longer want to track. Delete Active Rules Delete active rules that you no longer want to track. You can simultaneously delete multiply rules, or you can view a rule's configuration before choosing whether to delete it. 1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. Click the Active tab, if necessary.

321 Settings Use the Search box to locate the desired terms. 4. Select the check box next to the display name of one or more rules that you want to delete, then click. Note the number inside parenthesis next to each name. This number indicates how many individual rules exist with the same display name. If you select one or more check boxes and click deleted. Or, all rules with that display name are Click the display name of the desired rule in the list to view its individual rules and their current configurations, then click for the desired rules. Deleting rules individually lets you examine a rule's current configuration in more detail before deciding whether to delete it. You can also delete one or more rules without deleting other rules. Deleted rules are moved to the Inactive page. To "undelete" an inactive rule in order to track it again, you must re-create the rule. For more information, see Deactivating or Reactivating Rules. Edit an Active Rule Edit an active rules's settings, including display name, platforms, collection date range, filters, assigned campaigns, classifications, and tags. 1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. Click the Active tab, if necessary.

322 Settings Use the Search box to locate the desired rules. 4. Click the name of the desired rule in the list to view its current settings. 5. Click, then follow the general instructions in Add Rules to Track. 6. Click Save Rule to save the rule with its newly configured settings. Or Click Save As New Rule to save the rule with a new name while retaining the original rule. This option lets you use an existing rule as a starting point to create a new rule with similar, but different, settings. Preview Active or Inactive Rules Preview an active or inactive rule to better understand what Twitter users are currently saying about activities on the social web that your rule and its filters will track. You can preview the results for active or inactive rules, regardless whether Twitter is a selected platform for the rule or not. For example, if you have an existing rule that targets Foursquare and Tumblr, you could use the Twitter Preview to see the results of that rule had you selected Twitter as a platform. Using the Twitter Preview feature in this way can help you determine if your rule is too narrow or too broad, for example. 1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. Click the Active tab, if necessary. Or

323 Settings 323 Click the Inactive tab. 3. Use the Search box to locate the desired terms. 4. Click the name of the desired rule in the list to view its current configuration, then click. Note that you can preview the results for an existing rule regardless of whether Twitter is one of its assigned platforms. You can mouse over any data point on the graph to display the search count for that day. You can click a user's Twitter handle to display the user's Twitter profile. The profile contains metrics for that user, including the number of tweets, following, and followers. You can also see the user's recent tweets. Click to see that tweet's details. You can also use the Twitter Preview pane as you build rules. For more information, see Twitter Preview. Deactivating or Reactivating Rules Deactivate rules that you no longer want to track. Reactivate inactive rules that you want to track again. To deactivate a rule 1. Follow the instructions in Delete Active Rules Delete Active Rules. Deleting an active rule moves it to the Inactive page. To re-activate an inactive (deleted) rule 1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. Click the Inactive tab. 3. To reactivate a rule, re-add the term as explained in Add Rules to Track. To make it easier to re-add the rule, you can click the rule's name in the Inactive Rules list, then copy rule text.

324 Settings 324 Navigate to the Add page, then paste the rule text into the text box on the Advanced tab in the Filters section. Because the other settings are not copied from the inactive rule, you must specify its display name, collection dates, platforms, campaigns, classifications, and tags, as desired. Guidelines for Keyword Selection Information to help you specify allowable keywords and to ensure that your keywords yield the desired results. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Terms Set Up. Social pricing is based on mentions of your selected keywords. This topic provides information to help you choose appropriate keywords that provide meaningful information while avoiding excessive costs. For more information about adding terms to track, see the following topics: Add Rules to Track Add Rules in Bulk As you build rules and filters, a good tool to gauge the number of potential mentions for a particular term is the real-time Twitter Preview pane. For more information, see Using the Real-Time Twitter Preview Feature to Fine-Tune Rules below. The following sections contain more information to help you track terms appropriately:

325 Settings 325 URLs Case-Sensitivity Character Length of Keywords Illegal Characters Multiple-Word Strings with Spaces Overlapping Keywords Blacklisted Keywords Meaningless Keywords That Are Not Blacklisted Number of Allowable Characters Returning Meaningful Data for Keywords Using the Real-Time Twitter Preview Feature to Fine-Tune Rules Number of Allowable Keywords URLs To track and recognize URLs, you must specify the full URL when you add the keyword. For example, you should specify rather than mysite.com. If you specify a partial URL, Social collects the partial URL as a keyword, but it is not recognized as a URL. However, if you specify the full URL, Social collects the full URL and also collects the partial URL as a keyword (mysite.com, in this example). Case-Sensitivity Keywords are not case-sensitive. "Apple" and "apple" are treated the same. Character Length of Keywords Two-character keywords are acceptable if other keywords in the set using the "And" operator (+ sign) contain at least three characters. For example, you cannot specify "El" as a single keyword. You could, however, specify "El" as a keyword, use an "And" operator, and then specify "Jefe" as the second keyword in the set. You could also specify "El Jefe" as an allowable keyword. You can use single multi-byte characters as a keyword. Illegal Characters Keywords cannot contain the following characters: Quotation mark (") Non-UTF-8 characters Extended ASCII characters. Be aware that, although you can specify Extended ASCII characters by using the Term Section tab, Social does not process Extended ASCII characters correctly. Multiple-Word Strings with Spaces Spaces in keywords cause Social to treat the words as a phrase. For example, if you specify "hello world," that exact phase must be mentioned in a post to be recorded as a mention. Posts containing the text "hello entire world" or "hello" are not recorded as mentions in Social; however, because the real-time Twitter Preview operates on different rules than those for Social, these individual words might display in the preview.

326 Settings 326 Overlapping Keywords Be aware that if you are not careful when selecting keywords to track, you could specify overlapping keywords that inflate your mentions and costs. For example, suppose you specify the following keywords to track: "Adobe," "Analytics," and "Adobe Analytics." If someone tweets, "I love Adobe Analytics," Social records three mentions: one for "Adobe," one for "Analytics," and one for "Adobe Analytics." In this situation, you might want to consider tracking only "Adobe Analytics." Tracking "Adobe" will cause Social to record mentions in many posts that are not related to Adobe Analytics, such as posts about Adobe Photoshop. Likewise, tracking "Analytics" will cause Social to record mentions for posts unrelated to Adobe, such as posts about analytics in general. Blacklisted Keywords Social contains a list of blacklisted keywords that are not allowed as single, initial keywords. For more information, see Blacklisted Keywords. Meaningless Keywords That Are Not Blacklisted Some words are not blacklisted, but should be used with caution to avoid excessive costs. As an extreme example, the acronym "LOL" is not blacklisted, but would return a large number of meaningless mentions. Number of Allowable Characters For Twitter, Tumblr, Foursquare, and Disqus, rules cannot contain more than 2,048 characters, including keywords, positive operators, and negative operators. For all other platforms, rules cannot contain more than 255 characters, including keywords, positive operators, and negative operators. Returning Meaningful Data for Keywords An entire post, comment, or tweet is returned when the keyword criteria is met. For example, if you specify the word "analytics" as a keyword, the following post could be returned: "I Love CompanyB's analytics!" If you are not CompanyB, this data might be meaningless for your purposes (unless you want to track data for your competitors). If your company is CompanyA and this data is meaningless to you, you could specify the keyword using one of the following methods: Use a multiple-word string with spaces: Specify "CompanyA analytics" as a keyword. In this instance, the spaces in keywords cause Social to treat the words as a phrase. In order for a post to be returned, the exact phrase "CompanyA analytics" must be mentioned in a post. The phrase "CompanyB analytics" would not be returned. Use the "And" operator: Specify "CompanyA" as the keyword and use the "And" operator (+ sign) to add "analytics" as the second keyword in the set. In order for a post to be returned, both "CompanyA" and "analytics" must appear in the post, although not necessarily next to each other as a phrase. Use the "Not" operator: Specify "CompanyB" (your competitor) as the keyword and use the "Not" operator (- sign) to add "analytics" as the second keyword in the set. In order for a post to be returned, "CompanyB" must appear in the post; however, "analytics" cannot appear in the post.

327 Settings 327 Using the Real-Time Twitter Preview Feature to Fine-Tune Rules A good tool to gauge the number of potential mentions is the real-time Twitter Preview pane. This feature gives you a better understanding about what Twitter users are currently saying about the specified term. You can use this information to further refine the term. Note: If you do not see your term in the text of the Tweet, click through to the Tweet. The term might be in the URL. For example, suppose your product is a resort and a well-known celebrity tweets about visiting your resort, but that mention does not help promote your brand.you can create a term using the "Not" operator and the celebrity's name to prevent paying for mentions that are useless for your marketing purposes. The Real-time Twitter Data Preview can also help you see that certain terms have different meanings, depending on context. For example, suppose you want to use the word "newt" as a term to gather data about mentions of Newt Gingrich, the U.S. politician. When you type "newt" into the terms field, you might see many posts in the preview pane mentioning lizards, amphibians, or salamanders. Because Newt Gingrich has an unusual name that means something else in different contexts, you should specify terms carefully to avoid collecting unnecessary data or incurring unnecessary costs. In this example, you could specify "Newt Gingrich" as a term. You could also specify "Newt" as the term and then use "Not" operators with the words "lizard," "amphibian," and "salamander." Number of Allowable Keywords Social lets customers specify up to 1,000 keywords. Blacklisted Keywords Social contains a list of blacklisted keywords for the English language that are not allowed as a single, initial keyword. Social costs are associated with mentions of your keywords that are recorded by Social. For this reason, the list of blacklisted keyword contains words that are too generic and are likely to return a large number of not useful mentions. If you attempt to specify a blacklisted keyword, Social displays an error message when you click Add to inform you that the term is too generic. Blacklisted keywords can be used inside a multiple-word keyword because spaces in terms cause Social to treat the words as a phrase. For example, the word "and" is a blacklisted term. You can, however, create a search term for "apples and bananas." You could also create a term set that contains "apple", the "And" operator (+ sign), and "banana." The following English-language keywords are blacklisted and cannot be used as a single, initial keyword. Blacklisted Keywords a able about above abroad according accordingly her here hereafter hereby herein here's hereupon secondly see seeing seem seemed seeming seems

328 Blacklisted Keywords seen hers across self herself actually selves he's adj sensible hi after sent him afterwards serious himself again seriously his against seven hither ago several hopefully ahead shall how ain't shan't howbeit all she help allow she'd however allows she'll http almost she's hundred alone should i along shouldn't i'd alongside since ie already six if also so ignored although some i'll always somebody i'm am someday immediate amid somehow in amidst someone inasmuch among something inc amongst sometime inc. an sometimes indeed and somewhat indicate another somewhere indicated any soon indicates anybody sorry inner anyhow specified inside anyone specify insofar anything 328 Settings

329 Blacklisted Keywords specifying instead anyway still into anyways sub inward anywhere such is apart sup isn't appear sure it appreciate t it'd appropriate take it'll are taken its aren't taking it's around tell itself as tends i've a's th j aside than just ask thank k asking thanks keep associated thanx keeps at that kept available that'll know away thats known awfully that's knows b that've l back the last backward their lately backwards theirs later be them latter became themselves latterly because then least become thence less becomes there lest becoming thereafter let been thereby let's before there'd like beforehand therefore liked begin 329 Settings

330 Blacklisted Keywords therein likely behind there'll likewise being there're little believe theres look below there's looking beside thereupon looks besides there've low best these lower better they ltd between they'd m beyond they'll made both they're mainly brief they've make but thing makes by things many c think may came third maybe can thirty mayn't cannot this me cant thorough mean can't thoroughly meantime caption those meanwhile cause though merely causes three might certain through mightn't certainly throughout mine changes thru minus clearly thus miss c'mon till more co to moreover co. together most com too mostly come took mr comes toward mrs concerning 330 Settings

331 Blacklisted Keywords towards much consequently tried must consider tries mustn't considering truly my contain try myself containing trying n contains t's name corresponding twice namely could two nd couldn't u near course un nearly c's under necessary currently underneath need d undoing needn't dare unfortunately needs daren't unless neither definitely unlike never described unlikely neverf despite until neverless did unto nevertheless didn't up new different upon next directly upwards nine do us ninety does use no doesn't used nobody doing useful non done uses none don't using nonetheless down usually noone downwards v no-one during value nor e various normally each versus not edu 331 Settings

332 Blacklisted Keywords very nothing eg via notwithstanding eight viz novel eighty vs now either w nowhere else want o elsewhere wants obviously end was of ending wasn't off enough way often entirely we oh especially we'd ok et welcome okay etc well old even we'll on ever went once evermore were one every we're ones everybody weren't one's everyone we've only everything what onto everywhere whatever opposite ex what'll or exactly what's other example what've others except when otherwise f whence ought fairly whenever oughtn't far where our farther whereafter ours few whereas ourselves fewer whereby out fifth wherein outside first where's over five 332 Settings

333 Blacklisted Keywords whereupon overall followed wherever own following whether p follows which particular for whichever particularly forever while past former whilst per formerly whither perhaps forth who placed forward who'd please found whoever plus four whole possible from who'll presumably further whom probably furthermore whomever provided g who's provides get whose q gets why que getting will quite given willing qv gives wish r go with rather goes within rd going without re gone wonder really got won't reasonably gotten would recent greetings wouldn't recently h www regarding had x regardless hadn't y regards half yes relatively happens yet respectively hardly you right has 333 Settings

334 Settings 334 Blacklisted Keywords hasn't have haven't having he he'd he'll hello help hence round rt s said same saw say saying says second you'd you'll your you're yours yourself yourselves you've z zero Starter's Guide for Listening Take the pulse of brand-related conversations across the social web about your company, products, and competitors using the Adobe Social listening capabilities. The examples in this guide cover the main components of building listening rules, including creating basic and advanced rules, creating classifications, and creating rule variables. Listening gives you a better understand of how your brand is viewed, lets you take into account what your audience is saying about your brand, and helps you respond accordingly. Using the information you gather from your listening strategy, you can interact with your audience in a more meaningful way, focus on developing relationships, and serve your fans more effectively. This guide was developed by one of the Adobe Social Account Managers who specializes in social listening. On a broad scale, marketers rely on social listening data to: Listen to what customers are saying about their brands Understand brand preferences Identify product and customer service issues Surface trends Identify business opportunities Identify potential brand threats Avoid potential crises This guide focuses on helping you implement your basic listening strategies, including listening to what people on the social web are saying about your brand name, competitors, and your products or marketing initiatives. Let's get started. We recommend that you follow the instructions in each topic in order. Listen for Your Brand Name Create rules to listen to what people are saying about your brand name on the social web. Listening rules can be simple or more advanced. The first example shows you how to create a simple rule that listens for mentions of your brand name. The second example shows you how to create a more advanced rule that listens for mentions of your brand name and all of its variations, such as misspellings and differing uses of punctuation.

335 Settings 335 The information you learn in this guide will help you understand the rule-building theories and processes that you can then use in your own listening rules. Build a Basic Listening Rule Get a pulse on what is being said across the social web about your brand name by creating a basic listening rule that listens for mentions of your brand on the social web. Let's start with a basic example: simply listening for "Susie's Bar & Grill." 1. Click Settings > Listening Rules > Add. 2. Name the rule by specifying the Display Name. The first thing we want to do is specify the display name for this rule. Note that the display name is not the rule itself. The display name is the friendly name that appears in reporting for this rule. If you do not specify a display name, the rule itself is used as the display name, which may not be ideal later on to identify your rule. Note: Best practice is to always specify a display name that is simple, yet descriptive. In this example, the display name is simple, just Susie s Bar & Grill, whereas the actual rule itself is more complicated: 3. Choose the platforms that you want to listen on. In order to select the appropriate platforms, it is good to have an idea about the types of filters you will use to build the rule. For name-brand listening, we will likely want to use the Keywords filter, which lets us query most social platforms for a specific keyword or exact phrase. For a complete list of filters, including platform information, descriptions, and examples, see Filter List. Looking at the list of available filters, we can see that the Keywords filter is available on the following platforms: Blogs, Facebook, G+, Reddit, YouTube, DailyMotion, Flickr, Tumblr, Disqus, Metacafe, Twitter, VK, and WordPress. The Keywords filter is not available on Instagram or Foursquare, which makes sense because Instagram lets you listen for hashtags and Foursquare lets you listen for location-based posts, rather than listening for keywords. We will just check off those platforms that support the Keywords filter.

336 Settings 336 Note that you can click Select All, then deselect Instagram and Foursquare to save time and effort. 4. Specify the date range for which you want to collect data. Note: If you choose a start date in the past, a back-end process starts to backfill Twitter data. When backfilling listening terms, be aware that this process can take several hours, and the amount of time it takes depends on how many days you choose to backfill. The End Date is optional. If you do not specify an end date, the rule will be tracked forever, unless you delete the rule from Social. 5. Under Filters, click the Builder tab. The Builder lets you build rules with a user-friendly UI, rather then a free-form text entry. 6. From the All (AND) drop-down list, select Keywords, type "Susie's Bar & Grill" in the text box, then click Add. For now, let s skip all of the other options. Here s how the rule should look:

337 Settings 337 We can see that the generated rule is very simple: Voila! We have now created a rule named Susie s Bar & Grill that will listen for any mentions across the social web for the exact phrase Susie s Bar & Grill on the specified platforms. After you understand how queries are formulated, it might be easier for you to use the free-form text box to enter your queries. To do this, use the Basic tab in the Rule Builder: Note: The default filter for free-form text entry is Keywords. Build an Advanced Listening Rule Get a pulse on what is being said across the social web about your brand name by creating an advanced listening rule that listens for mentions of your brand on the social web, including variations of your brand's name. To create this advanced rule, start by creating a list of all the variations and misspellings of the brand name, in this scenario, "Susie's Bar & Grill." Although most people spell the restaurant s name with the correct spelling (Susie), we have also seen it mentioned as Susy. In order to capture all mentions, we should included both variations, as well as with and without apostrophes. Additionally, there are four possible variations of Bar and Grill that we want to capture, as shown below: Variation in Brand Name Susie's Susy's Susies Susys Variation in Spelling and Format Bar and Grill Bar & Grill Bar and Grille Bar & Grille Using the information in this table, our listening rule needs to take into account 16 variations of "Susie's Bar & Grill." After we have our list, we can use the Rule Builder to create the following query:

338 Settings 338 (Susie s OR Susy s OR Susies OR Susys) AND (Bar and Grill OR Bar & Grill OR Bar and Grille OR Bar & Grille) This rule includes various spellings of Susie s together with various forms of Bar and Grill." Our finished rule will capture mentions for all 16 variations of "Susie's Bar & Grill." 1. Click the Builder tab. 2. In the Any (OR) section, choose Keywords, specify the four variations of the brand name that we identified, then click Add to New Group. Because we can delaminate multiple terms with commas, we can add all terms at once by entering: Susie's, Susy's, Susies, Susys. Here's how the rule should look: By looking at the rule in the Generated Rule section, we can see that the rule looks correct. Now let's create the second part of the rule that includes variations in the spelling and format of "bar & grill." 3. In the Any (OR) section, choose Keywords (this should already be selected), specify the four variations of "Bar & Grill" that we identified, then click Add to New Group. Because we can delaminate multiple terms with commas, we can add all terms at once by entering: Bar and Grill, Bar & Grill, Bar and Grille, Bar & Grille. Here's how the rule should look at this point: We can use the Twitter Preview on the right side to get an idea of what a sample Tweet would like for this query. As a sanity check, this example looks correct:

339 Settings 339 Because we are listening for a brand name in this example, we won t choose a specific social campaign to associate with this query. For this example, let s skip classifying this query as well. We won't save this rule at this point because we want to further refine it by following the instructions in Share of Voice Listening. In this second example, we are gaining a more comprehensive view of all the mentions of Susie s Bar & Grill. Share of Voice Listening "Share of Voice" measures the percentage of conversations about your brand, as compared to your competitors, and is a common and recommended listening strategy. Susie s Bar & Grill has three main competitors: Burgermeister Santa Fe Bar and Grill The Daily Grill For Share of Voice reporting, we should create a query for each of these competitors the same way we did in Build an Advanced Listening Rule. After we have built rules for each of these competitors, let s leverage the Classifications functionality to group (classify) data. Classifications can be leveraged to achieve a holistic view of how we stack up against our competitors. Creating separate rules lets us look at the data for each rule individually. However, when we classify a rule, it also lets us roll up the data and look at all the rules we have classified in aggregate and create side-by-side comparisons. As an example, let s add "Burgermeister" to our listening strategy as a competitor. 1. In the Classifications and Tags section, type Share of Voice in the Classification Group box, from the Classification drop-down list, select "Burgermeister" (or whatever you named the listening rule to listen for Burgermeister), then click Add. Here's how the rule should look:

340 Settings 340 Multiple rules for listening for "Burgermeister" could be added under this Classification Group and Classification. 2. Repeat the previous step to add rules for other competitors, such as "Santa Fe Bar and Grill" and "The Daily Grill." 3. Click Add Rule when finished. Because we created a classification for these terms called Share of Voice, this new classification appears in our custom reports (Analytics > Custom Reports): Click this report to view all of our competitors data in a single report, as compared to your brand. Feel free to add additional metrics to the report, such as Average Sentiment. You can add as many classifications for a given term as you'd like. Any time you assign a classification to a term, the classification is 100% retroactive. Listen for Your Products Listening to what is being said across the social web about a specific product is also a very common strategy. For this example, let s listen to what people are saying about "Susie s Bar & Grill s" new burger called the California BBQ Burger.

341 Settings 341 To do this we will want to listen for California BBQ Burger, but only in the context of Susie s Bar and Grill. Let s create a rule variable for Susie s Bar and Grill. Rule Variables let you create a partial rule that can be used again in the future by other rules. If you later update a rule variable, any listening rules that contain that variable are automatically updated as well. Note: It is best practice to use rule variables to save time and to reduce errors. For more information, see Rule Variables. 1. Click Settings > Listening Rules > Rule Variable. 2. Click Add to create a new rule variable, then specify a name that clearly defines this rule variable for later use. 3. Specify the rule variable. Because we already did all the work to create all the variations for Susie s Bar and Grill, we can just copy and paste that rule into our rule variable. 4. Click Save. After saving a rule variable, it is available for use when creating future listening rules or editing existing listening rules. Here's how to use your newly created rule variable in a listening rule. 1. While creating or editing a listening rule, in the All (AND) section, select Rule Variables, select the desired rule variable from the drop-down list (in this scenario, "Susie's Bar & Grill"), then click Add.

342 Settings In the All (AND) section, select Keywords, then specify "California BBQ Burger" as the keyword. Here's how the rule should look: TIP: Click the rule variable to expand the rule. 3. Click Add to save the rule. To leverage the rule variable functionality for the different variations of California BBQ Burger (such as California Barbeque Burger ), we would follow the same process. The rule would then look something like this: Fine-Tune Your Listening Rules After you have added listening rules to Social and are seeing mentions and data in reporting, be sure to take a look at the quality of the mentions that you are pulling in. Are any of the mentions irrelevant to your business? If so, you should go in and further tweak your rules to eliminate noise by creating more specific queries. Remember that social listening is an organic process that requires ongoing attention to ensure that you are pulling in only data that is relevant for your needs and business goals.

343 Settings 343 Note: It is best practice to adjust your queries as often as necessary in order to be as specific as possible. Highly specific queries yield highly relevant results. Useful Listening Filters A list of suggested listening filters to help you create effective rules. Author To From Hashtag Word Proximity Friends Count Followers Count Note: For a full list of filters, including platform information, descriptions, and examples, see Filter List. Author Matches any activity that matches the given user. Example: Specifying adobe matches any mention where the author This also includes retweets that This does not mean you re following the actual Twitter author. The Author filter only captures mentions or retweets of the For example, the following tweet will be captured because it However, the following tweet will not be captured because it does not mention the in the text.

344 Settings 344 To Matches any activity that is in reply to a particular user. Example: Specifying adobe matches all activity in reply For example, the following tweet will be captured because it is in reply is the first text mentioned in the tweet. However, the following tweet will not be captured because it does reply or start with the From Matches any activity from a specific user. For Twitter, the user ID can be used as well. Example: Specifying adobe matches all posts, comments, and likes This is just like when you click Follow in Twitter natively.

345 Settings 345 For example, the following tweet will be captured because it is from the Hashtag Matches any activity with the given hashtag. Example: Specifying adobelife matches all posts containing or tagged #adobelife". For example, the following tweet will be captured because it contains the hashtag "#adobelife."

346 Settings 346 However, the following tweet will not be captured because it does not contain the hashtag "#adobelife." Word Proximity Matches any activity where the keywords are no more than the selected tokens from each other. Example: Specifying adobe and life with the selected proximity of 4 will capture anything that has the term adobe and life within four words of each other. For example, the following tweet will be captured because the words adobe and life are within four words of each other. However, the following tweet will not be captured because the words adobe and life are not within four words of each other. Friends Count Matches tweets where the author has a friends count (the number of users he or she follows) that falls within the given range.

347 Settings 347 Example: Lets say we want to follow anybody who tweets with the keyword adobe and who has a following of 50,000 to 200,000 friends. We would add the Keyword adobe then use the Friends Count filter and specify in Minimum and in Maximum. Now we are following the keyword "adobe" mentioned by anyone who is following 50,000 to 200,000 people. Note: The Twitter Preview is unable to generate a preview for the Friends Count filter. It will, however, generate a preview for the "adobe" keyword. Followers Count Matches tweets where the author has a followers count within the given range. Example: Lets say we want to follow anybody who tweets with the keyword adobe and who has a follower count of 50,000 to 200,000 people. We would add the Keyword adobe then use the Follower Count filter and specify in Minimum and " in Maximum. Now we're following the keyword "adobe" mentioned by anyone with a follower count of 50,000 to 200,000 people. Note: The Twitter Preview is unable to generate a preview for the Followers Count filter. It will, however, generate a preview for the "adobe" keyword.

348 Settings 348 Listening Glossary Listening terms and definitions used in Social and its documentation. Term Definition Customer Intelligence The use of data to understand the composition, needs, and satisfaction of the customer base. Also, the enabling technology used to segment buyers into groupings to leverage in marketing activities. Emotion Analysis The act of applying natural language processing (NLP) to the verbatims of mentions to gauge emotion of a post. Adobe's proprietary algorithm leverages Plutchik's Wheel of Emotion, a scientific model of assessing emotion, to analyze the post for primary and secondary emotions. Visualization is applied to help communicate the analysis to the end user and allow for aggregation of emotions across a selection of posts to understand general emotion trends over time, of a topic, of an audience, and so forth. Engagement The ability to directly respond and engage with social authors one-to-one, with the goal of participating in conversations surfaced through social media monitoring to answer questions, address problems and issues, engage customers, activate influencers and advocates, gather insights, and more. Influencer A social author who has a perceived or tangible impact on brand perception or business results through his or her social graph. Influencers can be identified through different measures of influence, including reach, following, Klout score, share volume, sentiment, web traffic generated, conversion generated, and revenue generated. Insights Actionable business learnings derived from analyzing raw data. Listening Platform Technology that provides social listening, social media monitoring, and social intelligence. Adobe Social is a listening platform. Sophistication of this technology should consider the type of access to social data sources. There is a difference between fire hose versus public APIs, a difference in real-time availability to that data and the depth of data and metadata available, and an ethical difference between sourcing data through official, standardized means versus inconsistent and unreliable methods like site-crawling and screen-scraping. Sentiment Analysis The act of applying natural language processing (NLP) to the verbatims of mentions to gauge sentiment of a post. A score or visualization can be applied to help communicate the analysis to the end user and also allow for aggregation of scores across a selection of posts to understand general sentiment trends over time, of a topic, of an audience, etc. Social sentiment analysis includes machine-learning algorithms that are also manually tunable and can adjust to a brand's specificities and preferences over time. For more information, see Understanding Sentiment Scores.

349 Settings 349 Term Definition Social Intelligence The business insights derived from social listening and social media monitoring. Social intelligence takes the form of dashboards and reports that together help surface customer trends, business opportunities, and brand threats that can be used to improve and optimize social content strategy and campaigns. Trends, business opportunities, and brand threats can be routed and leveraged across marketing channels and other business units to improve marketing and customer experiences. Social Listening The ability to query social network data sources for mentions of keywords and hashtags that have relevance to a business over a specific period of time. Includes abilities to do the following: Create complex Boolean string queries Clean the data, including filtering spam and removing duplicate mentions Enrich the data through metadata, natural language processing (NLP), and other analyses (including language, location, sentiment, emotion, Klout score, and more) Filter the query results (including by platform, language, location, and proximity) Social listening also includes the ability to visualize and display the verbatims of those mentions and associated metadata. Social Media Monitoring Real time social listening, moving beyond historical listening for keywords and hashtags for the purposes of research and insight, to the active monitoring of conversations across the social web and identifying real-time brand buzz with the goal of engagement and participation. This also includes the abilities to tag conversations for further analysis and prioritization and route them to other stakeholders and departments for review, processing, and resolution. Facebook Pages Display the Facebook pages you manage using Social, add new pages to be managed, and change page settings (moderation, approval, prediction, publisher, owner, report suite, and more). Grant Permissions for Social Before you can add Facebook pages to Social, you must grant Facebook permissions. 1. Log in to your Facebook account. 2. From the Adobe Marketing Cloud, start Social. See Logging In to Social. If you do not log in to Facebook before logging in to Social and try to perform an action that requires authorization, such as adding a Facebook page to Social, a Request for Permission dialog box displays. Note that some browsers suppress pop-ups unless you explicitly allow them to display (such as by clicking Allow at the top of the browser window). Follow the instructions on the Facebook dialog box to grant the necessary permissions.

350 Settings 350 Add Facebook Pages Add a new Facebook page to Adobe Social so that you can use Social to publish to that page. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Property Setup and Ownership and Publisher Settings. 1. If you have not already done so, complete the steps in Grant Permissions for Social. 2. Click Settings > Facebook Pages. 3. Click in the upper right corner. A Facebook web page displays that allows Social to publish to those pages for which you have administrator rights. You can allow an unlimited number of Facebook pages. 4. Click Allow Access. Display, Search, and Filter Facebook Pages Display the Facebook pages that you have added to Social. You can filter the list by page type, whether the page has moderation enabled, whether the page must be re-authorized, and more.you can also search for specific pages. The filter and search options are useful for accounts with many Facebook pages. 1. Click Settings > Facebook Pages. 2. By default, all Facebook pages for your account are displayed. You can use the filter check boxes or the Search feature to limit the number of displayed pages or to search for a specific page. (Conditional) Click above the left rail, then select or deselect one or more check boxes: Brand Pages: Displays or hides all pages that have been added to Social that are designated as brand pages. Place Pages: Displays or hides all pages that have been added to Social that are designated as a "place" on Facebook. Like Pages: Displays or hides all Like pages. A Like page is an underlying Fan Page for the Open Graph Node (for example, the Like button). Note that these pages are hidden to anyone except administrators of the Open Graph Node. Application Pages: Displays or hides all pages that are associated with a Facebook application. Moderation On: Displays or hides all pages that have moderation and Facebook Insights turned on. Moderation Off: Displays or hides all pages that have moderation and Facebook Insights turned off. Authorized: Displays or hides all pages that you have authorized Social to access on your behalf. Need Authorization: Displays or hides all pages for which Facebook requires re-authorization. You can use the Facebook Pages section to perform actions on a specific page or on multiple pages simultaneously. For example, you can turn moderation on or off, make publishing approval required or not required, enable or disable prediction, and more. For more information, see Configure Facebook Page Settings. Configure Facebook Page Settings Use the options on the Facebook Settings page to configure settings for one or more Facebook pages. You can enable or disable moderation, approval, and prediction. You can also change the publisher, owner, and report suite for one or more pages. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Publisher Settings.

351 Settings Click Settings > Facebook Pages. 2. Locate the desired Facebook pages for which you want to configure settings. For more information, see Display, Search, and Filter Facebook Pages. 3. To configure settings for more than one Facebook page, select the check boxes next to the desired page names, click to display the Edit Pages dialog box, then use the options to select the desired owner for the page and to enable or disable Moderation and Insights, Approval, or Prediction. Or To configure settings for an individual Facebook page, adjust the following settings: Moderation: Turn Moderation on or off. For more information, see Facebook Moderation. Approval: Select None or select a publishing workflow. If you select a publishing workflow, all content posted to this page must be approved before posting. Posting approval is an optional feature in Social. If your Facebook account in Social has the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure posts that need approval. Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has user group permissions to create posts, but not to approve his or her own posts for publishing, creates a post. When a post is configured that requires approval, it is displayed in the Content Calendar, where you can approve or reject the post. SeeContent Calendar List View. Prediction: Turn Prediction on or off, depending on whether you want to use the Post Predictions feature in the publisher. The Post Predictions feature dynamically predicts the performance of your post. As you adjust post text, content, or the schedule, the Post Predictions section automatically updates. For more information, see the Post Predictions row in Publisher. Publisher: Select the new publisher from the drop-down list. The publisher is the name of the publisher that appears on Facebook. Owner: Select the new owner from the drop-down list. The page owner owns the page in Social and can publish and manage the page. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual. Report Suite: Select the new report suite from the drop-down list. A report suite is the most fundamental level of segmentation in Adobe reporting. Each report suite refers to a dedicated set of tables that are populated in Adobe's collection servers. Require Approval for Facebook Pages Turn Approval on or off so that posts must be approved before posting or allowed to be posted without approval. Posting approval is an optional feature in Social. If your Facebook account in Social has the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure posts that need approval. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Property Setup and Ownership. Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has user group permissions to create posts, but not approve his or her own posts for publishing, creates a post. To require approval for Facebook posts 1. Click Settings > Facebook Pages.

352 Settings In the Approval column for the desired page, select None or select the desired publishing workflow. When a post is configured that requires approval, it is displayed in the Content Calendar, where you can approve or reject the post. See Content Calendar List View. Remove One or More Facebook Pages Remove one or more Facebook pages from your Social account. Removing a page removes the page from Social so that you can no longer use Social to publish to that page. All posts that you have scheduled for posting on the selected pages are also deleted. Removing a page from Social does not delete the page from Facebook. 1. Click Settings > Facebook Pages. By default, all Facebook pages for your account display.you can use the filter check boxes or the Search feature to limit the number of displayed pages or to search for a specific page. See Display, Search, and Filter Facebook Pages. 2. Select the check boxes next to the desired pages, click, then confirm the deletion. Re-Authorize a Facebook Page Re-authorize a Facebook account and grant permissions after making a change to your Facebook pages, such as changing your password. Note: As best practice, we recommend that you log out of all of your Facebook accounts before performing the steps in this procedure. If you are logged in to other accounts, you can easily authorize accounts that you do not want to manage using Social. As you perform these steps, you will be able to explicitly log in to the desired accounts. 1. Click Settings > Facebook Pages. The Facebook Permissions page lists each Facebook account and its associated settings. If an account needs re-authorization, a warning message displays in the Publisher column.

353 Settings In the Publisher column, click Re-Authorize Page. 3. Click Re-Authorize. 4. Follow the prompts from Facebook to grant permissions and to re-authorize the account. Twitter Accounts Add new Twitter accounts to Adobe Social so that you can use Social to publish to those accounts. You can also change account owners and report suites; require approval prior to posting; and view the Twitter account profile. Add Twitter Accounts Add a new Twitter account to Adobe Social so that you can use Social to publish to Twitter and moderate tweets. To add a new Twitter account, the logged-in user must have full administrative privileges in the Adobe Digital Marketing Cloud. 1. Click Settings > Twitter Accounts. 2. Click Add Account. A Twitter web page displays that you use to sign in and authorize Social to publish to your Twitter account. You can authorize an unlimited number of Twitter accounts.

354 Settings Specify the username or address for the Twitter account that you want to authorize, specify the password, then click Authorize App. 4. Select the Report Suite to which this account is to be assigned. 5. Select the owner for this account. You can select an individual user or a user group. After you authorize Social, you are directed back to the Social user interface, where you should see the new Twitter account listed. Require Approval for Twitter Posts Turn Approval on or off so that posts must be approved before posting or allowed to be posted without approval. Posting approval is an optional feature in Social. If your Twitter account in Social has the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure posts that need approval. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Property Setup and Ownership. Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has user group permissions to create posts, but not approve his or her own posts for publishing, creates a post. To require approval for Twitter posts 1. Click Settings > Twitter Accounts. 2. In the Approval column for the desired account, select None or select the desired publishing workflow. When a post is configured that requires approval, it is displayed in the Content Calendar, where you can approve or reject the post. See Content Calendar List View. Change the Owner or Report Suite for Twitter Accounts Change the owner or report suite for a Twitter account. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Property Setup and Ownership. The owner owns the account in Social and can publish and manage the account. A report suite is the most fundamental level of segmentation in Adobe reporting. Each report suite refers to a dedicated set of tables that are populated in Adobe's collection servers. 1. Click Settings > Twitter Accounts. 2. (Conditional) Next to the desired account, from the Owner drop-down list, select the new owner (a user or a group), then click OK. 3. (Conditional) Next to the desired account, from the Report Suite drop-down list, select the new report suite, then click OK. Remove a Twitter Account Remove a Twitter account from your Social account. Removing an account removes it from Social so that you can no longer use Social to publish to that account. All posts that you have scheduled for posting to the selected accounts are also deleted. Removing an account from Social does not delete the account from Twitter. 1. Click Settings > Twitter Accounts.

355 Settings In the Account column, click Delete under the desired account, then click OK to confirm the deletion. Re-Authorize a Twitter Account Re-authorize a Twitter account and grant permissions after making a change to your account, such as changing your password. Note: As best practice, we recommend that you log out of all of your Twitter accounts before performing the steps in this procedure. If you are logged in to other accounts, you can easily authorize accounts that you do not want to manage using Social. As you perform these steps, you will be able to explicitly log in to the desired accounts. 1. Click Settings > Twitter Accounts. 2. In the Account column, click the message that displays for an account needs to be re-authorized. 3. Follow the prompts from Twitter to grant permissions and to re-authorize the account. Google+ Pages Display the Google+ pages you manage using Social, add new pages to be managed, and change page settings (approval, publisher, owner, report suite, circles, and more). Add Google+ Pages Add a new Google+ page to Adobe Social so that you can use Social to publish to that page. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Property Setup and Ownership. 1. Click Settings > Google+ Pages. 2. Click Add Google+ Page. You might be required to log in to your Google+ account. A Google web page displays that you use to allow Social to publish to those pages for which you have administrator rights. You can allow an unlimited number of Google+ pages. 3. Click Allow Access. Require Approval for Google+ Posts Turn Approval on or off so that all posts must be approved before posting or allowed to be posted without approval. Posting approval is an optional feature in Social. If your Google+ account in Social has the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure posts that need approval. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Property Setup and Ownership.

356 Settings 356 Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has user group permissions to create posts, but not approve his or her own posts for publishing, creates a post. To require approval for Google+ posts 1. Click Settings > Google+ Pages. 2. In the Approval column for the desired account, select None or select the desired publishing workflow. When a post is configured that requires approval, it is displayed in the Content Calendar, where you can approve or reject the post. See Content Calendar List View. Manage Circles Use the Circle Manager to create new circles and to manage existing circles. For example, you can change the circle publisher, edit circles, remove circles, and more. For more information, see Circle Manager. Remove a Google+ Page Remove a Google+ page from your Social account. Removing a page removes the page from Social so that you can no longer use Social to publish to that page. All posts that you have scheduled for posting on the selected pages are also deleted. Removing a page from Social does not delete the page from Google+. 1. Click Settings > Google+ Pages. 2. In the Actions column for the desired Google+ page, click, then click OK to confirm the deletion. Re-Authorize a Google+ Page Re-authorize a Google+ page and grant permissions after making a change to your page, such as changing your password. Note: As best practice, we recommend that you log out of all of your Google+ accounts before performing the steps in this procedure. If you are logged in to other accounts, you can easily authorize accounts that you do not want to manage using Social. As you perform these steps, you will be able to explicitly log in to the desired accounts. 1. Click Settings > Google+ Pages. 2. Re-add the page by clicking Add Google+ Page. There is no Re-Authorize link for Google+ pages. Adding the page again performs the re-authorization process. For more information, see Add Google+ Pages. 3. Specify the address and password for the admin/owner of the Google+ page. 4. Follow the prompts from Google+ to grant permissions and to re-authorize the account. 5. Ensure that any previously scheduled posts are still visible in the Content Calendar List View. For more information, see Content Calendar List View.

357 Settings 357 LinkedIn Companies and Groups Display the LinkedIn properties (company pages and groups) you manage using Social, add new properties to be managed, change settings (approval and owner), and delete properties. After you add LinkedIn company pages, you can post status updates to company pages as a company and post status updates to groups as an individual. For more information, see Publisher. For more information about working with Social and LinkedIn, see Getting Started with LinkedIn. Add LinkedIn Company Pages and Groups Add new LinkedIn company pages or groups to Adobe Social so that you can use Social to publish to those pages and groups. 1. Click Settings > LinkedIn Companies and Groups. 2. Click in the upper right corner. A LinkedIn web page displays that allows Social to publish to those pages and groups for which you have administrator rights. You can allow an unlimited number of pages and groups. 3. Specify the address and password for your LinkedIn account. 4. Click Allow Access allow Social to access your LinkedIn Profile Overview (name, photo, headline, and current position), network updates, and group discussions.. For information about publishing to LinkedIn company pages or groups, see Publisher. Configure LinkedIn Companies and Groups Settings Use the options on the LinkedIn Companies and Groups page to configure settings for one or more LinkedIn properties (company pages or groups). You can enable or disable the approval setting, change property owners, or delete properties. 1. Click Settings > LinkedIn Companies and Groups. 2. Click the company page or group you want to configure to display the Edit LinkedIn Property dialog box. 3. From the Owner drop-down list, select the desired owner.

358 Settings 358 The owner owns the page or group in Social and can publish and manage the page or group. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual. 4. From the Report Suite drop-down list, select the desired report suite. 5. From the Approval drop-down list, select None or select the desired approval workflow. Posting approval is an optional feature in Social. If your LinkedIn account in Social has the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure posts that need approval. Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has user group permissions to create posts, but not to approve his or her own posts for publishing, creates a post. When a post is configured that requires approval, it is displayed in the Content Calendar, where you can approve or reject the post. See Content Calendar List View. 6. Click Save. Click Delete to remove the LinkedIn company page or group from Social. Removing a page or group removes the it from Social so that you can no longer use Social to publish to that page or group. All posts that you have scheduled for posting on the selected page or group are also deleted. Removing a page or group from Social does not delete the page or group from LinkedIn. Require Approval for LinkedIn Companies and Groups Turn Approval on or off so that posts must be approved before posting or allowed to be posted without approval. Posting approval is an optional feature in Social. If your LinkedIn account in Social has the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure posts that need approval. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Property Setup and Ownership. Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has user group permissions to create posts, but not approve his or her own posts for publishing, creates a post. To require approval for LinkedIn posts 1. Click Settings > LinkedIn Companies and Groups. 2. Click the desired company page or group to open its settings dialog box. 3. In the Approval column for the desired account, select None or select the desired publishing workflow. When a post is configured that requires approval, it is displayed in the Content Calendar, where you can approve or reject the post. See Content Calendar List View. YouTube Channels Add new YouTube channels to Adobe Social so that you can use Social to publish to those channels. You can also change owners, require approval prior to posting, and delete channels. For information about publishing content to YouTube channels, see Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar and Publisher Page.

359 Settings 359 Add YouTube Channels Add new YouTube channels to Adobe Social so that you can use Social to publish content to those channels. To add a new YouTube channel, the logged-in user must have full administrative privileges in the Adobe Digital Marketing Cloud. 1. Click Settings > YouTube Channels. 2. Click. A web page displays that you use to sign in and authorize Social to publish to your YouTube channels. You can authorize an unlimited number of channels. 3. Specify the address for the account whose channels you want to authorize, select the channel, then click Continue.. 4. Review the information, then click Accept. Social requires permission to do the following: View basic information about your account Manage your YouTube account View YouTube Analytics reports for your YouTube content View and manage your assets and associated content on YouTube 5. Select the owner for this channel. You can select an individual user or a user group. After you authorize Social, you are directed back to the Social user interface, where you should see the new channel listed. Require Approval for YouTube Channels Turn Approval on or off so that posts must be approved before posting or allowed to be posted without approval. Posting approval is an optional feature in Social. If your YouTube channel in Social has the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure posts that need approval. Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has user group permissions to create posts, but not approve his or her own posts for publishing, creates a post. To require approval for YouTube Channels 1. Click Settings > YouTube Channels. 2. Click the desired channel to open its settings dialog box. 3. From the Approval drop-down list, select None or select the desired approval workflow. Posting approval is an optional feature in Social. If your account in Social has the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure posts that need approval. Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has user group permissions to create posts, but not to approve his or her own posts for publishing, creates a post. When a post is configured that requires approval, it is displayed in the Content Calendar, where you can approve or reject the post. See Content Calendar List View. 4. Click Save.

360 Settings 360 Change the Owner for YouTube Channels Change the owner for a YouTube channel. The owner owns the property in Social and can publish and manage the channel. 1. Click Settings > YouTube Channels. 2. Click the desired channel to display the Edit YouTube Property dialog box. 3. From the Owner drop-down list, select the desired user group or user. The owner owns the property in Social and can publish to and manage the channel. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual. 4. Click Save. Remove a YouTube Channel Remove a YouTube channel from your Social account. Removing a property removes it from Social so that you can no longer use Social to publish to that channel. All posts that you have scheduled for posting to the selected channel are also deleted. Removing a property from Social does not delete the channel from YouTube. 1. Click Settings > YouTube Channels. 2. Click the desired channel to display the Edit YouTube Property dialog box. 3. Click Delete, then click OK to confirm the deletion. Re-Authorize a YouTube Channel Re-authorize a YouTube channel and grant permissions after making a change to your channel, such as changing your password. Note: As best practice, we recommend that you log out of all of your YouTube properties before performing the steps in this procedure. If you are logged in to other properties, you can easily authorize channels that you do not want to manage using Social. As you perform these steps, you will be able to explicitly log in to the desired channels. 1. Click Settings > YouTube Channels. 2. In the YouTube Channels column, click the message that displays for a channel needs to be re-authorized. 3. Follow the prompts from YouTube to grant permissions and to re-authorize the channel. Sina Weibo Accounts Add new Sina Weibo accounts to Adobe Social so that you can use Social to publish to those accounts. You can also change account owners, require approval prior to posting, and delete the account. Sina Weibo, used primarily in China, is similar to Twitter. Note that at this time, no APIs are available from Sina Weibo. As a result, Social does not offer analytic capabilities for Sina Weibo. For information about publishing content to Sina Weibo, see Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar and Publisher Page.

361 Settings 361 Add Sina Weibo Accounts Add a new Sina Weibo account to Adobe Social so that you can use Social to publish to those accounts. To add a new Sina Weibo account, the logged-in user must have full administrative privileges in the Adobe Digital Marketing Cloud. 1. Click Settings > Sina Weibo Accounts. 2. Click. A Sina Weibo web page displays that you use to sign in and authorize Social to publish to your Sina Weibo account. You can authorize an unlimited number of Sina Weibo accounts. 3. Specify the account name and password for the Sina Weibo account that you want to authorize, then click Sign In.. 4. Select the owner for this account. You can select an individual user or a user group. After you authorize Social, you are directed back to the Social user interface, where you should see the new Sina Weibo account listed. Require Approval for Sina Weibo Posts Turn Approval on or off so that posts must be approved before posting or allowed to be posted without approval. Posting approval is an optional feature in Social. If your Sina Weibo account in Social has the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure posts that need approval. Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has user group permissions to create posts, but not approve his or her own posts for publishing, creates a post. To require approval for Sina Weibo posts 1. Click Settings > Sina Weibo Accounts.

362 Settings Click the desired account to open its settings dialog box. 3. From the Approval drop-down list, select None or select the desired approval workflow. Posting approval is an optional feature in Social. If your Sina Weibo account in Social has the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure posts that need approval. Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has user group permissions to create posts, but not to approve his or her own posts for publishing, creates a post. When a post is configured that requires approval, it is displayed in the Content Calendar, where you can approve or reject the post. See Content Calendar List View. 4. Click Save. Change the Owner for Sina Weibo Accounts Change the owner for a Sina Weibo account. The owner owns the account in Social and can publish and manage the account. 1. Click Settings > Sina Weibo Accounts. 2. Click the desired account to display the Edit Sina Weibo Account dialog box. 3. From the Owner drop-down list, select the desired user group or user. The owner owns the account in Social and can publish to and manage the account. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual. 4. Click Save. Remove a Sina Weibo Account Remove a Sina Weibo account from your Social account. Removing an account removes it from Social so that you can no longer use Social to publish to that account. All posts that you have scheduled for posting to the selected accounts are also deleted. Removing an account from Social does not delete the account from Sina Weibo. 1. Click Settings > Sina Weibe Accounts. 2. Click the desired account to display the Edit Sina Weibo Account dialog box. 3. Click Delete, then click OK to confirm the deletion. Re-Authorize a Sina Weibo Account Re-authorize a Sina Weibo account and grant permissions after making a change to your account, such as changing your password. Note: As best practice, we recommend that you log out of all of your Sina Weibo accounts before performing the steps in this procedure. If you are logged in to other accounts, you can easily authorize accounts that you do not want to manage using Social. As you perform these steps, you will be able to explicitly log in to the desired accounts. 1. Click Settings > Sina Weibo Accounts.

363 Settings In the Account Name column, click the message that displays for an account needs to be re-authorized. 3. Follow the prompts from Sina Weibo to grant permissions and to re-authorize the account. Page Groups Create groups to post simultaneously to multiple Facebook pages or to a collection of Like nodes. Groups let you post content simultaneously to a group of Facebook pages or to a collection of Like nodes on the Facebook Open Graph. This option lets you post to every page or node in that group or collection. A Like node is a virtual collection of anyone who has clicked a Facebook Like button outside of Facebook (for example, on a web page or display advertisement). Using this option, you can further communicate with every Facebook user who has clicked one of your Like buttons. Create Page Groups Create a new page group, configure its settings, and select the Facebook pages and Like Nodes to include in the group. You can then select groups in the Publisher to publish to every page in the group at once. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Publisher Settings. 1. Click Settings > Page Groups. 2. At the bottom of the list, click Create a New Group. 3. Fill in the fields: Group Name: Specify a descriptive, unique name for the group. Owner: From the drop-down list, select a user group or owner for the page group. Only the owner can edit or delete the group. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual. Require Approval to Post: Posting approval is an optional feature in Social and is configured at the account level. If a post requires approval, it is placed in the Content Calendar, where it can be previewed, edited, approved, rejected, or deleted. See Content Calendar List View. Notes: Add additional notes that describe the page group or its purpose. Facebook Pages: From the drop-down list, select the pages and Like Nodes that you want to include in this page group. You can also remove pages and Like Nodes from the group. The list displays Facebook pages that have been added to your Social account. For more information, see Add Facebook Pages. 4. Click Create Group. Edit Page Groups Edit a specific page group to change its name, owner, approval settings, and pages or Like Nodes. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Publisher Settings. 1. Click Settings > Page Groups. 2. In the Actions column for the desired group, click Edit. 3. Edit the fields: Group Name: Specify a descriptive, unique name for the group.

364 Settings 364 Owner: From the drop-down list, select a user group or owner for the page group. Only the owner can edit or delete the group.as best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual. Require Approval to Post: Posting approval is an optional feature in Social and is configured at the account level. See Configure Facebook Page Settings. If a post requires approval, it is placed in the Content Calendar, where it can be previewed, edited, approved, rejected, deleted, or made into an ad. See Content Calendar List View. Notes: Add additional notes that describe the page group or its purpose. Facebook Pages: From the drop-down list, select the pages and Like Nodes that you want to include in this page group. You can also remove pages and Like Nodes from the group. The list displays Facebook pages that have been added to your Social account. For more information, see Add Facebook Pages. 4. Click Update Group. Clone Page Groups Clone an existing page group. You can then easily edit its settings to create a new page group with a similar configuration. 1. Click Settings > Page Groups. 2. In the Actions column for the desired group, click Clone, then click OK to confirm that you want to clone the page group. 3. Click Edit, then edit the fields for the cloned page group: Group Name: Specify a descriptive, unique name for the group. Owner: From the drop-down list, select a user group or owner for the page group. Only the owner can edit or delete the group. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual. Require Approval to Post: Posting approval is an optional feature in Social and is configured at the account level. See Configure Facebook Page Settings. If a post requires approval, it is placed in the Content Calendar page, where it can be previewed, edited, approved, rejected, deleted, or made into an ad. See Content Calendar List View. Notes: Add additional notes that describe the page group or its purpose. Facebook Pages: From the drop-down list, select the pages and Like Nodes that you want to include in this page group. You can also remove pages and Like Nodes from the group. The list displays Facebook pages that have been added to your Social account. For more information, see Add Facebook Pages. 4. Click Update Group. Delete a Page Group Delete a page group when it is no longer needed. Removing a page group removes the group from Social so that you can no longer use Social to publish to that group. All posts that you have scheduled for posting on the pages in the group are also deleted. Removing a group from Social does not delete the pages in the group from Facebook. 1. Click Settings > Page Groups. 2. In the Actions column for the desired group, click Delete, then confirm the deletion.

365 Settings 365 Facebook Audiences Create custom audiences to use in publishing and moderation tasks. Audiences let you quickly publish posts to a preselected subset of viewers of a Facebook page. Audiences also let you create moderation feeds that display only content posted by a preselected subset of users of a Facebook page. You can make your audiences more specific by narrowing this group of people based on their geographical location or language. Audiences are especially useful if you have specific sets of fans that you want to publish to or moderate on a regular basis. The Manage Audiences page lists the audience name, the page/page group, targeting information, and the publishers who can publish to that audience. You can create a new audience or you can edit, delete, or export existing audiences. To access the Facebook Audiences page, click Settings > Facebook Audiences. Create an Audience Create an audience to use in publishing and moderation tasks. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Publisher Settings and Audience Publishing. 1. Click Settings > Facebook Audiences. 2. Click. 3. In the Audience Name field, specify a descriptive name for the audience. 4. From the Target Properties drop-down list, select an option: Facebook Pages: For content posting, lets you post content to the Wall of a single Facebook page that you manage. For content moderation, lets you create a moderation feed that displays only content posted by users of an audience who post content to a Facebook page. Page Groups: For content posting, lets you post content simultaneously to a group of Facebook pages or to a collection of Like nodes on the Facebook Open Graph. This option lets you post to every page or node in that group or collection. A Like node is a virtual collection of anyone who has clicked a Facebook Like button outside of Facebook (for example, on a web page or display advertisement). Using this option, you can further communicate with every Facebook user who has clicked one of your Like buttons. For more information, see Page Groups. For content moderation, lets you create a moderation feed that displays only content posted to a collection of Like nodes. 5. (Optional) From the Access Rights drop-down list, select the user or user group that can use this audience when creating and configuring posts. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual. For example, you might have a group for administrators, another group for marketers, and another group for application builders. 6. (Optional) In the Countries box, start typing the name of the desired country, then select the country from the list. You can then choose to post the content to everywhere in that country or to a specific state or city. You can select multiple locations and languages for the same audience.

366 Settings (Optional) In the Languages box, start typing the name of the desired language, then select the language from the list. This option lets post the content to only fans in the selected geographic location who speak the specified language. Language is based on what fans specify as their language on their Facebook profiles.you can target by language without using location targeting. 8. Fill in the fields in the Demographics section to specify demographic targeting options: Age: Use the age pointers to specify the target age range. Be aware that Facebook does not permit certain types of advertising to minors. For example, you cannot advertise alcoholic beverages to people in the year-old range. Gender: Select All, Male, or Female. 9. Fill in the fields in the Education section to specify educational targeting options: Education Level: Select All, In High School, In College, or College Alumni. If you select In College or College Alumni, additional options display. College: Specify one or more target colleges. College Major: Specify one or more college majors. 10. Fill in the fields in the Advanced section to specify advanced targeting options: Relationship Status: Select one or more relationship statuses: Single, In Relationship, Married, Engaged, or Not Specified. Interested In: Select All, Male, or Female. Workplace: Select one or more target workplaces. 11. Click Save. Manage Audiences Copy, edit, or delete existing audiences. You can also create an RSS feed URL for the audience. 1. Click Settings > Facebook Audiences. 2. Click to enter bulk operations mode, then select the check box next to one or more audiences that you want to manage. Select the check box in the table header to select all configured audiences. 3. Select the desired option: Icon Action RSS Feed: Displays an RSS feed URL. You can subscribe to the audience-specific feed using your preferred RSS feed reader or you can view the feed in a new window. The URL is in the form of This is a secure URL and cannot be guessed. Copy Audience: Lets you duplicate the audience. The copy is named "Copy of <name>" and displays in a new row in the table. For example, if you copy an audience named "Germany," the copy is named

367 Settings 367 Icon Action "Copy of Germany." You could then edit the copy as desired to make a new audience based off of the original audience. Edit Audience: Displays the Facebook Audiences page. You can edit the audience as desired. For more information about the available options, see Create an Audience. Delete Audience: Lets you delete an audience from Social. If you delete an audience, all upcoming posts scheduled for this audience will fail. Click OK to confirm the deletion. Narrow an Audience During Publishing Further narrow a saved audience that you previously created. You can use the Audience Manager feature to create an audience for Facebook posts. For example, you could create an audience to target Facebook users in Germany. This audience makes it easy to target Facebook posts to people in Germany. However, you might want to infrequently narrow this audience to include only female Facebook users who live in Germany.You could create another audience for this narrowed demographic, or you could choose to use the original audience and simply narrow the audience on a post-by-post basis. 1. Click Publish > Publisher. 2. Click Targets, then from the Targets drop-down list, select the desired audience. 3. To narrow the audience, click the audience name to display additional targeting options. 4. Narrow the target as desired. For example, you could select Female from the Gender drop-down list to narrow the existing target. Note: You can only narrow the target audience. You cannot expand the target audience. 5. Configure the additional elements for the post as described in Publisher or Content Calendar. Marketing Cloud Users and Groups Add new users to your Adobe Social account or add and organize account administrators into groups. You can control administrator access through group permissions for account, publishing, moderation, applications, dashboard, and page management. Add Users in the Analytics Admin Console Use the Analytics Admin Console to create new users. Note: You must be an Admin user in the Adobe Marketing Cloud to perform the steps in this section. 1. Click Settings > Marketing Cloud Users & Groups.

368 Settings Click the Users tab. 3. Click Add New User. 4. Fill in the fields: For more information, see Users in the Analytics Help and Reference guide. In particular, ensure that you configure the following options: Create Default Dashboard: Select this option so that Analytics automatically creates dashboards for this user. Select the desired report suite to populate the dashboard with the correct data for this user. Require User to Change Password on Next Login: Selecting this option improves security by forcing the user to change the specified password at the next log in. Access > User: If this user is not an administrator, select the appropriate user group. 5. Edit the Welcome message, if desired. 6. Click Save Changes. You must register newly created users in Social before they can log in to Social. See Register Users. Add User Group, Permissions, and Members Add user groups, specify permissions, and assign group members. Group management makes it easy to organize account administrators and control their access levels. The Groups section lists all of the user groups that are set up within the account. Permissions are set at the user group level, so all users in the group inherit the group permissions. 1. Click Settings > Users & Groups. 2. Click the Groups tab. 3. Click Add User Group. 4. In the Group Details section, specify a descriptive name, an optional description, and the desired owner of the new group. 5. Select Allow All Permissions to grant all permissions to selected users. Or Click the appropriate Group Permissions tab, then select the desired permissions, as explained in the following table: Group Permissions Tab Admin Permissions Add a new user to the system Can change the owner of a page Can manage multi-level approval workflows Set up and manage competitor pages for analytics Manage All or Owned social properties Can add and remove tracked terms Create, edit, or delete All or Owned user groups

369 Settings 369 Group Permissions Tab Dashboard Permissions View and export analytics for All or Owned promotions and pages View competitor analytics Applications Manage and export the results for All or Owned apps Create, edit, and deploy All or Owned Apps2 apps Create, edit, and delete Apps2 audiences Manage contest entries Manage application templates Create, edit, and publish All or Owned stream apps Publisher Create and edit publishing audiences Create, edit, post, schedule and cancel posts to All or Owned targets Ability to create and edit Social campaigns Create and edit templates Legacy Applications Create, edit, and deploy All or Owned custom apps Create and edit All or Owned tab apps Moderation Edit the moderation, watch words, and auto-delete settings on All or Owned pages Moderate (reply to, remove, like, and escalate posts and comments) All or Owned pages Edit Twitter moderation settings 6. Under Group Members, select one or more group members for whom you want to grant permissions. 7. Click Save. If you are a member of the Administrator group, you can edit and delete groups, or change a group's owner. Publishing Workflows Create and manage multi-level publishing workflows (edit, delete, and duplicate). Publishing workflows let you assign and complete multi-level approval processes. A publishing workflow is a process you set up to specify how posts must be approved before they can be posted on their assigned social platforms (owned Facebook pages, Twitter accounts, Google+ pages, and so forth). You can create different approval levels and then assign individual user groups or users to each level. Ideally, you should assign a user group to a publishing workflow rather than to an individual user, who can slow your approval process. If you assign a user group to a workflow, one member of that user group must approve the post in order

370 Settings 370 for that approval requirement to be met. You can also specify a user group or individual user to override the publishing-workflow settings. You can assign publishing workflows at the individual property level (individual Facebook page or Twitter account, for example) or at the account level (all new social properties added to the account use a default approval workflow). You can create the following types of workflows: Horizontal Publishing Workflow: User Group/User A, and User Group/User B, and User Group/User C must approve the post, in any order. Vertical Publishing Workflow: User Group/User A, then User Group/User B, and then User Group/User C must approve the post, in that specific order. Combination Publishing Workflow: Combines elements of a horizontal and vertical publishing workflow by creating multiple approval levels. For example, level one might contain a horizontal hierarchy in which an individual member in each of three user groups must approve the post, in any order. The second level might contain a single user who then must approve the post after the first level is completed. Suppose, for example, that you want multiple teams in your organization to approve a post before it is placed in the publishing queue. For example, after a member of your social team has created and scheduled a post, you want one member of your creative, legal, and public relations teams to approve the post, in no particular order. This is an example of a horizontal workflow. A similar vertical workflow could be created in which a member of your creative team must approve the post, followed by a member of your legal team, followed by a member of your public relations team. You could also create a combination workflow in which the post must first be approved by a member of your creative team, legal team, and public relations team (in no particular order), followed by a member of your executive team. Note: If a user is included in a publishing workflow (either explicitly or as a member of a user group), that user is automatically given the appropriate Approval permissions. The Approve All/Owned permission has been deprecated. Approval permissions are automatically granted based on assigned publishing workflows. If a member of a user group is assigned to a publishing workflow (either explicitly or as a member of a user group), that user receives an notification when a post is actionable for his or her approval level. Note that if a post is edited in any way (photo or link added, targeting changed, etc.) during the approval process, the workflow restarts. That is, any levels that have been completed, must be re-approved. You can also filter the Content Calendar by Pending Approvals to display only posts that require approval before they can be posted. You can filter by user group or individual user. You can also filter by your user name to display only posts that you have been designated in an approval process. The Notes section for each post can be used as an audit trail to see who has approved that post, along with a timestamp. Note: Any existing approval conditions you specified in previous versions of Social are migrated and honored going forward. You can determine whether an approval condition is a migrated workflow by looking at the Created By column. If this field is empty, this workflow has been migrated. Migrated workflow names are populated with the name of the property for which the approval conditions were made.

371 Settings 371 Create a New Publishing Workflow Create a publishing workflow containing user groups or individuals who must approve a post before it is posted to its social platform. There is no limit to the number of publishing workflows you can create within an account. 1. Click Settings > Publishing Workflows. 2. Click New. Fill in the fields: Approval Workflow Name: Provide a descriptive name for the workflow. A descriptive name helps you quickly locate and select the desired workflow when selecting approval workflows for specific properties or when editing, deleting, or duplicating workflows form the Publishing Workflows page (Settings > Publishing Workflows). Approval Hierarchy: To create the initial level in the workflow hierarchy, click to Approval Level dialog box. to display the Add Users/Groups Select the desired user group or user that you want to assign to this approval level. To add another user group or user to this initial approval level (a horizontal hierarchy level), click the dialog box. to expand

372 Settings 372 Select the desired user group or user that you want to assign to this approval level. An AND operator separates the user groups and users in a horizontal hierarchy level. Click Save on the Add Users/Groups to Approval Level dialog box when you are finished configuring the initial approval level. To create an additional level to the workflow hierarchy, click Add Another Approval Level from the Publishing Workflows page. Adding another level creates a vertical workflow. For example, all approval requirements must be met for the first level before the second-level requirements can be addressed. You can create as many levels as necessary for your organization. There is no limit on the number of levels you can define in each hierarchy. Note that you can drag and drop levels to achieve the desired order of approval levels. You can also edit or delete individual levels, as needed by clicking or. Click Save when finished.

373 Settings 373 Allow the Following Users/Usergroups to Bypass the Workflow: You can optionally select a user group or user who can override the publishing workflow process to approve a post, even though the approval requirements have not been met.you should use this option judiciously. This feature is helpful, for example, if a someone who must approve a post is ill or otherwise is not available to approve a post. Use this Workflow as default for all new Social Properties: When you configure individual social properties, you can select the desired publishing workflow from the drop-down list. This lets you use different publishing workflows for different properties in your account (for example, individual owned Facebook pages, Twitter accounts, Google+ pages, and so forth). Enabling this option assigns this workflow to all new social properties added to this account as the default. Even if you select this option, you can still override this assignment for individual properties. For information about configuring individual social properties, including publishing workflows, see Require Approval for Facebook Pages, Require Approval for Twitter Posts, Require Approval for Google+ Posts, Configure LinkedIn Companies and Groups Settings, Require Approval for YouTube Channels and Require Approval for Sina Weibo Posts. Edit a Publishing Workflow Edit an existing publishing workflow to change its settings, such as its name, approval levels, approval override, or default settings. 1. Click Settings > Publishing Workflows. 2. Select the desired workflow from the list, then click Edit. 3. Fill in the fields. For more information, see Step 2 in Create a New Publishing Workflow. Note: Do not attempt to rename a publishing workflow with the same name as another existing workflow. Delete a Publishing Workflow Delete one or more publishing workflows from Social. 1. Click Settings > Publishing Workflows. 2. Select one or more workflows, then click Delete. You do not need to confirm the deletion. An error message displays if the workflow is associated with one or more social properties. You cannot delete a publishing workflow if it is associated with social properties. To remove a workflow association with a social property, complete the following steps: Platform Facebook Twitter Steps Click Settings > Facebook Pages. From the Approval drop-down list for the desired page, select None. Click Settings > Twitter Accounts. From the Approval drop-down list for the desired account, select None.

374 Settings 374 Platform Google+ LinkedIn YouTube Sina Weibo Steps Click Settings > Google+ Pages. From the Approval drop-down list for the desired page, select None. Click Settings > LinkedIn Companies and Groups. Click the desired company page or group to display the Edit LinkedIn Property settings. From the Approval drop-down list, select None. Click Settings > YouTube Channels. Click the desired channel to display the Edit YouTube Property settings. From the Approval drop-down list, select None. Click Settings > Sina Weibo Accounts. Click the desired account to display the Edit Sina Weibo Account settings. From the Approval drop-down list, select None. Duplicate a Publishing Workflow Duplicate an existing publishing workflow that you can then edit to create a similar (cloned) workflow without having to start from the beginning of the configuration process. 1. Click Settings > Publishing Workflows. 2. Select one or more workflows, then click Duplicate. 3. Edit the duplicate workflow as explained in Edit a Publishing Workflow. Viewing the Audit Trail for Publishing Workflows View the notes for each post in the Content Calendar to view an "audit trail" to see who has approved that post, along with a timestamp. Audit-trail data includes username, action, timestamp, comments, and approval-status information. 1. Click Publish > Content Calendar. 2. (Optional) Locate the desired post by clicking above the left navigation rail, then filter the Content Calendar by Pending Approval to see only those posts that require approval before being added to the publishing queue. For more information, see Display and Filter the Content Calendar. 3. Click the post to display its details. The Notes section on the right side of contains information about that post, including any edits to its configuration as well as approval actions. Each time a user approves a post, Social automatically adds a note specifying who approved that post along with a timestamp of when the action was performed. Register Users After creating users in the Admin Tools, register the newly created users and add them to groups. For more information about creating users in the Admin Tools, see Add Users in the Analytics Admin Console.

375 Settings In the left navigation menu, click Settings > Register Users.. Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click. 2. In the People to Register section, select one or more users who you want to associate with this account in Social. Note: If you are registering several users with varying permissions, you should import all users with the same permissions separately. 3. In the Groups section, select the groups to which you want to add the selected users. For accounts with a simple permissions structure, all users can be assigned the Administrators access. For more complex configurations, you can choose both a Permissions and an Ownership group for those users who are not Administrators. Existing user groups display in this section. You can create additional user groups, if necessary. See Add User Group, Permissions, and Members. 4. In the Custom Message box, specify an optional message that you want sent by informing users that they have been registered in Social. For example, your message might include the following information: I have just created an account for you in Adobe Social. Please log in with the following credentials and let me know if you have any issues logging in. You will be required to change your password after logging in. URL: Login Company: Company123 Username: Username Password: Temporary Password 5. Click Create x Users. For example, if you are registering three users, the button's label is Create 3 Users. Facebook Permissions Re-authorize Facebook and grant permissions after making a change to your Facebook pages, such as changing your password. 1. Click Settings > Facebook Permissions. The Facebook Permissions page lists each Facebook account and its associated publisher, pages, and authorization status. If an account needs to be re-authorized, a warning message displays in the Authorization column. 2. (Conditional) In the Authorized column, click Re-Authorize. 3. Follow the prompts from Facebook to grant permissions and to re-authorize the account.

376 Settings 376 Campaigns Create a Social campaign and assign its tracking code and start/end dates. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Campaign Set Up. A campaign is a marketing effort used to bring visitors to a specific website. For example, if a campaign advertises a specific credit card, the campaign could be a series of creative elements (links, Flash Multimedia posts, tweets, and so forth) advertising the card's interest rate and benefits. The campaign's tracking code on each creative element lets you track the effectiveness of the campaign by letting you know which link a user clicked to come to your website. Note: Social campaigns must be created in Adobe Social. Social campaigns cannot be created in Adobe Analytics. Social does not display or import campaigns created in Analytics. After creating campaigns and assigning them to content you post, you can use the Campaigns report to view statistics about your campaign marketing efforts. For more information, see Social Campaigns. You can assign individual campaigns to content you publish on Facebook, Google+, Twitter, and LinkedIn. When assigning campaigns to content, consider the following: The Campaigns drop-down list displays available campaigns only if the current report suite has existing campaigns. To create campaigns, see Create a Campaign. You can set a default campaign for your report suite. When users create new posts in the Publisher or Content Calendar, the Campaign option is pre-populated with the default campaign. This setting streamlines publishing and governance. Users can change the campaign if other campaigns are available. For more information, see Create a Campaign. The Campaigns drop-down list displays active campaigns only. For example, if you schedule content to post on September 15, the drop-down list displays only campaigns that are scheduled to start before September 15 and end on or after September 15. The available campaigns in the Campaigns drop-down list displays different campaigns depending on the date that you select to post the content. The drop-down list displays only campaigns that are relevant to the selected date. The Campaigns drop-down list displays only on content types that have an outgoing link. Click data is recorded in Analytics when users click through to the website. Create a Campaign Create a Social campaign and assign its tracking code and start/end dates. A tracking code associates visitor activity with a specific creative element. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Campaign Set Up. Note: Social campaigns must be created in Adobe Social. Social campaigns cannot be created in Adobe Analytics. Social does not display or import campaigns created in Analytics. 1. Click Settings > Campaigns.

377 Settings 377 The Campaigns page displays a list of all of your saved campaigns within the currently selected report suite, with their start and end dates. You can create a new campaign, or you can edit or delete an existing campaign. 2. Click Create Campaign. 3. Fill in the fields: Campaign Name: Specify a name for the campaign. You should specify a clear and meaningful name, such as "20th Anniversary Sale" or "Mealtime Makeover Community Challenge." Assign This Campaign as Default: Make this the default campaign for your report suite. When users create new posts in the Publisher or Content Calendar, the Campaign option is pre-populated with the default campaign. This setting streamlines publishing and governance by ensuring that all of your content is tagged and trackable to conversion events, even if users forget to set a campaign during the publishing process. Users can change the campaign if other campaigns are available. Note: Deselect this option if you do want to select a default campaign, which makes No Campaign the default. Start Date and End Date: Specify the campaign duration. You can specify one or both of the dates and times. Key Performance Indicator (KPI): Select a Key Performance Indicator from the drop-down list. Options include Page Views, Orders, Instances and more. Upload a Photo: Browse to and upload a photo that displays on the Social Campaigns report tile. Tracking ID Prefix: Specify the prefix for the tracking code. You can also select Insert Date to attach the current date in the format YYYYMMDD. A tracking code prefix and date help your more easily identify tracking codes in URLs and in the Campaigns Tracking Code report (Analytics > Campaigns > Campaign Details). The actual tracking code is automatically generated by Social. The optional prefix and date make the tracking code more readable and lets you easily see which creative elements are associated with each campaign. For example, if you use the prefix "Winter Sale," all of your tracking codes associated with this campaign contain the "Winter Sale" prefix. A key element to keep in mind when creating your tracking code ID prefix is that this prefix will be reflected in the tracking code in Adobe Analytics. If your analytics team already has a tracking code taxonomy to classify and organize tracking codes, the social team should coordinate with the analytics team to match this taxonomy, as needed, in order for campaigns to be included in cross-channel analysis. 4. Click Save. You can edit a campaign's settings or delete an existing campaign. Campaign Categorization After assigning campaigns to content published using the Social Publisher module, each post obtains a unique tracking code. The categorization for the tracking code is automatically uploaded into SAINT when the content is posted. Categories include the following: Platform: (Facebook, Google+, Twitter, or LinkedIn) Author name

378 Settings 378 Post time Post target (Facebook page, audience name, Twitter handle, etc.) Tags are not sent to SAINT or to Adobe Analytics. Circle Manager View and manage your Google+ Circles across all Google+ pages in your account. Google+ Circles let you organize people into whatever groupings make sense for your organization. You can create different Circles based on geographic location, age, and the number of engagements those users have had with your brand. You can then post highly relevant content to these different Circles. The Circle Manager page displays all of your Circles for the selected Google+ page. You can view the following information for each Circle: name, number of members, and the publisher group whose members can post to that Circle. You can create new Circles, edit or remove existing Circles, and view stats for each Circle. Create Circle Create a new Google+ Circle that you can use to publish highly relevant content to a specific audience. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Audience Publishing. 1. Click Settings > Circle Manager. 2. Click in the upper right corner. 3. From the Google+ Page drop-down list, select the desired Google+ page for which you want to create the Circle. 4. In the Circle Name field, specify a descriptive name for the Circle. 5. From the Owners drop-down list, select the user or group that can use this Circle when creating and configuring posts. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual. For example, you might have a publisher group for administrators, another for marketers, and another for application builders. You can select only one user owner group per Circle. 6. From the Gender drop-down list, select the target for your Circle: All, Male, Female, Other, and Not Specified. 7. Under Engagement, select the number of engagements from each person required to be included in this Circle. An engagement is when a Google+ user clicks +1 on one of your posts, makes a comment on your page, or shares a page with other users. 8. Click Create Circle. Edit or Remove Circles Edit the settings for a single Circle or for multiple Circles at the same time. Note: You can also edit or remove a circle from the Google+ Pages page (Settings > Google+Pages). The following sections contain more information:

379 Settings 379 Edit a Single Circle Remove a Single Circle Edit Multiple Circles Simultaneously Remove Multiple Circles Simultaneously Edit a Single Circle 1. Click Settings > Circle Manager. 2. From the Page Name drop-down list, select the page that is associated with the Circle you want to edit. 3. Select the Circle name you would like to edit, then click in the upper right corner. 4. Edit the Circle name, then select the desired owner. 5. Click Save Circle. Remove a Single Circle 1. Click Settings > Circle Manager. 2. From the Page Name drop-down list, select the page that is associated with the Circle you want to remove. 3. Select the Circle name you would like to delete, then click in the upper right corner. Click Remove Circles to confirm the deletion. Edit Multiple Circles Simultaneously 1. Click Settings > Circle Manager. 2. From the Page Name drop-down list, select the page that is associated with the Circles you want to edit. 3. Select one or more Circles. Click in the upper right corner From the Owner drop-down list, select the desired owner. 6. Click Save Circle. Remove Multiple Circles Simultaneously 1. Click Publish > Circle Manager. 2. From the Page Name drop-down list, select the page that is associated with the Circles you want to remove. 3. Select one or more Circles you would like to delete, then click in the upper right corner.. 4. Click Remove Circles to confirm the deletion. Preferences Configure Social preferences, including specifying your time zone, specifying the address you want to use for notifications, and selecting the notifications you want to send. Note: Social can generate many notifications. If you notice that you receive many messages for events tied to Social, you can deselect notifications for those events that do not interest you. By default, all notifications are selected. 1. Click Settings > Preferences.

380 Settings 380 Or In the window header, click > Account Settings. 2. From the Set Your Time Zone drop-down list, select the desired time zone. This time zone will be the default for the publisher as well as any other time stamp throughout Social. 3. In the Address for Notifications field, specify a valid address. This address will be used to send notifications if publishing or permissions issues arise. 4. Under Notifications, select a tab, then select the desired notifications: Notification Group Moderation Notifications A post or comment was assigned to you for moderation A reminder that a post or comment was assigned to you A spam filter was activated on a page Publishing A new template is available for publication Your post has been approved and scheduled for posting Your post has been rejected and will not be published A post needs to be approved before it can be posted

381 Settings 381 Notification Group Notifications A post has been scheduled for posting One of your Facebook pages needs to be authorized Support The system was unable to post a scheduled message The system was unable to remove a post from Facebook System Upcoming authorization expiration 5. Click Update. Link Shorteners Create multiple ctx.ly, bit.ly, Awe.sm, Po.st, and BudURL accounts within Social and generate shortened URLs in posts instead of using the default Social link shortener. Using URLs with link shorteners helps you brand your various posts and give you quick access to statistics on link visits. Add a ctx.ly Account Add one or more ctx.ly accounts before you can generate short URLs in posts.you can add multiple custom domains over the ctx.ly URL shortener. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Publisher Settings. For example, instead of using users can use 1. Create a custom domain and point it to the Social DNS server using a CNAME record. For example, you can create a CNAME record mapping your custom domain name from abcd.com to oak.ctx.ly. Depending on which Adobe data center your Social account is using, the mapping varies: Data Center Dallas San Jose London Singapore URL oak.ctx.ly oak.ctx.ly l.ctx.ly s.ctx.ly 2. From within Social, click Settings > Link Shorteners. The Link Shorteners page lists all of your ctx.ly, bit.ly, awe.sm, Po.st, and BudURL accounts that you have created in Social. You can preview the account's settings or delete the account. 3. Click the ctx.ly tab, if necessary. 4. Click to add a custom domain.

382 Settings Specify the desired custom domain, then click Validate. It might take as many as 48 hours for DNS changes to propagate and Social to accept your domain. If Social cannot validate the custom domain, please try again later. 6. Specify the desired account name. 7. From the Owner drop-down list, select an individual user or a group of users. The account owner specifies who in your organization has permission to use the ctx.ly account to generate short URLs in Social while creating posts. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual. 8. Click Save. You are now ready to generate short URLs in posts. Note: You can use the ctx.ly toggle to enable or disable the default ctx.ly shortener. This toggle does not affect the custom domains you add to your account. Training Video: To view a short video explaining how to enable or disable the default ctx.ly shortener, see Social 3.2 Link Shortening Enhancements. Use a Custom Domain with a ctx.ly Link Shortener You can add multiple custom domains over the ctx.ly URL shortener to brand your shortened URLs. Training Video: To view a short video explaining how use to a custom domain with a ctx.ly link shortener, see Social 3.2 Link Shortening Enhancements. This section contains the following information: Purchase the Short Domain Create a DNS Record for Your Domain Configure the ctx.ly Account in Adobe Social Purchase the Short Domain You must purchase the domain to be used for your ctx.ly shortened URLs. You can purchase domains from various third-party vendors. Create a DNS Record for Your Domain The DNS (Domain Name System) allows users' web browsers to translate a domain to a website. After you create the custom domain, you must point it to the Social DNS server using a CNAME record. Depending on the domain registrar you used to purchase your short domain, the process for updating DNS varies. The following steps are general, but vary depending on the domain registrar. 1. Log in to your domain registrar's website. 2. Select the short domain you want to configure. 3. Locate the section used to manage DNS entries. Depending on the registrar, this section might be named "DNS Configuration," "DNS Records," "Advanced DNS," "Total DNS," "Host Records," or something similar. 4. Modify the CNAME record to point the custom domain to the Social DNS server: ctx.ly.

383 Settings 383 For example, you can create a CNAME record mapping your custom domain name from abcd.com to ctx.ly. Note: If you are unsure of how to perform the preceding steps, please contact your domain registrar's support team or your organization's internal IT department. Adobe Social Support cannot help you perform these steps. Configure the ctx.ly Account in Adobe Social 1. From within Social, click Settings > Link Shorteners. The Link Shorteners page lists all of your link shortener accounts that you have created in Social. You can preview the account's settings or delete the account, as necessary. 2. Click the ctx.ly tab, if necessary. 3. Click Add Custom Domain. 4. Specify the desired custom domain that you previously purchased and configured, then click Validate. Note: It might take as many as 48 hours for DNS changes to propagate and Social to accept your domain. If Social cannot validate the custom domain, please try again later. 5. Specify the desired account name. 6. From the Owner drop-down list, select an individual user or a group of users. The account owner specifies who in your organization has permission to use the ctx.ly account to generate short URLs in Social while creating posts. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual. 7. Click Save. You are now ready to generate short URLs in posts. Note: You can use the ctx.ly toggle to enable or disable the default ctx.ly shortener. This toggle does not affect the custom domains you add to your account. Add a bit.ly Account Add one or more bit.ly accounts before you can generate short URLs in posts. Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Publisher Settings. 1. Click Settings > Link Shorteners. The Link Shorteners page lists all of your ctx.ly, bit.ly, awe.sm, Po.st, and BudURL accounts that you have created in Social. You can preview the account's settings or delete the account. 2. Click the Bit.ly tab, if necessary. 3. Click. A bit.ly web page displays. If you are not signed in to bitly, you are asked to sign in. If you are signed in to bit.ly, you are prompted you to authorize Social to access your bit.ly account. 4. Click Allow to grant access and to return to the Social UI. 5. From the Short Domain drop-down list, select a default short domain for that account: bit.ly

384 Settings 384 bitly.com j.mp You can change the default short domain when you create individual posts, if desired. 6. From the Owner drop-down list, select an individual user or a group of users. The account owner specifies who in your organization has permission to use the bit.ly account to generate short URLs in Social while creating posts. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual. You are now ready to generate short URLs in posts. Add an awe.sm Project Add one or more awe.sm projects before you can generate short URLs in posts using awe.sm. Note: Before you can add an awe.sm project to Social, you must first authorize the Adobe Social app for you awe.sm account. Contact the awe.sm support team to configure your account to be used with Adobe Social. In Adobe Social 1. Click Settings > Link Shorteners. The Link Shorteners page lists all of your ctx.ly, bit.ly, awe.sm, Po.st, and BudURL accounts that you have created in Social. You can preview the account's settings or delete the account. 2. Click the awe.sm tab. 3. Click. 4. Specify your awe.sm subscription key, then click Authenticate. 5. From the Owner drop-down list, select an individual user or a group of users. The account owner specifies who in your organization has permission to use the awe.sm project to generate short URLs in Social while creating posts. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual. 6. In the Projects section, select the desired project. 7. Click Save to grant access and to return to the Social UI. You are now ready to generate short URLs in posts. Add a Po.st Account Add one or more Po.st accounts before you can generate short URLs in posts. 1. Click Settings > Link Shorteners. The Link Shorteners page lists all of your ctx.ly, bit.ly, awe.sm, Po.st, and BudURL accounts that you have created in Social. You can preview the account's settings or delete the account. 2. Click the Po.st tab. 3. Click. 4. Specify the campaign name, API key, and short domain. 5. Click Save. to grant access and to return to the Social UI. 6. From the Owner drop-down list, select an individual user or a group of users.

385 Settings 385 The account owner specifies who in your organization has permission to use the Po.st account to generate short URLs in Social while creating posts. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual. You are now ready to generate short URLs in posts. Add a BudURL Account Add one or more BudURL accounts before you can generate short URLs in posts using BudURL. BudURL offers two types of accounts: BudURL and BudURL Pro. Adobe Social supports both types of accounts. 1. Click Settings > Link Shorteners. The Link Shorteners page lists all of your ctx.ly, bit.ly, awe.sm, Po.st, and BudURL accounts that you have created in Social. You can preview the account's settings or delete the account. 2. Click the BudURL tab. 3. Click. 4. Specify the account name, API key, and short domain. 5. Click Save. to grant access and to return to the Social UI. 6. From the Owner drop-down list, select an individual user or a group of users. The account owner specifies who in your organization has permission to use the BudURL account to generate short URLs in Social while creating posts. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual. You are now ready to generate short URLs in posts. Generate Short URLs in Posts Generate short URLs in posts using link shorteners. You can manually shorten each link using a different shortener for each link, shorten all links using the same shortener, or automatically shorten all links using the default shortener. Before a user can configure link shortening preferences, an admin user must have already added link shorteners to Social. You must shorten all links for campaign-tracking purposes. Social displays a warning message if a user enters a link in a post and does not shorten it. 1. While creating the desired type of post in the Publisher or Content Calendar, type the desired destination URL (for example, or in the message field. You can add multiple URLs to a post and use different shorteners for each URL. 2. Shorten the links. If you are using the Publisher to create the post, you can specify a default shortener that will be automatically used to shorten all links in the post. Although the following two illustrations show the Content Calendar, the steps are the same for the Publisher. Shorten Individual Links Using Different Shorteners Hover over each URL link and select the short domain that you want to use to shorten the link. You can shorten each link with different shorteners, if desired, for branding purposes.

386 Settings 386 Shorten All Links Using the Same Shortener Select the desired link shortener from the Shorten All Links With drop-down list, then click Shorten URL. The Shorten URL feature manually triggers URL shortening for all links within the post and selects the last-used shortener by default. You can override the last-used shortener by selecting another link shortener from the drop-down list.

387 Settings 387 Automatically Shorten All Links Using the Default Shortener (Publisher Only) Note: The settings explained in this section are configured at the user level, other Social users are not affected by this user's action. Each user can enable or disable automatic link shortening and select a default shortener, as desired. Click Publisher Settings to access the Link Shortening Preferences options. Toggle Auto-Shortening to On, then select the desired default shortener from the drop-down list. All links will be automatically shortened when published using the default shortener unless you manually select another shortener.

388 Settings 388 To manually override the default and select a different shortener, click the All Links Will Be Auto-Shortened Using drop-down list, then select the desired shortener. You can also hover over any individual link to shorten it manually, regardless whether the Auto-Shortening toggle is set to On or Off. 3. Finish configuring the post's elements as described in Create or Edit a Post in Content Calendar or Publisher. Competitor Pages Use the Competitor Pages to view a list of all of the competitors' pages that you have added to social.you can also add new competitor pages or delete existing pages. When adding competitor pages, consider the following: You don't need to add your owned Facebook pages as competitors in order to see data for those pages in the Competitor Analytics report. Social automatically pulls data for any Facebook pages that have been added to Social (Settings > Facebook Pages). At this time, competitor data is collected for public Facebook pages and posts only. Competitor analytics is not available for pages that are not publicly accessible. Examples of Facebook pages that might not be publicly accessible include pages promoting gambling, alcoholic beverages, or other adult products. Some Facebook pages might have age restrictions or user-validation methods that prevent Social from collecting competitor data.

389 Settings 389 The Facebook API provides data for non-targeted pages only (pages that have not been targeted to specific countries). Social starts collecting data for competitors' pages after you add them to Social. You cannot backfill data. Data is updated from Facebook hourly. However, Social already has data for a competitor if that competitor was already being tracked by another customer in Social. This data then displays in both customers' accounts and you might immediately see backfilled data in the Competitor Analytics report for a newly added competitor. Showing existing data for both customers does not present confidentiality issues because the data was collected without any special authorization. Add Competitor Pages Add pages of your competitors to Social so that you can compare data from your owned Facebook pages and public data from the Facebook pages of your competitors. After you add competitor pages to Social, you can analyze the data on the Competitor Analytics report. 1. Click Settings > Competitor Pages. 2. Click to add a new page. Note: If you have not previously added competitor pages to Social, the Add New Competitor dialog box automatically displays. You can add as many as 50 competitor pages to each account. 3. Fill in the fields:

390 Settings 390 Competitor URL: Specify the full URL of the desired competitor's Facebook page. For example, The easiest way to ensure that the URL is correct is to navigate to the page in your browser, then copy and paste the URL into Social. Associated Pages: Associate this competitor with one or more of your owned public pages. You can click Select All Pages to associate this competitor with all of your owned pages. You can also select all pages and then deselect a subset of the pages. This feature is helpful if you are interested in analyzing the competitive data that corresponds to a relevant page for which you have ownership and responsibility. Associated Page Groups:Associate this competitor with one or more of your owned pages.you can click Select All Page Groups to associate this competitor with all of your owned pages. You can also select all page groups and the deselect a subset of the groups. 4. Click Save. Delete Competitor Pages Delete competitors' pages that you no longer want to analyze using the Competitor Analytics report. 1. Click Settings > Competitor Pages. 2. This pages lists all of the competitors' pages that have been added to Social. Select one or more pages, then click. If the check box next to a competitor's page is greyed out, you cannot delete that page because you do not own one or more pages that this competitor's page is associated with. Social prevents you from deleting pages that are associated with owned pages that you do not own. Classifying Terms in SAINT Create classifications for the terms you want to track in Social. Adding classifications to the Terms variable lets you group sets of terms and sum the associated metrics in reporting. For instance, multiple variations of spelling can be grouped under the correctly spelled term. Another example could be keeping track of the parent category of product-related keywords, or segregating all terms between "My Brand" and "Competition." Classifications also let you simplify the name of long, complex searches by adding a "Friendly Name" as a classification column. When you create a classification, you create it for a specific Adobe Analytics variable, which instructs Analytics to generate reports that display the variable data based on the defined classification. After you complete the steps in Creating the Conversion Classification Structure and Add Rules in Bulk additional reports are available under the Campaigns heading in Analytics > Custom Reports. Creating the Conversion Classification Structure Create the Conversion Classification structure in the Adobe Admin Tools to categorize terms into groups. If you create Adobe Analytics classifications for your terms, you can use the Terms report to see only terms included in the specified classification. Any unclassified terms (terms with empty cells in the SAINT file for the given column) will be grouped under "None" for that classification report. The newly created classification can be selected using a fly-out menu from the Terms menu in the left navigation pane.

391 Settings 391 Note: To create conversion classifications, you must be an Adobe Analytics Admin. 1. Log in to the Adobe Marketing Cloud. 2. In the Suite header, click Admin > Admin Tools > Report Suites. 3. Select the desired report suite. 4. From the Edit Settings drop-down list, click Conversion > Conversion Classifications. 5. From the Select Classification Type drop-down list, select Term. Note: Do not delete the Term or Active classifications. If you do so, Social will not function. 6. Click the arrow icon next to Term, then click Add Classification to display the Create New Classification dialog box. 7. Ensure that Text is selected from the Select Type drop-down list. 8. In the Name field, type a name for the classification. For example, to group your competitor's terms, you could create a classification named "Competition." 9. Click Save.

392 Settings Upload the SAINT file. For more information, see Import File in the Classifications guide. If you are using Mac OS, save the file as Windows Formatted Text instead of Text Tab-delimited. Mac computers process text files differently than Windows, which causes SAINT to throw an error. If you experience upload issues, see the Common SAINT Upload Issues article in the Adobe Knowledge Base. Classification uploads usually take no longer than 72 hours to process. Adobe Analytics 15 and ad hoc reporting process SAINT uploads in six-hour increments, updated four times a day. For more information, see SAINT Processing Time in the Adobe Knowledge Base. After you download the SAINT file template, you'll notice additional columns for the newly added classifications. When you set a value for this new column in a row, that value will appear as a line item in the report for the given classification, which you select from the fly-out menu.